IT and Desktop Videos

Download a course collection

Select a category


Operating Systems and Servers (4905)

Expand all | Collapse all

Apple (24)
Title Speaker Summary ID
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Adding Users and Groups Jamie Campbell Implementing a server on your network involves working with users and groups. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to add users and groups in Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion. 55041
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Changing Your Host Name Jamie Campbell OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management app that includes tools that enable you to manage and configure network services; including file sharing; mail services; and DNS services. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to change your host name in OS X Server. 55048
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Establishing Groups Jamie Campbell In Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion; you can create groups to handle how different people interact with the network. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses Users and Groups and how to create groups In Mac OS X Server. 55054
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: File Sharing Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management application that includes File Sharing features. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses OS X Server File Sharing. 55044
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Installing OS X Server Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is an add-on application to OS X. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to purchase and install the OS X Server application. 55038
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Installing OS X Server Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion offers easy-to-use network management features. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains the OS X Server interface. 55039
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Setting Access Permissions Jamie Campbell OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management app. Access Permissions are a critical aspect of any network and OS X Server makes it easy to establish permissions for users and groups. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to set access permissions in OS X Server. 55052
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Setting Up Calendar Server Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management application. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to Calendar Server and explains how to set it up. 55046
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Setting Up FTP Access Jamie Campbell OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management app that includes tools to manage and configure network services; including file sharing; mail services; DNS services; and many other important network management features. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to set up FTP Access in OS X Server. 55051
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Setting Up Mail Server Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management application that includes tools to manage and configure network services; and set up Mail Server. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to set up Mail Server. 55047
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Setting up Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management application. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses virtual private networks (VPNs) and how you can set up a VPN in OS X Server. 55045
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Setting Up Wikis Jamie Campbell In Mac OS X Server; you have the Wiki server where users can share their information and even create blogs. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to set up the Wiki server and begin creating the Wikis. 55055
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: User Settings Jamie Campbell OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management app that makes it easy to configure user settings. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains user settings in OS X Server. 55053
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Using Alerts Jamie Campbell OS X Server for Mountain Lion provides alerts on certain activities and that's a useful tool for administrators. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains how to set up and configure alerts in OS X Server. 55049
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Using Open Directory Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management application that includes tools to manage and configure network services. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses using Open Directory in OS X Server. 55042
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Using the Profile Manager to Configure iOS Devices Jamie Campbell In Mac OS X Server; you can use the Profile Manager to set iOS devices. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with the Profile Manager for iOS device settings. 55058
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Using the Profile Manager to Configure User Settings Jamie Campbell In Mac OS X Server; you can use the Profile Manager to manage the user; groups and device settings. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to work with the Profile Manager for Group settings. 55057
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Web Hosting Jamie Campbell In Mac OS X Server; you can host websites. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses how to host websites. 55056
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Working with Certificates Jamie Campbell OS X Server for Mountain Lion makes it easy to manage and configure network services; including file sharing; mail services; DNS services; and many other important network management features. In this video; Jamie Campbell discusses certificates and OS X Server. 55050
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Activating Profile Manager Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management application that that can be used to activate the Profile Manager to manage network devices. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to Profile Manager. 55043
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Benefits of Using OS X Server Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful all-around server application to manage your Mac and iOS devices. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains some of the benefits of using OS X Server in your network. 55037
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Introducing OS X Server Jamie Campbell Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion is a powerful server management application that includes tools to manage and configure network services. In this video; Jamie Campbell introduces you to Mac OS X Server. 55036
Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion: Next Steps with OS X Server Jamie Campbell After you install Mac OS X Server for Mountain Lion; the Server interface will suggest the next steps for setting up your network. In this video; Jamie Campbell explains the importance of these next steps in network management. 55040
OS X 10.9 (Mavericks): Shared Photo Streams Bob Flisser OS X 10.9 (Mavericks) allows you to share photos with other users using shared photo streams. In this Video; Bob Flisser demonstrates how to share a photo from an iPad to an iPhone; and how to break a connection after the share is complete. 53060
Data Center (2)
Title Speaker Summary ID
Using Docker: Docker Hub Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe the process of accessing Docker hub. 89596
Using Docker: Understanding Docker Registry Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to differentiate between public and private registries in Docker. 89595
DevOps (399)
Title Speaker Summary ID
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Adding Audit Triggering Rules Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to define audit triggering rules and describe what happens when an audit fails. 96903
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Applying Recipes to a Test Kitchen Instance Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create and apply recipes to a Test Kitchen instance. 96899
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Authenticating Chef Servers Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how the Chef server is authenticated using the Chef server API. 96926
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Best Practices for Preparing Cookbooks Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to prepare and evaluate Cookbooks using best practices. 96919
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Best Practices for Writing Chef DSL Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the rules and best practices for writing Chef DSL. 96918
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Chef Conferences and User Groups Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the places where major Chef training events and conferences are held. 98747
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Configuring the Chef Server to Use Chef Analytics Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the post-installation steps of Chef Analytics that need to be performed on the Enterprise Chef server. 96886
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Configuring the Workstation Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Chef Tools such as VirtualBox; Vagrant; and Test Kitchen. 96897
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Cookbook Version Control Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to handle multiple versions cookbooks. 96914
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Chef Client Instance Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a Chef client instance by starting Chef client on a managed node. 96891
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Cookbook for Server Auditing Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to create a cookbook for server auditing. 96898
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Hostname Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how host names are used in Chef Server/Chef Analytics architecture. 96888
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Mail Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create an SMTP mail server to send Chef Analytics notifications. 96892
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Notification Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create simple notifications. 96893
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Rule Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create simple rules. 96894
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating and Using a Cookbook Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create and use a web server cookbook for auditing. 96900
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating Complex Recipes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create complex Chef recipes and cookbooks. 96909
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Creating Users Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create Chef users. 96922
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Deleting Nodes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the various ways to delete nodes from a Chef server. 96908
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Exercise: Create a Recipe and a Cookbook Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a recipe and a cookbook that will enforce compliance on a server and send a notification if the server is not compliant. 96905
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Exercise: Create an Alert and Notification Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create an alert and notification process in a control. 98748
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Extending Chef Functionality into Other DevOps Tools Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Chef functionality can be extended into other DevOps tools. 96929
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Freezing Cookbooks Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to freeze and unfreeze a cookbook; and describe the benefits of doing so. 96910
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Grouping into Environments Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use roles to group nodes with the same function into environments. 96911
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Implementing High Availability Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to implement high availability within the Chef architecture to provide server failover support. 96924
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Inspecting Cookbooks Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to inspect cookbooks and manage cookbook dependencies. 96906
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Installing Chef Analytics Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to install Chef Analytics. 96885
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Logging in to the Analytics Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to log into the Chef Analytics server and perform simple navigation. 96890
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Managing Applications Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use an environment cookbook to manage application configuration. 96921
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Managing VMs with Vagrant Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Chef and Vagrant together for virtualization and automated provisioning. 96907
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Performing Audit and Enforcing Compliance Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to make updates to a web server to enforce compliance. 96901
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Preparing the Enterprise Chef Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to prepare the Enterprise Chef Server to communicate with Chef Analytics. 96884
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Prerequisites for Installing Chef Analytics Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the network and system prerequisites for installing Chef Analytics. 96883
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Running Chef Client as a Daemon Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how a Chef client can automatically be started as a daemon. 96912
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Running the Audit Cookbook Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how audit rules are enforced in an auditing cookbook. 96904
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Setting Runtime Breakpoints within Recipes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Chef shell to set runtime breakpoints within recipes. 96913
Chef - Beyond the Basics: The Features of Chef Analytics Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the purpose; architecture; components; and network topology of Chef Analytics. 96880
Chef - Beyond the Basics: The Rules for Chef Analytics Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between noteworthy Chef Analytics actions and events. 96881
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Triggering Rules Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a simple trigger. 96895
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Understanding Notifications and Action Logs Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how action logs are generated and recognize the Chef pipeline architecture. 96882
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Uploading and Applying Cookbooks to the Chef Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create an audit alert when auditing a server for compliance fails. 96902
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using Audit-mode Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how audit-mode can be used to enforce server compliance. 96896
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using BitBucket Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Bitbucket can be used as a private code repository for Chef cookbooks. 96928
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using Chef Provisioning Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the individual steps that occur when the nodes managed by Chef server are provisioned. 96920
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using ChefSpec Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use ChefSpec to test resources and recipes in a simulated Chef Client run. 96916
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using Foodcritic Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Foodcritic to find common syntax and best practices' problems in your cookbooks. 96917
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using GitHub Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how the Chef community uses GitHub to share code and collaborate on projects. 96927
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using LDAP Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how Chef will allow users to login with their network credentials (LDAP). 96925
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Using Test Kitchen for Workflow Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Test Kitchen as a test harness tool for your workflow. 96915
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Verifying Installation with Command Line Utilities Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to verify successful installation of Chef Analytics by using command line utilities. 96889
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Working with Configuration Files Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use and deploy configuration files on the Chef Analytics server. 96887
Chef - Beyond the Basics: Working with Configuration Files/Packages Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use configuration files and packages in a Chef installation. 96923
DevOps Fundamentals: Aligning Teams Using Confluence Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Confluence for parallel team management. 86149
DevOps Fundamentals: Application Deployment using DevOps Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to perform application builds and deployments using the DevOps methodology. 86144
DevOps Fundamentals: Brief History of the Traditional SDLC Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the patterns and evolution of a traditional SDLC; and how DevOps grew out of it. 86128
DevOps Fundamentals: Configuration Management Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare traditional configuration tasks with DevOps and recognize DevOps configuration tools such as Chef and Puppet. 86135
DevOps Fundamentals: Creating Storage and Databases Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use DevOps to create backends for your applications. 86136
DevOps Fundamentals: DevOps Acceptance and Usage Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the major users of DevOps and describe reasons for its acceptance and adoption. 86133
DevOps Fundamentals: Factors Driving DevOps Acceptance Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the factors involved in the widespread acceptance of the DevOps methodology. 86131
DevOps Fundamentals: Hardware Provisioning Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how DevOps is used to replace traditional hardware provisioning tasks. 86134
DevOps Fundamentals: Introduction to the DevOps Workflow Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the DevOps workflow. 86140
DevOps Fundamentals: Managing Cross-Platform Development with DevOps Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how DevOps is used to manage cross-platform development issues. 86151
DevOps Fundamentals: New Challenges of the DevOps Methodology Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to name the challenges created by the adoption of the DevOps methodology. 86132
DevOps Fundamentals: Operations Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare traditional operations tasks with DevOps. 86139
DevOps Fundamentals: Problems Solved by Using DevOps Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare the traditional SDLC with DevOps and recognize how DevOps is used to solve software development problems. 86129
DevOps Fundamentals: Providing Security Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to configure application security through DevOps. 86137
DevOps Fundamentals: QA and User Acceptance Testing Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between the DevOps stages of quality assurance and user acceptance. 86143
DevOps Fundamentals: Requirement Gathering with DevOps Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify how DevOps is used when gathering software requirements. 86141
DevOps Fundamentals: Rethinking the SDLC with DevOps Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how DevOps can be used to replace the traditional SDLC. 86130
DevOps Fundamentals: Set up DevOps processes and tools Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the software development life cycle within an organization and be able to recommend DevOps processes and tools. 87305
DevOps Fundamentals: Sharing Code with Bitbucket Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Bitbucket for code sharing and versioning. 86150
DevOps Fundamentals: Sharing Software Issues with JIRA Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how JIRA is used to log and share software issues. 86148
DevOps Fundamentals: The DevOps Development Cycle Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how DevOps changes the way software is developed. 86142
DevOps Fundamentals: The First Step in the DevOps Methodology Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the DevOps structure and methodology. 86127
DevOps Fundamentals: Using DevOps for Maintenance and Release Scheduling Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to define the steps for DevOps software releases and maintenance scheduling and recognize DevOps release tools such as Jenkins. 86145
DevOps Fundamentals: Using GitHub for Collaboration Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to specify how collaboration occurs with GitHub. 86147
DevOps Fundamentals: Using HipChat for Distributed Team Management Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how HipChat is used to manage geographically separated teams. 86146
DevOps Fundamentals: Virtualization Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to provision virtual servers through DevOps and recognize DevOps virtualization tools such as Vagrant. 86138
Docker - Beyond the Basics - Exercise: Create an Advanced Docker Deployment Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Docker to create a complex deployment using IP addressing; security; and DTR APIs. 98750
Docker - Beyond the Basics - Exercise: Create and Layer an Image Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Docker to create and layer an image. 96955
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Accessing Firefox from a Container Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a Docker container that just runs Firefox. 96941
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Allowing Rights to Host Mounted Volumes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to allow a nonprivileged volume access to host files from a container. 96960
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Basic Concepts of Docker Machine Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how the Docker machine creates Docker hosts on your computer or data center. 96976
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Binding Docker Container Ports to the Host Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to configure containers to accept incoming connections. 96953
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Building a Container Interactively Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Docker commands to run an interactive shell. 96937
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Building a Container Using a Dockerfile Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a Dockerfile that layers on the server and the site content in a single build. 96938
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Building a WordPress Image Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to run an application that requires running multiple services simultaneously. 96942
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Building an Apache Image Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to install the fedora-dockerfiles package to get the Dockerfiles . 96940
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Building and Deploying an Application on OpenShift Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how OpenShift triggers the Docker build and how to supply to the Docker context to build images. 96969
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Building from Basic Volumes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to run Docker inspect to examine volume configuration. 96943
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Building Images Using a Dockerfile Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create Docker images using a Dockerfile. 96939
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Command Line Options in Docker Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the Docker network-related command line options. 96949
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Communication Between Containers and Outside World Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize whether a container can communicate to the outside world. 96952
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Communication Between Two Containers Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how the communication between two containers is governed at the operating system level. 96951
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Configuring DNS Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Docker configures DNS with containers and virtual files. 96950
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Configuring PaaS with OpenShift Origin Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Docker with OpenShift Origin to configure Platform as a Service. 96968
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Configuring the Web Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to analyze how a deployed web server is configured and built. 96945
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Containers; Layers; and Images Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recall the components and the steps in building Docker images. 96935
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Stack with Volumes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the worker to bridge multiple servers together with volumes. 96948
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Creating an Account on Docker Hub After watching this video; you will be able to describe the various steps to create an account on Docker Hub. 96930
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Creating an Image from a Container Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to define the process of creating a Docker image from an existing container. 96931
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Dockerizing a Riak Service Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a docker image with a preinstalled Riak. 96963
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Dockerizing an SSH Service Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create an SSH service in a docker container. 96964
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Examining Image History Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the docker history command to find all the intermediate image layers. 96933
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Gaining Access to Volumes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the methods and the attributes to gain access to volumes. 96944
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Handling IPv4 and IPv6 Addressing Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Docker handles IPv4 and IPv6 addressing. 96956
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Importing; Deleting; and Exporting Images Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between the Docker commands when performing image maintenance. 96934
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Installing a Docker Machine using VirtualBox Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker machine to create; use; and manage a Docker host inside of VirtualBox. 96977
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Installing Multiple Machines on your Cloud Provider Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker machine to use the same interface to create hosts in local; virtual; or cloud platforms. 96978
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Methodologies of Image Layering Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to summarize the different approaches to building Docker images. 96936
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Publishing an Image to the Registry Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to apply the docker push command to push the image to the registry. 96932
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Removing Capabilities Inside Containers Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Linux divides the privileges of the root user. 96961
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Running the Container Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to run the container server. 96947
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Sharing Namespaces Between the Container and Host Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to share a namespace between two or more containers. 96962
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using Different Drivers on your Docker Machine Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between the different drivers on the Docker machine and describe the tasks they perform. 96979
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using Docker Machine Commands Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the Docker machine commands and how they are used. 98749
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using Drone Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use drone to configure projects to automatically build; test; and deploy. 96967
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using MongoDB and Docker Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a Docker container for MongoDB. 96965
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using NDP Proxying Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use NDP proxying to connect Docker containers to the Internet via IPv6. 96957
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using Pipework Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to use Pipework for Docker container network configuration. 96954
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using SELinux to Configure Mandatory Access Control Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to set up SELinux on CentOS/RHEL/Fedora systems. 96959
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using Shippable and OpenShift Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Shippable to perform CI/CD and then deploy it on Red Hat's OpenShift. 96966
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using Switched/Routed Network Environment Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Docker uses switched and routed network environments. 96958
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using the DTR Accounts API Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker Trusted Registry Accounts API. 96970
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using the DTR Repositories API Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker Trusted Registry Accounts Repositories API. 96972
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using the DTR Teams API Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker Trusted Registry Teams API. 96971
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using the Map Generator Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe where to get files to create and write the map. 96946
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using the Organization Owned Repository Access API Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker organization owned repository Access API. 96974
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using the Organization Owned Repository Namespace Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker Organization Owned Repository Namespace API. 96975
Docker - Beyond the Basics: Using the User Owned Repository Access API Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Docker User Owned Repository Access API. 96973
Extending Jenkins: Advanced Build Triggers Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to apply Build Triggers in Jenkins to automate the build process. 103832
Extending Jenkins: Building Advanced Jenkins Freestyle Jobs Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recall the steps required for creating and executing Jenkins freestyle jobs with advanced project options. 103831
Extending Jenkins: Jenkins Installation Options Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to summarize the installation and configuration steps and describe different platform considerations. 103829
Extending Jenkins: Jenkins Integration Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Jenkins support for Windows; Java; and continuous deployment tools. 103827
Extending Jenkins: Writing Build Scripts Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Jenkins to execute command line and shell scripts. 103835
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Creating a Business Process Report Travis Welton After watching this video; you will be able to convert a Vuser script to a business process report. 102835
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Creating a Vuser Script Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to create a Vuser script. 102832
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Debugging a Vuser Script Travis Welton After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot replay problems for a Vuser script. 102842
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Exploring VuGen Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to describe the purpose of VuGen and the VuGen interface. 102829
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Installing LoadRunner Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to install LoadRunner components. 102828
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Overview of LoadRunner Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of LoadRunner. 102825
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Overview of Performance Testing Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to describe performance testing. 102824
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Planning for a Load Test Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to plan for a load test. 102826
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Recording a Vuser Script Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to record a Vuser script. 102833
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Replaying a Vuser Script Travis Welton After watching this video; you will be able to replay a Vuser script. 102836
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: System Requirements Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to identify system requirements and supported environments for LoadRunner 12.5. 102827
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Using the Protocol Advisor Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to use the Protocol Advisor to find the most suitable protocol for a Vuser script. 102831
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Viewing and Saving Vuser Scripts Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to view Vuser scripts in VuGen. 102834
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Viewing Test Results Travis Welton After watching this video; you will be able to view; filter; and print test results. 102837
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Vuser Types; Protocols; and Script Development Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to describe Vuser types; protocols; and steps in Vuser script development. 102830
LoadRunner 12 Essentials: Working with Snapshots Joshua Rector After watching this video; you will be able to work with snapshots and add a text check for a Vuser script from a snapshot. 102838
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Accessing Facts by Using Puppet Code Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Puppet code to access facts. 96840
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Applying Control Branching Statements Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to apply control branching statements of Puppet. 96837
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Basics of Hiera Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the problems and issues that can be fixed by Hiera. 96876
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Communicating Over the Network Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Puppet Apply communicates over the network and uses local collections of modules. 96852
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Comparing the Functionality of Puppet and Vagrant Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish the functionality of Puppet from Vagrant. 96871
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Configure and Schedule a Puppet Agent Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a cron job that will execute a Puppet agent. 96855
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Configuring External SSL Termination Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the steps needed to configure external SSL termination on the Puppet server. 96870
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Configuring Hiera Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the Hiera global configuration settings and how configuration files are resolved at runtime. 96878
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Create Vagrant VMs Provisioned with Puppet Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create Vagrant virtual machines that will be provisioned by a Puppet manifest. 98746
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Puppet Manifest Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to prepare a Puppet manifest to be deployed on Vagrant-created virtual machines. 96873
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Creating a Puppet Module Extrapolated by Hiera Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a Puppet module that will be extrapolated by Hiera. 98745
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Creating Custom Reports in Ruby Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom report in Ruby and include it in a Puppet module. 96866
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Creating Virtual Machines Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Vagrant to create virtual machines. 96872
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Developing a Module and Deploying it on Puppet Forge Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to develop a module and deploy it on Puppet Forge. 96859
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Diving Deep into the Agent/Master Communication Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the communication between Puppet master and Puppet agent in detail. 96844
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Executing Main Manifest Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how the Puppet agent executes its main manifest. 96843
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Executing Puppet Agent as a Scheduled cron Job Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to execute Puppet Agent on Linux machines as a scheduled cron job. 96848
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Executing Puppet Agent as a Service Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to execute Puppet agent as a service. 96847
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: External CA Support Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare the different options when configuring an external CA. 96868
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Functionality and Features of Puppet Apply Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the functionality of Puppet apply and its features. 96850
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Generating Reports and Analyzing YAML Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the internal report handlers to generate reports; and analyze YAML. 96865
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Handling Reporting and Logging Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to discuss how Puppet Apply handles logging and report handling. 96853
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Identifying Configuration Issues While Logging Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Puppet agent performs logging; and identify logging configuration issues. 96849
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Installing and Removing RubyGems Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recall the role of Ruby; and install and remove RubyGems. 96835
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Installing and Uninstalling Modules Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Puppet module installation tool to install and uninstall modules. 96858
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Installing Hiera Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to install Hiera from a package or a gem; and install Puppet functions. 96877
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Installing Puppet Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to install Puppet Server. 96832
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Managing File Resources Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Puppet's file resource type to manage folders and files. 96861
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Managing Package Resources Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Puppet's package resource type to manage software packages. 96863
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Managing Service Resources Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Puppet to manage operating system services. 96864
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Managing User Resources Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Puppet's group and user resource types to manage group and user accounts. 96860
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Puppet Scaling Issues Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Puppet scales as the number of nodes grow. 96841
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Reviewing Best Practices and Writing Modules Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to review the best practices in module design and write modules using the module generator. 96856
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Reviewing the Configuration Steps Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to review the configuration steps and describe the contents of each major configuration file. 96834
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Reviewing the Puppet Topology Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between the roles of Puppet Server; Puppet master; Puppet agent; and Puppet apply. 96830
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Runtime Environment of the Puppet Server Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to summarize the role of the Puppet Server and describe its relationship with Puppet master. 96831
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Setting Up Names and Certificates Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to set up initial certificate and domain name for a Puppet Server installation. 96833
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Starting Puppet Agent by Using the CLI Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the command line to start Puppet agent and interpret command line messages. 96846
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: The Agent/Master Certificate Process Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the certificate signing process between Puppet master and Puppet agent in detail. 96842
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Types of Variables Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the types of variables used within Puppet. 96836
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Understanding Node Definitions Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to write Puppet code to apply specific configurations to specific nodes. 96839
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Understanding the Run Environment of Puppet Apply Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe Puppet apply's run environment and execute the main manifest. 96851
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Understanding the Start Options for Puppet Agent Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the start options for Puppet agent and describe their functionality. 96845
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Using Certificates from an Existing External CA Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Puppet Server can be configured to use certificates from an existing external CA. 96869
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Using Modules and Plugins Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use modules and plugins to enhance and extend the functionality of Puppet. 96857
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Using Puppet and Hiera Together Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Hiera and Puppet together. 96879
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Using Puppet Apply to Manage Systems Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to execute the Puppet resource command to set up a Puppet apply cron job. 96854
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Using Puppet for Provisioning Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to modify Vagrant configuration to use Puppet for provisioning. 96874
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Using the New Report Format Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between older report formats and the new report format. 96867
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Virtualization and Provisioning Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to run Vagrant to create virtual machines provisioned by Puppet. 96875
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Working on Scheduled Tasks Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Puppet to edit; create; and delete a scheduled task. 96862
Puppet - Beyond the Basics: Writing and Calling Built-in and Custom Functions Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to write and call built-in and custom functions. 96838
Using Docker - Exercise: Implement a Strategy to Update a Docker Image Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to define steps to edit an Ubuntu image for adding a command to it. 89634
Using Docker: Accessing a Docker Daemon Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps and commands to access a Docker daemon. 89615
Using Docker: Adding Labels to Image Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe steps to add labels to an image. 89637
Using Docker: Adjust Memory Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to configure memory for Docker. 89603
Using Docker: Affinity Filters Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to configure an affinity filter. 89650
Using Docker: Backup and Restore Data Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to back up and restore data. 89633
Using Docker: Basic Docker Architecture Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe Docker architecture. 89593
Using Docker: Basic Docker Commands Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the syntax and version of a Docker command. 89616
Using Docker: BinPack Strategy Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to use BinPack strategy to choose a Docker node in a cluster. 89654
Using Docker: Building and Running an App in Docker Compose Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to build and run an application in Docker Compose. 89643
Using Docker: Configure Data Volumes Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to configure data volumes. 89631
Using Docker: Connecting Containers through Naming Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps to link containers by referencing through names. 89627
Using Docker: Constraint Filters Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to configure a constraint filter. 89649
Using Docker: Control Groups Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the use of control groups in Docker. 89598
Using Docker: Create a Data Label Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to implement steps to create a data label. 89656
Using Docker: Creating a Docker Group Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to create a docker group. 89602
Using Docker: Daemonizing a Docker Container Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to daemonize a Docker container. 89614
Using Docker: Data Volume Containers Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to create a data volume container to share data between containers. 89632
Using Docker: Data Volumes Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the step to list available Docker images. 89630
Using Docker: Define Services in Docker Compose Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to build a .yml file for defining Docker services. 89642
Using Docker: Dependency and Health Filters Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to configure a dependency and health filter. 89652
Using Docker: Discovery Service Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to work with discovery services and list the different approaches. 89647
Using Docker: DNS Server Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to configure DNS for Docker. 89605
Using Docker: Docker Client Commands Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify Docker client commands and usage. 89617
Using Docker: Docker Image in Compose Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to build a Dockerfile for defining images. 89641
Using Docker: Docker Internals Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify internal components on which Docker is based. 89594
Using Docker: Docker versus Virtual Machines Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to compare Docker with virtual machine deployments. 89592
Using Docker: Enable UFW Forwarding Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to configure UFW forwarding in Docker. 89604
Using Docker: Environmental Variables Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to use environmental variables to link containers. 89628
Using Docker: Features of Dockerization Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the features of a Dockerized application. 89657
Using Docker: Filters and Types Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe the need for filters and its various types. 89648
Using Docker: Finding Docker Images Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to search for Docker images. 89623
Using Docker: Installing Compose Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe the steps to install Compose in Docker. 89640
Using Docker: Installing Docker on CentOS Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to install a Docker package on CentOS 6.5. 89607
Using Docker: Installing Docker on Ubuntu Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to install Docker on Ubuntu. 89601
Using Docker: Introduction to Docker Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe Docker and the problem it solves. 89590
Using Docker: Listing Docker Images Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the step to list available Docker images. 89621
Using Docker: Listing Environment Variables Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list available environment variables and its impact on etc/hosts file. 89629
Using Docker: Namespaces Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the use of namespaces in Docker. 89597
Using Docker: Naming and Inspecting the Container Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to use commands to name and inspect config details in JSON. 89620
Using Docker: Need for Custom Metadata Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the need for custom metadata in Docker. 89635
Using Docker: Need for Docker Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe the uses of Docker. 89591
Using Docker: Network Port Mapping Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the use of the -p and -d flags to control port access. 89626
Using Docker: Port Filters Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to configure a port filter. 89651
Using Docker: Prerequisites to Install Docker on CentOS Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe CentOS version and kernel support. 89606
Using Docker: Prerequisites to Install Docker on Ubuntu Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to verify minimum requirements for Ubuntu. 89600
Using Docker: Pulling a Docker Image Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to pull a Docker image. 89622
Using Docker: Pushing and Removing Images from Host Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to push and remove an image from the host or registry. 89625
Using Docker: Query Labels Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe steps to filter images by label. 89638
Using Docker: Reviewing the Application Container Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe container and port details. 89619
Using Docker: Running a Sample Docker Container Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to use the run command to spawn a Docker container. 89610
Using Docker: Running an Application in Docker Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe the command to execute an application in Docker. 89618
Using Docker: Running an Interactive Docker Container Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to spawn an interactive Docker container. 89613
Using Docker: Setting up Swarm Nodes Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to set up swarm nodes for clustering. 89645
Using Docker: Spread Strategy Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to use spread strategy to choose a Docker node in a cluster. 89655
Using Docker: Steps to Access and Work with an Ubuntu Image Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to access; interact; and see results from a command executed on an image from a local or remote registry. 89612
Using Docker: Storing Structured Data in Labels Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe how different types of data can be stored in labels. 89636
Using Docker: Templating of Docker Images Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to describe the process of templating an image. 89609
Using Docker: Understanding Clustering Basics and Prerequisites Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the need for clustering Docker hosts and prerequisites for Swarm. 89644
Using Docker: Understanding Docker Compose Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identity the need for Docker Compose tool for defining and running applications. 89639
Using Docker: Understanding Swarm Strategies Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the need for swarm strategies and list different types of strategies. 89653
Using Docker: Understanding the Docker Container Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to run and interact with a Docker container. 89611
Using Docker: Union Systems Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to identify the use of union systems in Docker. 89599
Using Docker: Update; Create; and Commit Docker Images Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps to update; create; and commit a Docker image. 89624
Using Docker: Using Docker CLI to Manage Nodes Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to use commands to access and list nodes. 89646
Using Docker: Verifying Docker Daemon Balasubramaniam Narayanamoorthy After watching this video; you will be able to start and verify Docker daemon in CentOS. 89608
Using Puppet: A Comprehensive Example Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with an end-to-end example of a Puppet task. 86208
Using Puppet: Basic Puppet Architecture Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the different components of the Puppet architecture. 86182
Using Puppet: Catalog(s) Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Puppet uses catalogs. 86201
Using Puppet: Classes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe what a Puppet class is; and how it is used. 86198
Using Puppet: Collections Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the different kinds of collections. 86222
Using Puppet: Common Puppet Runtime Failures Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe common runtime failures. 87307
Using Puppet: Configuring SSH Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify how Puppet uses SSH. 86210
Using Puppet: Creating User Accounts Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create and set up a user account. 86209
Using Puppet: Define a Puppet Implementation Strategy Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to define prerequirements for a Puppet installation on a local machine. 86202
Using Puppet: Deploying Directory Trees Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and deploy file tree structures. 86215
Using Puppet: Distributing SSH keys Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how SSH keys are distributed in a Puppet installation. 86211
Using Puppet: Executing Puppet Commands Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the major Puppet commands and how to execute them. 86191
Using Puppet: Expression Substitution Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to substitute expressions . 86221
Using Puppet: Expressions Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the different expressions used in Puppet. 86219
Using Puppet: Flow of Control Statements Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the syntax of flow of control statements. 86217
Using Puppet: General Installation Requirements and Considerations Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the general installation requirements of Puppet. 86188
Using Puppet: Grouping Resources Together in a Manifesto Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the different methods in grouping resources within a manifest. 86197
Using Puppet: Handling Puppet Resource Dependencies Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify Puppet resources and handing their dependencies. 86205
Using Puppet: Introduction to Puppet Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe Puppet and the problems it solves. 86177
Using Puppet: Linux Installation (Master/Agent) Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to install Puppet on a Linux system. 86189
Using Puppet: Managing Puppet Configuration Files Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the contents of a Puppet configuration file and how to manage it. 86206
Using Puppet: Manifest Concepts Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe from a conceptual level how Puppet uses manifests. 86196
Using Puppet: Market Acceptance of Puppet and Industry Applications Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify organizations who use Puppet and how Puppet is integrated into their DevOps methodology. 86180
Using Puppet: Modules Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how Puppet uses modules. 86199
Using Puppet: Network vs. Cloud Puppet Implementations Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between cloud and network installations. 86184
Using Puppet: Node Configuration Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with configuring nodes to add hosts to a Puppet setup. 86194
Using Puppet: Open Source Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of open source Puppet. 86185
Using Puppet: Operators Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use program operators in Puppet. 86218
Using Puppet: Overview of Predefined Resources Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the predefined Puppet resources and how they are used. 86195
Using Puppet: Package Coding and Management Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how coding is performed in Puppet and how it is managed. 86203
Using Puppet: Plan a Puppet Implementation Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to establish a configuration management solution using Puppet. 87308
Using Puppet: Printing Messages Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify how to print messages. 86225
Using Puppet: Puppet Enterprise (PE) Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the uses and features of Puppet Enterprise (PE). 86186
Using Puppet: Puppet Forge Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to use Puppet Forge to create and share Puppet modules. 86200
Using Puppet: Puppet Modes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the different Puppet modes. 86224
Using Puppet: Puppet Monitoring Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with different methods of monitoring Puppet. 86226
Using Puppet: Puppet Versions Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the different versions of Puppet and their features. 86187
Using Puppet: Puppet vs. Other DevOps Configuration Management Tools Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare Puppet with other DevOps configuration management tools. 86179
Using Puppet: Service Management Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic core concepts of Puppet service management and the related vocabulary. 86204
Using Puppet: Starting and Stopping Puppet Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps needed to start and stop Puppet. 86192
Using Puppet: The Package-File-Service Pattern Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the Package-File-Service pattern and how it is used in Puppet development. 86207
Using Puppet: Types of Puppet Reports and Summaries Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with different kinds of Puppet Reports. 86223
Using Puppet: Understanding Core Concepts of Puppet Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic core functional concepts of Puppet and the related vocabulary. 86178
Using Puppet: Understanding Puppet Nodes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic functionality of Puppet nodes and recognize how they are used. 86183
Using Puppet: User Account Management Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between and manage user account. 86212
Using Puppet: Using cron Resources to Run Scheduled Jobs Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with cron resources to run scheduled jobs. 86214
Using Puppet: Using Declarative and Readable Puppet DSL Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use declarative; readable Puppet DSL (Domain Specific Language) to describe system resources and state. 86181
Using Puppet: Using exec Resources to Run Commands Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with exec resources to run commands. 86213
Using Puppet: Using Puppet Templates Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use different kinds of Puppet templates to create configuration files. 86216
Using Puppet: Using Puppet to Make Configuration Changes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with Puppet to make configuration changes on a machine. 86193
Using Puppet: Variables Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use variables in Puppet. 86220
Using Puppet: Windows Installation Considerations Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to install Puppet on the Windows operating system. 86190
Using Vagrant - Provisioning: Concepts and Setup Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the setup process and the supported provisioners. 86247
Using Vagrant - VirtualBox: Sharing Folders Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between the types of shared folders and VirtualBox shared folders. 86263
Using Vagrant: A Basic Plugin Example Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with a basic Vagrant plugin. 86274
Using Vagrant: Allowing SSH Access through SSH Sharing Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant share allows remote SSH access to your Vagrant environment. 86243
Using Vagrant: Automated Provisioner Basics Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basics of automated provisioning. 86249
Using Vagrant: Autostart Machines Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how machines are started and how to configure Vagrant to not start specific machines. 86268
Using Vagrant: Basic Networking Usage Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe basic networking usage in a Vagrant installation. 86253
Using Vagrant: Basic Usage Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant allows you to sync a folder on the host machine to the guest machine. 86259
Using Vagrant: Basics of Plugin Development Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic skills and steps of Vagrant plugin development. 86275
Using Vagrant: Basics of Plugins Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to change and augment the behavior and functionality of Vagrant. 86273
Using Vagrant: Benefits to Developers; Administrators; and Designers Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the core concepts of Vagrant and its benefits to developers; administrators; and designers. 86228
Using Vagrant: Box Format Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how providers have a custom box format that affects how base boxes are made. 86270
Using Vagrant: Box Management Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant boxes are maintained. 86272
Using Vagrant: Bridged Networking Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how a bridged network makes the machine appear as another physical device. 86258
Using Vagrant: Configuring the Vagrant Environment Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to configure the Vagrant environment. 86230
Using Vagrant: Controlling Multiple Machines Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify environments which contain multiple virtual machines and how Vagrant controls them. 86265
Using Vagrant: Creating Boxes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a Vagrant Base box. 86271
Using Vagrant: Custom Provider Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the steps needed to make your own custom providers. 86245
Using Vagrant: Defining Multiple Machines Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant uses Vagrantfile to define and control multiple guest machines. 86264
Using Vagrant: Designating a Primary Machine Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the different machine types and how to designate a primary machine. 86267
Using Vagrant: Development Commands Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with commands to manage Vagrant plugins. 86276
Using Vagrant: Forwarded Ports Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant allow you to access a port on your host machine and have all data forwarded. 86254
Using Vagrant: Getting All the Components Up and Running Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to get all Vagrant components up and running. 86232
Using Vagrant: Host-only Networking Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how host-only networking is private to the virtual machines involved and the host machine. 86257
Using Vagrant: HTTP Sharing Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant uses HTTP sharing to create a URL that can be used by anyone. 86242
Using Vagrant: Identify the Steps for Vagrant Install/Config Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to list the steps in a Vagrant installation. 86252
Using Vagrant: Installing and Using a Box Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to install and use a box in an existing Vagrant installation. 87310
Using Vagrant: Installing Apache Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to configure Apache Tomcat. 86248
Using Vagrant: NFS Support Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify performance penalties and how NFS can speed up Vagrant operations. 86260
Using Vagrant: Platform-specific Provisioning Issues Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe platform-specific (Windows vs. Linux) provisioning issues. 86251
Using Vagrant: Plugin Configuration Issues Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how to install and configure a Vagrant plugin. 87309
Using Vagrant: Private Network Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the process in which Vagrant allows access to your guest machine by an address that is not publicly accessible from the internet. 86255
Using Vagrant: Public Network Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant allows public access to your machine. 86256
Using Vagrant: Push Feature Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how the Vagrant Push feature allows you to deploy any application. 86266
Using Vagrant: Security Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the security concerns of a Vagrant installation. 86246
Using Vagrant: The box Command Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the box command to manage; add; and remove boxes. 86237
Using Vagrant: The connect Command Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the connect command to access a static IP that can be used to communicate to the shared Vagrant environment. 86238
Using Vagrant: The destroy Command Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the destroy command to stop the running machine. 86239
Using Vagrant: The global-status Command Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the global-status command to retrieve the state of all active Vagrant environments on the system. 86240
Using Vagrant: Usage of Boxes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the different categories of Vagrant boxes and how they are used. 86269
Using Vagrant: Uses of Vagrant Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe Vagrant and its functionality. 86227
Using Vagrant: Using Multiple Provisioners or No Provisioners Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with multiple or no provisioners. 86250
Using Vagrant: Using rsync on a Guest Machine Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant can use rsync to synchronize a folder to the guest machine. 86261
Using Vagrant: Using the SMB Synced Folder Type Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant can use SMB to create a bi-directional synced folder between the Vagrant machine and the host machine. 86262
Using Vagrant: Using the Vagrant Configuration File Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the different portions of the Vagrant configuration file (VagrantFile). 86233
Using Vagrant: Using the Vagrant VirtualBox Provider Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify the use of the Vagrant VirtualBox provider. 86236
Using Vagrant: Using Vagrant Connect Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Vagrant can share every port in your Vagrant environment; not just SSH and HTTP. 86244
Using Vagrant: Vagrant Alternatives Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare Vagrant with other DevOps virtualization tools. 86229
Using Vagrant: Vagrant Boxes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the concepts behind Vagrant boxes. 86234
Using Vagrant: Vagrant Environment Variables Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the Vagrant environment variables and how they are used in a Vagrant installation. 86241
Using Vagrant: Vagrant Up Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the startup process of Vagrant. 86235
Using Vagrant: Vagrant without VirtualBox Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify how Vagrant is implemented in virtualization and how Vagrant works without VirtualBox. 86231
Working with Chef: Chef Analytics Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Chef analytics to provide real-time visibility into what is occurring on the Chef server. 86174
Working with Chef: Chef Node Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the different kinds of Chef nodes. 86170
Working with Chef: Chef Node Attributes Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify and retrieve Chef node attributes. 86171
Working with Chef: Chef Roles Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create and upload Chef roles. 86172
Working with Chef: Choosing the Correct Platform Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare the different Chef platforms and decide on which one to use. 86159
Working with Chef: Cloud Based Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to compare Chef's cloud-based functionality to traditional operating systems. 86158
Working with Chef: Creating a Node Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to create a node to be managed by Chef. 86166
Working with Chef: Creating Cookbooks Using Knife Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify how Chef uses Knife to create cookbooks. 86167
Working with Chef: Enforcing Policies Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify how Chef determines in a configuration is out of policy; and how Chef reapplies policy to the desired state. 86169
Working with Chef: Hosted Enterprise Chef Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the features of hosted enterprise Chef. 86165
Working with Chef: Installation Steps Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the different methods in installing Hosted Enterprise Chef. 86160
Working with Chef: Introduction to Chef Delivery Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use Chef Delivery to continuously deliver applications and infrastructure. 86176
Working with Chef: Open Source Chef Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between open source Chef and other Chef installations. 86164
Working with Chef: Other DevOps Configuration Tools Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify other popular DevOps tools used for automated configuration management. 86156
Working with Chef: Overview of Chef Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe Chef and how it is used for configuration management. 86152
Working with Chef: Set Up a Configuration Plan Using Chef Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with Chef and create a per-environment runlist. 87306
Working with Chef: Specifying Runlists Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Chef uses per-environment run-lists. 86168
Working with Chef: The Chef Development Kit Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Chef Development Kit and tools such as Test Kitchen; ChefSpec; and Foodcritic. 86173
Working with Chef: The Chef Vocabulary Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the terms used by Chef for performing automated configuration management. 86155
Working with Chef: Traditional Operating Systems Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how Chef functions and how it is supported in operating systems such as Linux and Windows. 86157
Working with Chef: Understanding Imperative Languages Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to recognize that Chef uses an imperative language and distinguish between imperative and declarative languages. 86153
Working with Chef: Understanding Recipes and Cookbooks Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe the contents of recipes and cookbook and how Chef used them when performing configuration. 86154
Working with Chef: Using Chef Solo Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to describe how chef-solo works. 86161
Working with Chef: Using Enterprise Chef Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to identify how Enterprise Chef runs and how it is used. 86163
Working with Chef: Using the Management Console Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to use the Chef management console for the management of nodes; roles; data bags; environments; and cookbooks . 86175
Working with Chef: Verifying Client Installation Bob Hendry After watching this video; you will be able to work with the Chef Administrator's Workstation. 86162
Linux (508)
Title Speaker Summary ID
ASP.NET MVC 4: Rendering a Breadcrumb Trail Using MVC SiteMap Provider Wesley Miller In this video; Wesley Miller demonstrates how to use the MvcSiteMapProvider NuGet Package to render a breadcrumb trail in an ASP.NET MVC 4 Web Application view. 69233
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Set the Default Runlevel Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure the runlevel for a Linux system. 71838
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Adding and Managing AT Jobs Dan Lachance In Linux; AT jobs are used to schedule one time background tasks. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to add and manage AT jobs. 71955
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Adding and Removing Jobs from Configured Printer Queues Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to add and remove jobs from configured print queues in Linux. 71977
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Adding Cron Jobs Dan LaChance In Linux; cron jobs are background scheduled tasks that run on a recurrent basis. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to add cron jobs. 71954
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Adding; Modifying; and Removing Groups Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to add; modify; and delete groups from the Linux command line. 71950
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Adding; Modifying; and Removing Users Dan LaChance The administrator can manage user and group accounts and keep track of the user access to ensure data protection. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to add; modify; and remove user accounts in Linux. 71949
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Advanced Grouping of SQL select Results Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to group return results from the SQL select command. 72009
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Alert Users before Major System Events Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how Linux command line tools can be used to send alert messages about system maintenance. 71843
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Allocating Filesystems and Swap Space Dan LaChance Linux installation and configuration is a multistep process; allowing customization based on requirements at every stage. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to allocate filesystems to separate partitions or disks. 71845
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Alternative Message Transfer Agents Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the alternative message transfer agent options in Linux. 71973
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Alternatives to Syslog Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the Syslog daemons in Linux. 71970
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Auditing a System to Find SUID/SGID Files Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to find the special permission bits assigned to a file in Linux. 71997
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Change between Runlevels Including Single-User Mode Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains how to configure a Linux system to boot in single-user mode. 71840
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Change Boot Targets Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to modify the Linux boot process to set a boot target. 71841
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Changing the Display Manager Greeting Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to control the behavior and appearance of the LightDM; or lightweight Display Manager; greeter. 71859
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Changing the Priority of a Running Process Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines changing the priority of a running process in Linux. 71909
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Check Boot Events in the Log File Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines how to check Linux boot logs for events that occurred during the boot process using the dmesg command. 71837
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Conceptual Understanding of sysfs; udev; dbus Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains the purpose and basic usage of sys; udev; and dbus virtual file systems. 71830
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuration of Basic TCP/IP Host Settings Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) settings in Linux. 71985
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configure Systems with Peripherals such as Keyboards In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure a Linux system using locally connected peripherals; such as a keyboard and mouse. 71823
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configure Systems without External Peripherals Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains how to configure a Linux system that is running headless or without an accessible keyboard or mouse. 71824
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Alternative Boot Locations Dan LaChance The Linux Boot Manager provides alternative boot locations and backup boot options. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to configure the bootloader and use its features. 71849
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Anacron Dan LaChance Anacron scheduled jobs are designed to run daily; weekly; or monthly even if the system is turned off. In this video; Dan LaChance describes Anacron scheduled jobs in Linux. 71957
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring and Using Sudo Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure and use sudo to give users administrative rights to some commands without giving them the root password. 72004
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring and Using the GnuPG Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance discusses how to configure and use GnuPG. 72012
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring and Using Visual Settings and Themes Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In an X Window System; you have many options to control how things appear on the screen. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure visual settings in Linux. 72015
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Automatic Mounting of Filesystems Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure automatic mounting of filesystems. 71922
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Basic Assistive Technologies Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. Assistive technologies refer to anything that makes an operating system easier to use. In this video; Dan LaChance discusses basic assistive technologies. 72016
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Basic NTP Settings Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure basic Network Time Protocol (NTP) settings in Linux. 71963
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring CUPS for Local and Remote Printers Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure Common Unix Printing System (CUPS) for local and remote printers. 71974
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Disk Quotas Dan LaChance Linux allows a system administrator to limit the resources allocated to a user or group. In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to configure disk quotas in Linux. 71924
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring GRUB 2 Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance discusses the basic GRUB 2 boot loader configuration. 71851
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Keyboard Accessibility Settings Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. You can adjust the keyboard accessibility settings to make the keyboard faster and easier to use. In this video; Dan LaChance discusses some Linux keyboard accessibility options. 72014
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring LightDM Dan LaChance Light Display Manager; or LightDM; is a configurable cross-desktop X display manager. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to configure LightDM. 71857
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Local Name Resolution and Remote DNS Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure local name resolution and remote DNS name resolution. 71992
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Locale Settings and Environment Variables Dan Lachance Linux provides the ability set local time zone; date; and zone information. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to set localization settings and environment variables. 71958
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Network Interfaces Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux + certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to work with network interfaces from the Linux command line. 71984
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring the File Creation Mask Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to work with the Linux file creation mask. 71929
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring the Routing Table Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure the Linux routing table. 71988
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring the Syslog Daemon Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to configure the syslog daemon. 71966
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Timezone Settings and Environment Variables Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to configure timezone settings and environment variables. 71959
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring Timezones Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to configure time zones in Linux. 71962
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring User Access to Cron and AT Services Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to configure user access to Cron and AT services. 71956
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Configuring User Mountable Removable Filesystems Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance provides an overview of how to configure user mountable removable filesystems. 71923
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Copying Multiple Files and Directories Recursively Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to copy multiple files and directories recursively from the command line. 71879
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Copying versus Linking files Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance shows how to copy versus link files in Linux. 71933
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Copying; Moving; and Removing Directories Individually Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to copy; move; and remove directories in a Linux file system. 71878
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Copying; Moving; and Removing Files Individually Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use shell commands to copy; move; and remove individual files in Linux. 71877
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Creating and Managing Special Purpose and Limited Accounts Dan LaChance Some Linux distributions have built-in user and group accounts that can be used by background services or daemons that need specialized permissions. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to create and manage special purpose and limited accounts in Linux. 71952
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Creating E-Mail Aliases Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to create e-mail aliases in Linux. 71971
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Creating File and Directory Links Dan LaChance The Linux filesystem supports both hard and soft directory links. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to create file and directory links in Linux. 71931
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Creating Filesystems with mkfs Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to create filesystems by using the mkfs Linux command. 71915
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Creating Simple Regular Expressions Dan LaChance A regular expression; or regex; is a special text string for describing a desired search pattern. In this video; Dan LaChance explains how regular expressions are created and used in Linux. 71910
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Customizing the Partition Layout Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to configure disk partitions based on the intended use of the Linux system. 71846
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Decoding Syslog Messages Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to decode syslog messages in Linux. 71967
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Demonstrate Knowledge of the Boot Sequence Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes the Linux boot sequence from the BIOS to boot completion. 71833
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Determine Hardware Resources for Devices Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use Linux command line tools to display the hardware resources used by devices. 71827
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Determining Package Contents Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to get specific package information. 71871
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Determining Which Users Have Logged In to the System or Are Currently Logged In Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications;LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to determine which users have logged in to the system and which users are currently logged in. 72003
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Determining Which Users or Processes Have Opened Files Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to identify which users or processes have files opened in Linux. 72002
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Differences between Private and Public "Dotted Quad" IP Addresses Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance differentiates between public and private IP addresses in Linux. 71979
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Differentiate between Cold and Hot Plug Devices Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains how Linux differentiates between cold and hot plug devices. 71826
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Differentiate between the Types of Mass Storage Devices Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains the different types of mass storage devices Linux can access and how they appear in Linux. 71825
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Disabling Unused Network Services Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to disable unnecessary network services in Linux. 71995
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Discovering Open Ports on a System Using netstat Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to find open ports on a system using the netstat command in Linux. 71999
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Distinguishing between IPv4 and IPv6 Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dal LaChance describes how to distinguish between Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) and Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6). 71982
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Enable and Disable Integrated Peripherals In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use Linux commands to enable and disable integrated peripherals. 71822
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Exporting Shell Environment Variables Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains how to work with Linux shell variables. 71874
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Features of IPv6 Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the features of Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) in Linux. 71983
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: File Locations in the FHS Dan LaChance The Filesystem Hierarchy Standard; or FHS; is a standard for directory naming and use in the Linux operating system. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the correct locations for files under the FHS. 71935
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Finding Files Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates three different ways to find files in a Linux system. 71936
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Finding Packages Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to find packages containing specific file names in Linux. 71866
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Finding Text in a Document with VI Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to find text in a document with the vi editor. 71894
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Fixing Simple Filesystem Problems Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to fix simple filesystem problems. 71920
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: How to Manage User and Group Information in Password and Group Databases Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to manage user and group information in password and group databases. 71951
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Identifying Hard and Soft Links Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to identify hard and soft links in the Linux file system. 71932
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Identifying Shared Libraries Dan LaChance Linux shared libraries are code files that can be used by multiple applications. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to identify shared libraries. 71861
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Inserting; Updating; and Deleting Data with SQL Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to insert; update; and delete data by using SQL. 72006
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Install and Configure the GRUB Legacy Boot Loader Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to install and configure the GRUB legacy boot loader. 71850
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Installing; Upgrading; and Uninstalling Packages Using Aptitude Dan LaChance Aptitude is a package manager for Debian and Debian-based systems. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to manage software packages by using aptitude in Linux. 71864
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Installing; Upgrading; and Uninstalling Packages Using dpkg Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use the debian package manager command to install; upgrade; and uninstall packages in Linux. 71865
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Installing; Upgrading; and Uninstalling Packages Using RPM Dan LaChance Red Hat Package Manager; or RPM; is a command line tool used to manage software in some Linux distributions. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use RPM to install; reinstall; upgrade; and remove packages. 71868
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Installing; Upgrading; and Uninstalling Packages Using YUM Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to install; upgrade; and uninstall packages by using YUM. 71869
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introducing Job Priorities and the Default Priority Dan LaChance Process priorities are used by the system to determine when and for how long processes should run. In this video; Dan LaChance explains process priorities and how to view the priority of a running process. 71907
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introducing Shadow Passwords Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes shadow passwords in Linux. 71994
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introducing SQL and the select Statement Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance introduces SQL and demonstrates how to use the select statement to list records. 72005
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introducing the Common TCP and UDP Ports Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the common Transfer Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports. 71981
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introducing the Major Features of UDP; TCP; and ICMP Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the Transfer Control Protocol (TCP); User Datagram Protocol (UDP); and Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP). 71980
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introduction to Cron Jobs Dan LaChance Cron is a time-based job scheduler that has been available for a long time in UNIX and Linux. In this video; Dan LaChance discusses the files and basic configuration related to cron. 71953
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introduction to LVM Dan LaChance The Linux Logical Volume Manager or LVM enables the Linux administrators to manage disks using logical volumes. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the use of LVM. 71848
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introduction to Reiserfs and Btrfs Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance discusses the reiser filesystem and the b-tree filesystem. 71916
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introduction to the X Font Server Dan LaChance The Linux X font server allows an X server to use a separate machine over the network to render fonts. In this video; Dan LaChance discusses the Linux X font server. 71854
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introduction to Upstart Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes the Upstart boot process. 71836
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Introduction to XDM; KDM; and GDM Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes Linux display managers. 71860
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Invoking Commands Inside and Outside the Defined Path Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to invoke commands inside and outside the defined path in a Linux file system. 71876
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: List Various Hardware Information Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to perform commands in Linux to view various hardware information. 71828
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Loading Shared Libraries Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to load shared library files. 71863
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Maintaining Skeleton Directories for New User Accounts Dan Lachance In this video Dan LaChance demonstrates how to maintain skeleton directories for new user accounts. 71939
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Managing File and Directory Permissions Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to manage file and directory permissions in Linux. 71927
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Managing Log Files with logrotate Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to manage log files with the logrotate command in Linux. 71968
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Managing MBR Partition Tables Dan LaChance A partition table is a map of all the drive partitions and where they are located on the drive. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to work with Master Boot Record (MBR) and GUID (GPT) partition disks from the command line and in the GUI. 71914
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Managing the Permissions and SUID Rights of Scripts Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to manage permissions and SUID rights of scripts. 71948
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Managing the System Journal Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to manage the system journal in Linux. 71969
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Managing User Print Queues Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to manage the user print queues in Linux. 71975
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Manipulate USB Devices Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains how to use Linux commands to view and manipulate USB devices. 71829
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Modifying Name Resolution Search order Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to modify the name resolution search order in Linux. 71993
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Monitoring Active Processes Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to monitor active processes in Linux. 71904
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Monitoring Free Space and Inodes Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to monitor free space and inodes in Linux. 71919
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Mounting and Unmounting Filesystems Dan LaChance Filesystems must be mounted; or attached to the file hierarchy; to be used. In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to perform mount and unmount operations on a Linux filesystem. 71921
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Network Masks and CIDR Notation Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux + certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes subnetting and Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation. 71978
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Obtaining Package Information Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use tools to obtain information about installed software packages. 71867
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Obtaining RPM Package Information Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to obtain the package information for the installed RPM packages. 71870
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Opening and Navigating a Document Dan LaChance The vi text editor is used to create and edit plain text documents or configuration files in Linux. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how use the vi text editor to open; and navigate through a document without using a GUI interface. 71890
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: OpenSSH2 Server Host Keys Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the meaning of SSH server host key files. 72011
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Performing Basic OpenSSH2 Configuration and Usage Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance discusses how to configure a secure shell (SSH) for secure remote access on a Linux system. 72010
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Performing Basic Text Transformations Using sed Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use the sed command to edit the contents of a text file in Linux. 71901
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Performing Conditional Mailing to the Superuser Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to perform conditional mailing to the superuser by using a Linux shell script. 71946
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Permissions Overview Dan LaChance Linux allows system administrators to protect data by managing permissions to specific files and directories. In this video; Dan LaChance discusses the file and directory permissions system in Linux. 71926
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Properly Terminate Processes Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to terminate running processes safely in the Linux command line. 71844
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Provide Common Commands to the Boot Loader Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to pass commands to the boot loader to affect the boot process in Linux. 71831
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Provide Options to the Kernel at Boot Time Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains how to set parameters for the Linux kernel to manipulate its behavior at boot time. 71832
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Querying Remote DNS Servers Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to query remote DNS servers by using the dig and host commands. 71991
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Reconfiguring Network Interfaces Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to manage network interfaces in Linux. 71987
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Redirecting Standard Input; Output; and Error Dan LaChance Streams; pipes; and redirects are used for redirecting standard I/O streams. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use standard input; output; and error to redirect output from a shell command in the Linux shell. 71886
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Running Jobs in the Foreground and Background Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to perform commands that will run in the foreground or background in Linux. 71902
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Selecting and Sorting Processes for Display Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use the sort command to select and sort processes for display in Linux. 71905
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Selecting Data by Joining Two or More Tables Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to select data by joining two or more tables and display information from those tables. 72007
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Selecting the Correct Script Interpreter Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to select the correct script interpreter when working from the Linux command line and also from within a shell script. 71947
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Sending Signals to Processes Dan LaChance This video provides an overview on how to send signals to Linux processes. 71906
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Set the Default Boot Target Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to specify a boot target for a Linux system. 71839
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Setting a Default Route Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to set the default route in Linux. 71986
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Setting Environment Variables Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demostrates how to configure environment variables in Linux. 71937
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Setting Limits on User Logins; Processes; and Resources Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to set limits on user logins; processes; and resources in Linux. 72001
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Setting or Changing Passwords and Aging Information Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to set and change passwords and aging information in Linux. 71998
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Setting the Command Search Path Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to set the command search path. 71940
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Setting the Hardware Clock Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to set the hardware clock in Linux. 71961
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Setting the System Date and Time Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to set the date and time on a Linux system. 71960
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Shared Library Locations Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes shared library locations. 71862
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Shell Script Return Values Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to work with shell script return values. 71945
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Shutdown and Reboot from the Command Line Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes ways to shut down and restart a Linux computer from the command line. 71842
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Signaling a Program to Continue Running After Logout Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to keep a program running in the background even after logging out of Linux. 71903
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Sorting Data Returned from a select Statement Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to sort data returned from a select statement. 72008
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Special Permissions Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines how to set special permissions in the Linux file system. 71928
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Starting a Program with a Different Priority Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to start a Linux process with a different priority value. 71908
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: The /boot Partition Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes BIOS and UEFI firmware standards. 71847
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Troubleshooting General Printing Problems Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance describes the general troubleshooting tips related to printing in Linux. 71976
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Troubleshooting Network Configuration Problems Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to troubleshoot network configuration problems in Linux. 71990
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Troubleshooting Network Connectivity Problems Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to troubleshoot the network connectivity problems in Linux. 71989
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Turning the Display Manager On or Off Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to turn the LightDM Display Manager on and off in Linux. 71858
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Understanding systemd Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes the systemd approach for booting a Linux system. 71835
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Understanding SysVinit Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance explains the SysVinit process for booting a Linux system. 71834
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Understanding the X Window Configuration File Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes the X Window configuration file. 71856
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: User Disk Quota Reports Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance discusses how to work with user and group disk quotas. 71925
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using and Editing the Shell Command History Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to work with the history tool in the bash shell. 71875
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using and Modifying the Shell Environment Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use and modify the Linux shell environment. 71873
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Commands to See Alternate Views of File Contents Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates the different ways to view the file contents and how to convert text files into a printable format. 71897
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using DISPLAY to Redirect Windows Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to redirect X Windows graphical environments between Linux hosts across the network. 71855
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using gdisk and Parted with GPT Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use the parted Linux command to work with gpt discs. 71917
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Links for Administration Tasks Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance uses Linux file system commands to create hard links and sym links from a root file system to a subdirectory. 71934
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Linux Commands to Modify File Contents Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to modify file contents by using Linux commands. 71899
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Linux Commands to Parse File Contents Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use Linux commands to parse file contents. 71898
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Linux Commands to Sort or Format File Contents Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use Linux commands to sort and format file contents. 71900
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Linux Commands to View File Contents Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use commands to view all; beginning; and end contents of a file. 71895
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Mail and Configuring E-Mail Forwarding Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use the mail feature and how to configure e-mail forwarding in Linux. 71972
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using nmap to Discover Open Ports on a System Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use the nmap command to discover open ports in a Linux system. 72000
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Regular Expression Tools on a File Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use regular expression tools to find files in the filesystem and to find content within text files. 71912
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Regular Expression Tools on a Filesystem Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use regular expression tools on a filesystem. 71911
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Regular Expression Tools to Replace File Contents Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use regular expression tools to replace file contents. 71913
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Single Shell One Line Command Sequences Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use single line shell commands and command sequences in Linux. 71872
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using SSH Port Tunnels Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use secure shell (SSH) port tunnels. 72013
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using TCP Wrappers to Grant or Deny Access to Services Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use TCP wrappers to grant or deny access to a network service in Linux. 71996
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using the Group Field Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use the group field to grant file access to group members. 71930
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using the pool.ntp.org Service Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use the pool.ntp.org service in Linux. 71964
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using the Standard NTP Query Program Dan LaChance The CompTIA Linux+ certifications; LX0-103 and LX0-104; powered by Linux Professional Institute (LPI); cover the fundamental knowledge and skills required for Linux administration. In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to use the standard Network Time Protocol (NTP) query; or ntpq; in Linux. 71965
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Using Unix Commands to Count Data in Files Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance outlines the steps to count data in a file by using Linux commands. 71896
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Verifying Filesystem Integrity Dan LaChance A filesystem is used to organize and control how data is stored and retrieved. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use commands to verify the integrity of a filesystem. 71918
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Verifying Hardware for X Server Dan LaChance The GUI interface X server is a key component within the Linux installation. In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to verify if hardware is supported by an X server. 71853
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Working with the Boot Loader Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to use the GRUB tools to interact with the Linux GRUB boot loader. 71852
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Writing BASH Functions for Frequently Used Commands Dan Lachance In this video; Dan LaChance describes how to write bourne-again shell (BASH) functions for frequently used commands in Linux. 71938
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Writing Shell Scripts Using Command Substitution Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to write shell scripts by using command substitution in Linux. 71944
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Writing Shell Scripts Using for Loop Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to create shell scripts that can repeat a set of actions using the for statement in Linux. 71942
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Writing Shell Scripts Using if Statement Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to write shell scripts using if statements. 71941
CompTIA Linux+ 2014: Writing Shell Scripts Using while Loop Dan LaChance In this video; Dan LaChance demonstrates how to write shell scripts using the while looping construct in Linux. 71943
CompTIA Server+ 2014: Establishing a Troubleshooting Plan of Action Glen E. Clarke The CompTIA Server+ certification covers the methodology required to maintain; support; and troubleshoot server hardware and software. In this video; Glen E. Clarke describes how to develop a troubleshooting plan of action for the server issues. 72158
CompTIA Server+ 2014: Resource Allocation Glen E. Clarke The CompTIA Server+ certification covers the methodology required to maintain; support; and troubleshoot server hardware and software. In this video; Glen E. Clarke describes resource allocation with virtual machines. 72076
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Adding and Modifying Users Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to add and modify users in Ubuntu using the available graphical tools. 85110
Getting Started with Ubuntu: APT Software Package Manager Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use APT to install; update; remove; and search for software packages in Ubuntu. 85090
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Configuring and Using sudo Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use sudo. 85104
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Configuring PHP Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to install and configure php5-fpm. 85131
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Configuring VirtualBox to Install Ubuntu Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure a virtual machine using a DVD image of Ubuntu. 85085
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Connecting to a Windows Share Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to connect to files shared by a Microsoft Windows computer. 85107
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Creating a Symbolic Link Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to create a symbolic link using ln. 85124
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Creating Aliases in .bashrc Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to modify the .bashrc file to create command line aliases. 85113
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Desktop Search with Unity Dash Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to search with the Unity Dash feature in Ubuntu and change its privacy setting. 85091
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Installing a Basic SSL/TLS Certificate in nginx Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to create a certificate signing request and self-sign it with openssl. 85133
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Installing Ubuntu 14.04 Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to install Ubuntu in a virtual machine. 85086
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to avconv Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use avconv to format shift video formats and extract audio from a video file. 85128
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to awk Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to manipulate and parse text using awk. 85120
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to Backups Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to enable backups using the built-in backup tool. 85095
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to chgrp; chmod; and chown Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to change and modify user and group ownership of files and directories. 85114
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to cp; mv; and mkdir Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to create; copy; and move files and directories on the command line. 85115
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to curl Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use curl to make http requests from the command line. 85126
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to df and du Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use the df and du utils to query how storage space is being used. 85116
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to diff Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to compare files for differences using the GNU Diffutils. 85117
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to Emacs Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to get up and running with Emacs. 85099
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to Environment Variables Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to set local and global environment variables. 85112
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to File Permissions Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to display and modify file permissions from the File Manager. 85101
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to find Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to perform a find on the command line. 85118
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to grep Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use grep to search text with regular expressions. 85119
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to head; tail; more; and less Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to explore the head; tail; more; and less utilities. 85122
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to kill Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use kill to terminate a running process. 85123
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Introduction to Kubuntu; Lubuntu; and Xubuntu Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to choose a variant of Ubuntu with emphasis on Kubuntu; Lubuntu; and Xubuntu. 85088
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Introduction to MariaDB Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to install MariaDB as a drop-in replacement for MySQL. 85130
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Introduction to nginx Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to install and configure a simple nginx webserver. 85129
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Introduction to openssl Digest Functions Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use openssl to create a message digest on the command line. 85127
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to Security & Privacy Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure the security and privacy-related settings from the System Settings. 85094
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to sed Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to process text using sed. 85121
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to Software & Updates Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure software sources and additional drivers. 85098
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to ssh and scp Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to connect to remote computers using ssh and scp. 85108
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to System Monitoring Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to monitor system performance using the System Monitor. 85097
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Introduction to the Basic LEMP Stack Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic LEMP (Linux; nginx; MariaDB; PHP) stack. 85132
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to the File Manager Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to navigate and configure the Ubuntu File Manager. 85096
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Introduction to the Ubuntu Software Centre Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to install; remove; and navigate software packages using the Ubuntu Software Centre. 85089
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to Vi/Vim Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to get up and running with vi/vim. 85100
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Introduction to wc Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to use wc to count the characters; words; and lines in a given file on the command line. 85125
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Modifying Locale Settings Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to modify locale settings. 85105
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Navigating Workspaces Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to enable and navigate with virtual workspaces in Ubuntu. 85092
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Setting Appearance and Brightness & Lock Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure the background appearance; brightness & lock settings; and the unity-tweak-tool in Ubuntu. 85093
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Sharing Files with Samba Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to share files with Microsoft Windows using samba. 85106
Getting Started with Ubuntu: The Dangers of 'rm -rf' Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to mitigate the dangers of 'rm -rf'. 85102
Getting Started With Ubuntu: Ubuntu with VirtualBox Guest Additions Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure Ubuntu 14.04 with Virtual Guest Additions. 85087
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Using ssh keys Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to configure an authentication key for ssh. 85109
Getting Started with Ubuntu: Using tar; gzip; and bzip2 Steve Scott After watching this video; you will be able to create an archive with tar; gzip; and bzip2. 85103
RHEL 7 - Performing a Graphical Installation: Part I Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to perform the initial install of RHEL 7 onto a physical system using the graphical installer. 82047
RHEL 7 - Performing a Graphical Installation: Part II Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to complete the install of RHEL 7 onto a physical system using the graphical installer. 82048
RHEL 7 - Performing a Text Installation: Part I Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to perform a minimal install using the text mode installer. 82049
RHEL 7 - Performing a Text Installation: Part II Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to complete a minimal install using the text mode installer. 82050
RHEL 7 - Troubleshooting and Repairing Filesystems: Part 1 Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot and repair the XFS file system. 82107
RHEL 7: Accessing a Virtual Machines Console Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to access a virtual machine's console from the host. 82075
RHEL 7: Add Users; Groups; and Install Packages Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add and edit users; groups; and packages as well as configure user permissions on files. 81912
RHEL 7: Adding a Rule to a Policy Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add a new policy rule to be enforced. 82098
RHEL 7: Adding Limits to Network Traffic Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add a limit to the firewall for certain types of traffic. 81986
RHEL 7: Adding or Deleting an iptable Rule Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add and delete rules to an iptable configured firewall. 81981
RHEL 7: Adding Partitions Non-destructively Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add new partitions or additional swap space nondestructively. 82019
RHEL 7: Adding Shares to a Samba Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use Samba to share a directory with Windows clients. 81972
RHEL 7: Adding Users to Groups Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add a user to a group or groups. 81906
RHEL 7: Advanced Grep Parameters Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use advanced grep features like recursively finding matching files and ignoring case sensitivity . 81915
RHEL 7: Analyzing and Reviewing Logs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to view and analyse log files and interpret basic values from other journal sources. 81958
RHEL 7: Backing up and Restoring Volumes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to back up and restore volumes. 82033
RHEL 7: Blacklisting Kernel Modules Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use modprobe to blacklist modules. 82060
RHEL 7: Booting from MBR or GPT Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify; configure; and boot from GPT or MBR. 82041
RHEL 7: Change a Process Priority and Check the Logs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use renice to change a processes priority; change a network adaptors IP Address; and check the logs for any unauthorized access attempts. 81964
RHEL 7: Changing a File System Label Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to change the label of a partition. 82023
RHEL 7: Changing Logs and Log Settings Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to modify the system log settings and retention policies. 81963
RHEL 7: Changing the Boot Target Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to change the boot target with systems using systemd. 82042
RHEL 7: Changing Your Password Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to change your password through the Gnome interface or from the Shell. 81899
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic DHCP Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic DHCP Server. 81967
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic DNS Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic bind service. 81966
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic FTP Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic ftp service. 81976
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic HTTPD Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic web service. 81974
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic Logging Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure the logging server to store logs sent from external servers. 81970
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic MAIL Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic mail server . 81978
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic NTPD Server After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic ntpd service. 81968
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic Samba Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic Samba server. 81971
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic SSH Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic sshd service . 81973
RHEL 7: Configuring a Basic TELNET Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic telnet service. 81975
RHEL 7: Configuring a RHEL 7 Guest for Running on a Host Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to modify the running RHEL 7 guest to perform well under a host. 82068
RHEL 7: Configuring a System to use LDAP Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a system to use an LDAP based directory service. 82005
RHEL 7: Configuring a System to use MS Active Directory Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a system to use MS Active Directory. 82008
RHEL 7: Configuring a System to Use Network Time Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure the system to use a network time source. 81955
RHEL 7: Configuring an SELinux Policy Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure and control SELinux policies. 82097
RHEL 7: Configuring Automatic Updates in Gnome Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to choose appropriate update times; schedules; and mode to update the RHEL 7 system. 81891
RHEL 7: Configuring Common Networking Situations Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure Linux systems with common network scenarios. 81956
RHEL 7: Configuring Common Networking Situations Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to list the location of log files and the purpose of the common logs. 81957
RHEL 7: Configuring E-mail Clients Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the two default Gnome mail clients and configure basic settings to send and receive e-mail. 81845
RHEL 7: Configuring Kernel Services Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure kernel setting and limits. 82053
RHEL 7: Configuring Kernel Settings Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to alter kernel settings to solve common system issues. 82061
RHEL 7: Configuring Network Devices using Gnome Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the Gnome network manager to configure a network device. 81952
RHEL 7: Configuring Network Parameters for a Host Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to change the hostname; DNS; and other network settings for the host; including deactivating and activing a network device. 81953
RHEL 7: Configuring Networking from the Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a network device entirely from the shell. 81954
RHEL 7: Configuring Permissions for an LDAP User Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure and use permissions and settings for the LDAP user on the server. 82007
RHEL 7: Configuring Permissions for an MS Active Directory User Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure MS AD permissions for the user on the server. 82010
RHEL 7: Configuring Red Hat Virtualization Tools Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to distinguish between the different virtualization tools used to run guests on RHEL 7. 82064
RHEL 7: Configuring RHEL 7 Host Settings Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure settings for hosting guests. 82073
RHEL 7: Configuring SELinux Settings Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure SELinux settings. 82091
RHEL 7: Configuring System Settings from Gnome Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure system and security settings from the Gnome interface. 81848
RHEL 7: Configuring the Boot Loader Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure the boot loader. 82039
RHEL 7: Configuring the built-in Firewall Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the Security Level Configuration Tool to manage a basic firewall. 81979
RHEL 7: Configuring the Gnome Environment Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure Gnome menus; panels; desktop icons; themes; and colors for a better user experience. 81839
RHEL 7: Configuring the SELinux Mode Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure and choose the applicable SELinux mode. 82090
RHEL 7: Configuring the Software Repositories Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add; remove; or set the software repositories for yum and the Gnome package manager. 81895
RHEL 7: Controlling what is Logged Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure what is logged to system logs. 81962
RHEL 7: Convert a cron Job to a SystemD Timer Unit Task Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to convert a cron job to a systemd timer task. 81937
RHEL 7: Correcting Missing Mount Points on Boot Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to fix mount points that no longer exist. 82059
RHEL 7: Create a LVM Filesystem and Mount It Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create an XFS LVM Filesystem and then mount the partition so it will be available even after rebooting. 82037
RHEL 7: Create a Script and Schedule it to Run Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create a script that will use grep to find files with certain contents and schedule this job to run each day at 2:05 am. 81938
RHEL 7: Creating a Basic RAID Volume Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create and configure a basic RAID 0; 1; and 5 volume. 82035
RHEL 7: Creating a Simple BASH Script Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create a simple BASH script that can chain multiple commands together to perform an action. 81877
RHEL 7: Creating Aliases and Links Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create aliases for commands and make links to files or directories. 81859
RHEL 7: Creating and Editing Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create and edit text files from the desktop environment using the Gnome editor. 81843
RHEL 7: Creating and Editing Files in the Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the Shell tools echo; cat; > to create and edit text files. 81861
RHEL 7: Creating and Editing Files with Emacs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to perform basic file operations and editing using the emacs text editor. 81873
RHEL 7: Creating and Managing Virtual Machines Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create and manage virtual machines. 82074
RHEL 7: Creating Filesystems Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create a filesystem on a physical disk. 82020
RHEL 7: Creating Hybrid Volumes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use LVM tiered storage to use faster SSDs with HDDs to create fast "hybrid" storage. 82031
RHEL 7: Customizing the Bourne Again Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to manipulate the bash prompt and describe how the env and export features can be used. 81860
RHEL 7: Dealing with a SELinux Policy Violation Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify and troubleshoot a reported policy violation. 82099
RHEL 7: Dealing with Failed Drives Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot a drive that has failed in either a hot-swap or raid configuration. 82110
RHEL 7: Debugging a Filesystem Issue Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to debug the XFS file system. 82109
RHEL 7: Describe File Permissions and Ownership Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic file permissions for users and groups and how they relate to file ownership. 81908
RHEL 7: Describe Users and Groups Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe how users and groups work and how they are connected. 81897
RHEL 7: Describing and Comparing Shells Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe a Shell; the purpose for Shells; and list some of the Shells available. 81850
RHEL 7: Describing Basic Network Terminology Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe basic networking terminology and interfaces on Linux. 81950
RHEL 7: Describing How cron Schedules Jobs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the configuration of a crontab file and the different sections for a cron job. 81929
RHEL 7: Describing iptable Rules and Configuration Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the sections of the firewall and the basics of how the firewall rules are configured. 81980
RHEL 7: Describing Parallel Network File System (pNFS) Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to enable and support pNFS on the server. 82001
RHEL 7: Describing Regular Expressions Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify and understand the basic syntax of a regular expression. 81913
RHEL 7: Describing the Boot Process Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic boot process and system components involved. 82038
RHEL 7: Describing the NFS Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the components of the Network File System. 81995
RHEL 7: Description of Linux Filesystems Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the various supported file systems. 82012
RHEL 7: Detecting Problems in a Guest Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use tools to detect problems in guests and report them to the host. 82070
RHEL 7: Executing and Controlling Scripts Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to execute; pause; and run a script in the background and then bring it to the foreground. 81878
RHEL 7: Executing GUI Application from the Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to execute GUI applications from the command line; run them in the background; and see diagnostic or debug information in the Shell. 81855
RHEL 7: Exploring with the File Manager Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to explore the file system using the Gnome file manager . 81841
RHEL 7: Exporting an NFS Share Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure an exported share to work on reboot. 82000
RHEL 7: Fixing a Boot Partition Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to fix boot partition issues . 82058
RHEL 7: Generating Bug Reports and Crash Notifications Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use built-in tools to generate bug and crash reports for diagnosis or to send to Red Hat. 82086
RHEL 7: Getting Built-in and Online Help Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to access online help with a web browser or built-in help through Gnome. 81840
RHEL 7: Getting Help while in the Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use man and info to get help; and identify or locate help in /usr/share/doc. 81856
RHEL 7: Growing a RAID Volume Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to resize a RAID volume. 82036
RHEL 7: Identifying File Permission Security Issues Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot common file permission security issues. 82104
RHEL 7: Identifying Linux Filesystems Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify the file systems of mounted and external drives. 82013
RHEL 7: Identifying Network Devices Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify network devices and their configuration. 81951
RHEL 7: Identifying Red Hat Enterprise 7 Hardware Requirements Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL) 7 hardware requirements. 82045
RHEL 7: Identifying Red Hat Virtualization Tools Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the built-in virtualization tools and programs in RHEL 7. 82063
RHEL 7: Identifying Remote Access Technologies Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the various remote access technologies that are available on Linux. 81988
RHEL 7: Identifying SystemD Startup Services Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use SystemD to start services. 81947
RHEL 7: Identifying the Components to SELinux Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify and recognize the components and purpose of SELinux. 82089
RHEL 7: Install and Boot RHEL 7 Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to install RHEL 7 on a physical computer and identify the different stages of the boot process. 82062
RHEL 7: Install RHEL 7 as a VM Guest Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use RHEL 7 as a host for VMs and as a client running on a VM. 82088
RHEL 7: Installing and Starting NFS Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to install; setup; and configure NFS. 81996
RHEL 7: Installing on Systems using UEFI Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to recognize issues that can occur with UEFI and some settings that may help get RHEL 7 to install. 82052
RHEL 7: Installing RHEL 7 as a Guest Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to install RHEL 7 as a guest. 82066
RHEL 7: Installing RHEL 7 with a Kickstart Script Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use a kickstart script to do an installation. 82083
RHEL 7: Installing Software Using the Gnome Package Manager Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to install software from the package manager. 81889
RHEL 7: Interrupting the Boot Process to Gain Access Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to alter the boot process to gain access to fix problems or diagnose issues. 82043
RHEL 7: Launching Guests at Boot on the Host Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure the system to start virtual machines on boot. 82077
RHEL 7: Launching RHEL 7 as a Guest Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to launch a RHEL 7 guest from the host. 82067
RHEL 7: Listing and Identifying Processes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to list and identify running processes. 81939
RHEL 7: Locating Content within a Text File Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use grep to locate content within a text file. 81917
RHEL 7: Logging in with an Active Directory User Account Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to log in to the server using a MS Active Directory user account. 82009
RHEL 7: Logging in with an LDAP User Account Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to login to the server using a user account from the LDAP directory service. 82006
RHEL 7: Making a Volume Snapshot Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create a snapshot of a volume. 82032
RHEL 7: Manage an NFS Mount on a Remote Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to Use a Directory Service configured client to mount a remote NFS share that you configure on a remote host. 82011
RHEL 7: Manage and Archive Files within Scripts Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use scripts to automate the management and archiving of files and directories. 81887
RHEL 7: Managing and Configuring Swap Space Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe swap space requirements and how to manage swap space during installation. 82051
RHEL 7: Managing cron Jobs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to edit and pause cron jobs as well as set jobs for users and root. 81931
RHEL 7: Managing Groups Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add; modify; and delete groups. 81905
RHEL 7: Managing Permissions on Directories After watching this video; you will be able to change a directory's owner; group; and permissions. 81911
RHEL 7: Managing Permissions on Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to change a file's owner and group and set file and group permissions. 81910
RHEL 7: Managing Process Priorities Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to set or change the priority for a process. 81943
RHEL 7: Managing SystemD in the Boot Process Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create boot targets; boot states; and control parallel daemon instantiation with SystemD. 82044
RHEL 7: Managing Users from the Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add; delete; and edit a user from a Shell including how to set the user properties; Shell; and home directory. 81902
RHEL 7: Managing Users within Gnome Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add; edit; modify; and delete a user using the Gnome User Manager application. 81898
RHEL 7: Managing Volumes from the Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use Shell commands to manage LVM storage. 82034
RHEL 7: Manipulating an at Job Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to alter; delete; and view at jobs. 81934
RHEL 7: Manipulating an LVM Volume Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use basic LVM commands to create and remove volumes. 82028
RHEL 7: Manipulating Directories Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to list; create; move; change; and delete directories and use shortcuts to move around the file system. 81854
RHEL 7: Manipulating Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to list; copy; move; and delete files. 81853
RHEL 7: Manipulating Files and Directories Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to copy; move; delete; and rename files and directories using the Gnome file manager. 81842
RHEL 7: Modifying a User's Default Group Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to modify a user's default group. 81907
RHEL 7: Monitoring Processes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to monitor processes and their resource utilization. 81941
RHEL 7: Mounting a Filesystem at Boot Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure the system to mount a filesystem at boot. 82015
RHEL 7: Mounting an Encrypted Filesystem at Boot Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to mount an encrypted filesystem at boot and use a fully encrypted filesystem. 82017
RHEL 7: Mounting an External NFS Share Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to mount an external shared NFS partition to the local system. 81998
RHEL 7: Mounting and Unmounting a Filesystem Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to mount and unmount various file systems. 82014
RHEL 7: Mounting and Unmounting of Filesystems or Devices Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to control the automatic mounting of filesystems when devices are plugged in and safely unmount filesystems. 82018
RHEL 7: Mounting and Using iSCSI Devices Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to mount and unmount iSCSI Network Area Storage. 82024
RHEL 7: Mounting and Using SMB Shares Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to mount and unmount remote SMB; or Samba; shares. 82002
RHEL 7: Navigating in the Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to using autocomplete; and using history with the hist command and arrow keys. 81852
RHEL 7: Navigating the Gnome Desktop Environment Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use Gnome to run applications; manage virtual workspaces; and use window control buttons. 81838
RHEL 7: Obtaining Information about a Guest Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to obtain information about a guest. 82078
RHEL 7: Opening a Port through the Firewall Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add a rule to allow a network service port through the firewall. 81984
RHEL 7: Patching the Kernel Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use kpatch to do dynamic patches to the kernel. 82087
RHEL 7: Performing Actions on Files that are Found Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to perform actions on files that are returned from a find command. 81869
RHEL 7: Performing Login; Logoff; and Power Operations Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to log in; log off; lock; and unlock a Gnome session as well as power up and down a system . 81844
RHEL 7: Performing Searches for Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the find command to locate files based on their name or other properties. 81868
RHEL 7: Recognize an LVM Configuration Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify and describe LVM configuration for volumes. 82027
RHEL 7: Recognizing and Identifying SELinux Policies Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify and choose SELinux policies. 82096
RHEL 7: Recognizing Archived and Compressed Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to recognize an archived file and the tools necessary to retrieve the contents. 81880
RHEL 7: Recognizing BASH Scripts Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify a BASH script file and the header specifying the interpreter used for the script. 81876
RHEL 7: Recognizing Common Processes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to recognize common running processes. 81940
RHEL 7: Recognizing POSIX File Security Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify POSIX file and ownership permissions on files and directories. 81909
RHEL 7: Recognizing the Relationship between Xwindows and Gnome Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the roles and differences between Xwindows and the Gnome desktop environment. 81847
RHEL 7: Reinstalling or Replacing a Software Package Using yum Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to remove; reinstall; or replace a software package. 81894
RHEL 7: Resetting a User's Password Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to change any user's password including the root user. 81901
RHEL 7: Resizing a Filesystem Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to resize an MBR-based partition. 82022
RHEL 7: Restoring SELinux Contexts Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use restorecon to restore file security contexts. 82094
RHEL 7: Reviewing SystemD System Logs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to review SystemD journal logs. 81959
RHEL 7: Running Network Services Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to work with network services through SystemD Services. 81965
RHEL 7: Saving and Restoring iptable Rulesets Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to save and restore iptable rulesets. 81982
RHEL 7: Scheduling a cron Job Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create a cron job. 81930
RHEL 7: Scheduling a SystemD Timer Unit Task Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to schedule a SystemD Timer task. 81936
RHEL 7: Scheduling an at job Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to schedule a job using at. 81933
RHEL 7: Selecting an Installation Method Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe and be able to select the appropriate installation method. 82046
RHEL 7: Setting and Configuring NFS Exports Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add and configure a local NFS share. 81999
RHEL 7: Setting the RunLevel Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to alter the RunLevel of the system. 82040
RHEL 7: Setting up a SQUID Server Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a basic squid proxy service. 81977
RHEL 7: Setting Up Shared Directories for Users Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to create a directory that can be shared by multiple users in a common group. 81921
RHEL 7: Setting User Properties in /etc/passwd Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to modify user properties directly in the /etc/passwd file to fix user problems. 81903
RHEL 7: Start a Network Service and Allow Access Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to start a network service add a rule to the firewall to allow external access to the service. 81987
RHEL 7: Starting and Stopping a Guest Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to start; stop; and control guests. 82076
RHEL 7: Starting and Stopping a Service Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to start and stop a network service. 81945
RHEL 7: Starting and Stopping Processes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to start and stop processes. 81942
RHEL 7: Starting Services at Boot Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a service to start or not start at boot. 81946
RHEL 7: Storing and Archiving Logs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to store and archive logs. 81961
RHEL 7: Supporting International Keyboards Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure keyboard support. 82069
RHEL 7: Switching and Using TTY Consoles Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to switch to; and back from; TTY consoles in order to execute Shell commands. 81867
RHEL 7: Switching Shells and Users Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to switch users and Shells within a terminal window; in particular to become the root user to perform administrative tasks. 81866
RHEL 7: Switching Users and/or Desktops Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to switch users on a multiuser system and run multiple desktops for different users. 81849
RHEL 7: Throttling Guest I/O and Managing Performance Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to throttle I/O for a guest and manage guest resource allocations. 82079
RHEL 7: Transferring Files to a Host Securely Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use SCP to transfer a file to and from a host. 81992
RHEL 7: Troubleshoot and Secure a Linux System Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use SELinux to protect a network service and find the processes using the most memory or CPU resources. 82112
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting a Process Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot or identify problem processes. 81944
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting and Repairing File Systems Part2 Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the basic tools for repairing a variety of file systems. 82108
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting Boot Failures Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot basic boot failures after an installation. 82056
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting CPU/Memory Intensive Processes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot CPU or memory intensive processes. 82102
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting File Permission Issues Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify and diagnose file permission issues. 82103
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting GRUB Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot and configure the GRUB boot loader. 82057
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting Locked Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify locked files or files used by a process. 82106
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting Memory Issues Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot common memory issues. 82101
RHEL 7: Troubleshooting Network Issues Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot common network issues. 82105
RHEL 7: Tunneling insecure connections over SSH Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to work with ssh tunneling to secure vnc or xdmcp. 81993
RHEL 7: Updating the Kernel Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to update or modify a kernel to ensure a bootable system. 82054
RHEL 7: Updating the System Using Gnome Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to update the current software manually or automatically using the package manager. 81890
RHEL 7: Updating the System Using yum Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to update the system software from the Shell. 81893
RHEL 7: Use Gnome and the BASH Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to explore the Gnome User Interface and run commands from the BASH Shell. 81862
RHEL 7: Using a Firewall Manager Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the advanced features of the firewall manager. 81985
RHEL 7: Using a Firewall Ruleset at Boot Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure the system to use a set of firewall rules on boot from the shell. 81983
RHEL 7: Using ACLs; DACs; and MACs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to get and set discretionary and mandatory Access Control Lists. 81919
RHEL 7: Using AD Enrollment with Kickstart Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure kickstart to automatically connect to a directory service. 82082
RHEL 7: Using Advanced Vim Editor Commands Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use features of vim to search text; replace text; and add; remove; or delete lines. 81872
RHEL 7: Using an Encrypted Filesystem Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use an encrypted filesystem. 82016
RHEL 7: Using and Compressing Swap Partitions Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to using and compressing swap partitions or files. 82026
RHEL 7: Using autofs with SMB Shares Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use autofs to mount shares automatically. 82003
RHEL 7: Using bzip2 to Compress and Decompress Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use bzip2 to compress or decompress a file. 81882
RHEL 7: Using Compression with the Tape Archiver Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use gzip and bzip2 with tar directory to compress and decompress in a stream. 81885
RHEL 7: Using dracut for Installation Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to investigate booting or installation issues using dracut. 82081
RHEL 7: Using Expansion in Scripts Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the order of expansion when used in a script. 81926
RHEL 7: Using Filename Globbing Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use globbing to select files based on matching filename patterns. 81865
RHEL 7: Using GPT Disks Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use tools to create; delete; and list GPT-based partitions. 82025
RHEL 7: Using Grep Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use grep to find patterns in a file based on simple patterns or regular expressions. 81914
RHEL 7: Using Grep with Redirection Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use grep with I/O redirection and pipes to create lists. 81916
RHEL 7: Using gzip and gunzip to Compress and Decompress Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the gzip and gunzip commands to compress or decompress a file. 81881
RHEL 7: Using Input and Output Redirection Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use input and output redirection to stdin and stdout to manage output from Shell commands. 81863
RHEL 7: Using Kernel Modules Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to list; add; remove; and configure kernel modules. 82055
RHEL 7: Using Keys with SSH to Automate Connections Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use ssh keys to authenticate rather than user name and password. 81994
RHEL 7: Using Kickstart to Automate Installations Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use kickstart to create an automation script for automated installs. 82080
RHEL 7: Using Kickstart to Install a Guest VM Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use a kickstart script to install RHEL 7 as a guest. 82084
RHEL 7: Using Local Repositories for Package Management Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a local repository and only allow software packages and updates that have been approved. 81896
RHEL 7: Using Logic Statements Part 1 Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the if statement and the for basic looping construct. 81923
RHEL 7: Using Logic Statements Part 2 Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the while and until looping constructs. 81924
RHEL 7: Using MBR Disks Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use tools to create; delete; list; and manage MBR-based partitions. 82021
RHEL 7: Using Network tools Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to work with the network manager to check the network configuration and explore networks from the File Manager. 81846
RHEL 7: Using NFSv4 Securely Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the differences in the configuration for running NFS securely. 81997
RHEL 7: Using Other Compression and Decompression Tools Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use additional; but not as often used in Linux; compression and decompression tools. 81886
RHEL 7: Using Password Policies Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to apply user password ageing and other policies to user accounts. 81904
RHEL 7: Using Pipes Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use pipes to chain one command to another to alter the output . 81864
RHEL 7: Using PTP for Network Time Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure a system to use Precision Time Protocol. 81969
RHEL 7: Using Quotas Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to add; edit; and view quotas. 81920
RHEL 7: Using read in a Script Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use read to get input from the user in a BASH script. 81922
RHEL 7: Using Relative and Absolute Paths Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe how relative and absolute paths are used and how shortcuts like ../ and ~/ make directory traversal easier. 81858
RHEL 7: Using RHEL 7 as a Guest Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe and use RHEL 7 as a guest running on a host. 82065
RHEL 7: Using RHEL 7 as a Host Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure and optimize RHEL 7 to be a host for guests. 82072
RHEL 7: Using SELinux Process Contexts Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use and apply an SELinux process context. 82093
RHEL 7: Using SELinux Roles Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify role-based access controls (RBAC) in SELinux. 82095
RHEL 7: Using SELinux to Secure a Network Service Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use SELinux to secure a network service. 82100
RHEL 7: Using SELinux User Contexts Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify and recognize the components and purpose of SELinux user contexts. 82092
RHEL 7: Using Shell Text Editors to Create and Edit Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use a Shell text editor to create or edit a text file. 81874
RHEL 7: Using Shell Variables and the Shell Environment Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to view the Shell environment variables and be able to set a Shell variable within a script. 81879
RHEL 7: Using SSH to Connect to a Host Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use SSH to connect to a remote host. 81991
RHEL 7: Using sVirt to Protect Guests Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use sVirt to protect guests. 82071
RHEL 7: Using SystemD JournalD with Syslog Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to configure systemd journals to forward system messages to traditional system logging tools. 81960
RHEL 7: Using SystemD Process Management Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use SystemD to manage the system. 81949
RHEL 7: Using SystemD Timer Units Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe a systemd timer unit and the options. 81935
RHEL 7: Using SystemD to Manage Services Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to work with SystemD to manage running services. 81948
RHEL 7: Using SystemTap for Diagnostics Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use SystemTap to investigate and monitor the activities of the operating system kernel. 82085
RHEL 7: Using Telnet to Connect to a Host Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use Telnet to connect to remote hosts. 81989
RHEL 7: Using Test Operators Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use bash test operators to check for conditions. 81925
RHEL 7: Using the Bourne Again Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to open; close; set fonts; set colors; resize; and run a command from the Bourne Again Shell (BASH). 81851
RHEL 7: Using the Exit Status Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to set an exit status and use it from the shell. 81927
RHEL 7: Using the Extended Tape Archiver (star) Command Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the star command to create; extract; compress; or list the contents of an archive that supports extended ACLs. 81884
RHEL 7: Using the Gnome Package Manager Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to run the Gnome package manager to view installed sofrware or find software. 81888
RHEL 7: Using the Red Hat Rescue Environment Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to troubleshoot using the Red Hat Rescue Environment. 82111
RHEL 7: Using the Stream Editor to Edit Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to work with sed to alter the contents of a text file. 81875
RHEL 7: Using the Tape Archiver (tar) Command Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use the tar command to create; extract; compress; or list the contents of an archive. 81883
RHEL 7: Using Thin Provisioning Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to manage free space in a storage pool and allocate space as required. 82029
RHEL 7: Using Vim to Create and Edit Files Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to work with vim to open; do basic edits; and save a text file. 81871
RHEL 7: Using VNC to Connect to a Host or to Host a Connection Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use VNC to connect; or be the host of; a remote connection. 81990
RHEL 7: Using Volume Groups Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to assign logical and physical volumes to a volume group. 82030
RHEL 7: Using Which and Locate Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify the path and filename for a command or locate files that have been indexed. 81870
RHEL 7: Using yum Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use yum to list; find; and install software packages from the Shell. 81892
RHEL 7: Viewing and Comparing File Contents from a Shell Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to use common commands like less; cat; more; and diff to view and compare file contents. 81857
RHEL 7: Working with /etc/passwd and /etc/shadow Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the components of the /etc/passwd file and the purpose of the /etc/shadow file. 81900
RHEL 7: Working with at to Schedule Jobs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify the at parameters and commands used for managing jobs. 81932
RHEL 7: Working with Directory Services Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to identify the files and setting that must be changed to support an external directory service. 82004
RHEL 7: Working with Scheduled Jobs Dan Lachance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the different job schedulers and how they differ. 81928
Microsoft (2902)
Title Speaker Summary ID
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Applying an Azure VM DSC Configuration Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to apply a DSC configuration to an Azure VM. 92684
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Bootstrapping LCM Configuration of HyperV VMs Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to bootstrap a DSC LCM configuration into a new HyperV VM. 92689
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Configure a Server Farm in Azure Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to create; publish; and configure a server farm in Azure using DSC. 92699
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Configuring a Linux Environment for DSC Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to configure a Linux node to receive a PowerShell DSC configuration. 92691
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Configuring HyperV VMs using DSC Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to define a configuration for a HyperV guest VM using DSC. 92688
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Configuring the HyperV Role using DSC Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to use DSC to configure a HyperV host. 92687
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Connecting to an Internal PowerShellGet Repository Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to connect an authoring environment to a local DSC module repository. 92658
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Create a JEA Endpoint Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to configure a node to be managed with Just Enough Administration in DSC. 92696
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Create and Publish a Custom Resource Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom resource using the DSC Resource Designer and then document; test; and deploy it. 92678
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Creating a DSC Configuration for a Linux Node Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to create a Linux DSC configuration. 92692
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Creating a Simple Composite Resource Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to create a composite-style resource that strings together existing out-of-the-box DSC resources. 92660
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Creating an Azure VM DSC Configuration Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to create a DSC configuration for an Azure VM. 92682
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Creating an Internal PowerShellGet Repository Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to configure an internal repository for DSC modules. 92657
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Debugging Techniques in Consuming DSC Resources Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how the DSC LCM loads and caches resources. 92672
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Debugging Techniques in Writing DSC Resources Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to identify techniques to writing DSC resources that can assist in debugging internal resource problems. 92671
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Deploying Custom Resources in Push Mode Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to deploy your custom resources when using Push mode configurations. 92669
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Deploying Custom Resources via an HTTP Pull Server Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to deploy your custom resources when using Pull mode configurations with an HTTP Pull Server. 92700
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Deploying Custom Resources via an SMB Pull Server Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to deploy your custom resources when using Pull mode configurations with an SMB Pull Server. 92670
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Documenting DSC Resources Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to document custom DSC resources so that they can be better consumed by others. 92673
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: DSC Resource Parameters Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to identify the various types of DSC resource parameters. 92667
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Examining a Custom Resource Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how DSC modules and resources are structured in preparation for writing custom resources. 92661
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Examining a Linux Machine's Config and Metaconfig Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to explore how DSC sets the LCM and configuration itself on a Linux node. 92694
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Examining the DSC Resource Get Command Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the Get DSC resource command that retrieves the node's current state. 92665
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Examining the DSC Resource Set Command Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the Set DSC Resource command that performs the main resource activity. 92662
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Examining the DSC Resource Test Command Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the Test DSC resource command that identifies the node's current state. 92664
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Exploring Partial Configurations Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to configure a node using multiple DSC configurations from various sources. 92680
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Handling Machine Reboots Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize how to instruct a node that it requires a reboot without forcing it to do so. 92675
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Nesting DSC Configurations Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to nest a DSC configuration inside of another. 92679
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Overview of Azure Automation DSC Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the Azure automation capability for DSC. 92686
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Overview of Just Enough Administration Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to outline PowerShell DSC's Just Enough Administration (JEA) principles and concepts. 92695
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Overview of PowerShell DSC for Linux Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to explore how DSC can be used to configure a Linux node. 92690
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Publishing a Linux DSC Config Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to publish a DSC configuration to a Linux node. 92693
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Publishing an Azure VM DSC Configuration Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to publish a DSC configuration to Azure storage for an Azure VM. 92683
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Reading Azure DSC Logs Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to identify the DSC logs created for an Azure VM node. 92685
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Resetting a JEA Endpoint Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to reset a JEA endpoint's configuration in DSC. 92698
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Testing a JEA Endpoint Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to test a JEA node's configuration to ensure it is successfully applied in DSC. 92697
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Understanding DSC Resource Types and Structures Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to describe how DSC modules and resources work and the different types that can be created. 92659
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Understanding DSC's Default Repositories Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to use PowerShellGet and the PSGallery for DSC. 92656
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Understanding Resource Idempotency Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to identify the key aspect of Set commands in DSC resources. 92663
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Unit Testing DSC Resources Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to test resources while writing them to ensure they work as expected. 92674
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Updating an Existing DSC Resource Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to update an existing DSC resource. 92668
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Using the DSC Resource Designer Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to create a custom resource using the DSC Resource Designer. 92666
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Using the JEA Toolkit Helper Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to use the JEA Toolkit Helper to generate JEA Toolkits. 92701
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Writing DSC Resources Using C# Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to write custom DSC resources using C#. 92677
Advanced PowerShell Desired State Configuration: Writing DSC Resources Using PowerShell Classes Hilton Giesenow After watching this video; you will be able to write custom DSC resources using PowerShell 5's new classes. 92676
CompTIA Mobility+: Administrative Platforms Dan LaChance The CompTIA Mobility+ certification covers the knowledge and skills required to deploy and manage a mobile environment and aspects of over-the-air technology. In this video; Dan LaChance describes mobile device management (MDM) administration platforms. 75275
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Configuring a MDT Production Deployment Share Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to create a MDT production deployment share and add a custom image to it. 77860
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Configuring Key Management Service Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to install the Volume Activation Services role; add a KMS host; and activate the KMS key. 77899
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Creating an Answer File Using Windows SIM Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to create an answer file using Windows SIM. 77825
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Creating and Configuring the Deployment Share Part 1 Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to create a deployment share and configure permissions. 77850
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Determining Application Compatibility Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the process to determine application compatibility. 77788
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Identifying Challenges for OS Deployment Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to identify the challenges for operating system deployment to new and existing devices. 77784
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Identifying Common Application Compatibility Issues Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to identify common application compatibility issues. 77789
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Identifying the Windows Setup Phases Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe installation types for Windows Setup and the Windows setup phases. 77821
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Managing the Boot Images in SCCM Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to manage the default boot images in SCCM; including how to customize them and configure optional settings and distribute it. 77874
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Office 2013 Versions Available for Installation Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the two Office 2013 versions available for installation: MSI and C2R. 77904
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Preparing to Capture an Image Using DISM Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to determine which partitions to capture and prepare to capture an image using DISM. 77829
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Preparing to Deploy C2R for Office 365 Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to use the C2R Administration tool to prepare for a C2R installation of Office 365. 77914
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: The Office Customization Tool to Customize Office Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe how the Office Customization Tool; OCT; can be used to customize Office 2013 for deployment. 77909
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding High-Touch Installs with Retail Media Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to explain the requirements and the deployment process for a high-touch with retail media strategy; including the benefits and limitations. 77840
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding How WDS Enhances an MDT Environment Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe how WDS enhances an MDT environment for LTIs. 77865
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding License Activation for Windows Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe product activation and the three main activation methods: retail; OEM; volume activation. 77893
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding OS Deployment Using SCCM Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe operating systems deployment using SCCM and the terminology. 77868
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding PXE-Initiated OS Deployments Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe PXE-initiated OS deployments; including the benefits; requirements; and how it works. 77834
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding the ACT Architecture Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the ACT architecture and how the components work together; including what data collection packages and compatibility ratings are. 77797
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding the Benefits of Integrating MDT With SCCM Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the benefits of integrating MDT with SCCM for deployments. 77885
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding the Different Solutions for Application Compatibility Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to identify available application compatibility solutions. 77793
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding the Enterprise Desktop Life Cycle Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the enterprise desktop life cycle model; including the planning and purchasing decisions. 77768
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding the Guidelines for Desktop Deployment Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe the guidelines for an effective enterprise desktop deployment. 77772
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding the Types of Images Used for Windows Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to identify the different types of images that current Windows environments use and their benefits. 77815
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Understanding User State Migration Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe what user state is and how user state migration works; including the tools. 77804
Deploying Windows Devices and Enterprise Apps: Using WDS Multicasting with MDT LTI Deployments Dan LaChance After watching this video; you will be able to describe how WDS multicasting can be used with an MDT LTI deployment and enable it. 77867
Enabling Office 365 Services: Activating Office 365 ProPlus Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows the activation and deactivation of Office 365 ProPlus users' licenses from the Office 365 admin center. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to enable and disable an Office 365 ProPlus user license from the Office 365 admin center. 73553
Enabling Office 365 Services: Applying Retention Policies in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows an Exchange Administrator to add retention policies to mailboxes in Exchange Online using the Exchange Administration console. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the retention policies that are available; as well as how to apply them. 73643
Enabling Office 365 Services: Assigning E-mail Addresses in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services allow you to assign multiple e-mail addresses to a single contact. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to assign an additional e-mail address to a contact in Exchange Online. 73636
Enabling Office 365 Services: Choosing an Update Method for Office 365 ProPlus Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows Office 365 ProPlus users and administrators three update options. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to update Office 365 ProPlus from within Office; with the Office Deployment Tool; and by reinstalling Office from the Office 365 portal. 73566
Enabling Office 365 Services: Co-Authoring Documents in SharePoint Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to co-author documents on SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to co-author documents in SharePoint Online to ensure that both you and a collaborator have the required access to edit the document. 73594
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring a SharePoint Site Collection Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services ensure that SharePoint site collections have got names and URLs assigned to them by default. A SharePoint Administrator may want to rename a site collection and change the URL to which is it pointing. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure a SharePoint site collection to suit your needs. 73590
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring eDiscovery to Search Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to configure eDiscovery to search Exchange Online after the eDiscovery Center has been created. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure eDiscovery to use Exchange Online as a result source. 73599
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring Exchange Online Retention Policies Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services allow you to either use the default MRM policy; or configure your own message retention policies. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure retention policies in Exchange Online. 73641
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring External Access to a Public Site Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows a SharePoint website to be seen publicly. However when a SharePoint public website is offline; it can't be seen publicly on the internet; so visitors to the site will only see a log-in screen. Only authenticated users can then view or customize the site. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure a site to allow external access to a public website. 73588
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring External Communication in Lync Online Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365 Services; you can easily configure Lync Online user permissions for external and internal communication. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure external communication in Lync Online. 73650
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring Notifications Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can configure notifications so that Exchange users are automatically alerted about quarantined spam messages in their mailboxes. You can also choose the language or region of messages to filter for spam. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure end-user spam notifications and international spam options. 73608
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring Presence Settings in Lync Online Nicolas Blank You can configure the user and organization's presence settings in Lync Online for Office 365 services. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the organization menu to discuss the two presence privacy modes; namely Automatically display presence information and Display presence information only to a user's contacts. 73649
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring Site Collection Resource Quotas Nicolas Blank In Office 365 Services; a SharePoint Administrator is required to set the resource quotas and warning levels in SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure the site collection resource quotas. 73587
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring Site Collection Storage Quotas Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services ensure that SharePoint Online comes with a set of predefined limits; including storage quotas for site collections in SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure site collection storage quotas. 73589
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring SPAM Confidence Level Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can use the Exchange admin center to configure content filtering. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure a content filter to take specific actions against e-mail messages based on the likelihood that the messages are spam. 73607
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring Telemetry Using Group Policy Nicolas Blank In Office 365 Services; setting up Telemetry and Reporting involves multiple steps. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure Telemetry using Group Policy settings. 73573
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring Telemetry Using the Registry Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services' requires that values enabling the Telemetry Agent to collect data be set in a registry file. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create and configure a parameterized registry file which he merges with the registry. 73572
Enabling Office 365 Services: Configuring the Reply To Address in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow administrators managing user mailboxes in Exchange Online to configure a user's default reply address differently to their sign-in address. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to edit the default reply address for a specific user from the Recipient feature area in the Exchange admin center management console. 73625
Enabling Office 365 Services: Connecting to the Telemetry Database Nicolas Blank In Office 365 Services; the Telemetry Dashboard needs to be launched and connected to a new or existing SQL server database. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to launch and connect the Telemetry Dashboard to a SQL server; and reviews the tabbed worksheets that are generated. 73570
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating a Security Group for eDiscovery Managers Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to create a security group for eDiscovery Managers. As the tenant administrator; you'll be creating and managing the eDiscovery Center. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create a security group for eDiscovery Managers. 73600
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating Distribution Lists in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 distribution groups allow you to easily distribute mail to several people at the same time. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create a distribution group within Exchange Online. 73637
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating Document Libraries in SharePoint Online Nicolas Blank As the SharePoint administrator for your Office 365 tenant; you may be asked to create a document library in SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create and customize a new document library in SharePoint Online. 73596
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating eDiscovery Queries Nicolas Blank When enabling Office 365 services; you can create and run eDiscovery queries in SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Search button to run a query and locate a query term in messages. 73603
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating eDiscovery Reports Nicolas Blank In Office 365 services; you can create reports about content exported from an eDiscovery case. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Download Report button to open the eDiscovery Download Manager application to create a report about exported content. 73605
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating External Contacts in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services allow you to easily create contacts that are external to your organization. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create an external contact in Exchange Online. 73635
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating Resource Mailboxes in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Exchange Online is the cloud-based version of Exchange within Office 365 which includes features not available in the on-premises Microsoft Exchange Server; such as the creation of resource mailboxes. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create a room mailbox and an equipment mailbox in the Exchange Administration Center (EAC) of Microsoft Exchange Online. 73632
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating Retention Tags in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow you to use Exchange Online to create custom retention tags which make up policies. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create three possible tags in Exchange Online: a Default retention tag; a Default Folder retention tag; and a Personal retention tag. 73642
Enabling Office 365 Services: Creating Shared Mailboxes in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow administrators to easily create and configure shared mailboxes in Exchange Online so multiple users can read and send e-mails; and view calendar information from a common account. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Exchange admin center (EAC) to create a new shared mailbox and specify permissions for accessing and sending e-mails. 73634
Enabling Office 365 Services: Customizing Meeting Invitations with Lync Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow you to customize optional items in Lync Online meeting invitations according to your organization's needs. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set up an online meeting calendar event before configuring the Lync Online meeting invitation with the organization's logo; help and legal URL's; and custom footer text from within the Lync admin center. 73619
Enabling Office 365 Services: Customizing the Office Deployment Tool Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows the customized configuration and installation of Office 365 Click-to-Run products by the Office Deployment Tool from the command line. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to code elements of the Office Deployment Tool default XML configuration file. 73559
Enabling Office 365 Services: Customizing the Retention Policy in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank As an Exchange administrator; you can customize the retention policy in Exchange Online for Office 365 services. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Exchange Admin Center to edit and change the Default MRM Policy. 73644
Enabling Office 365 Services: Cutover Migrations Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can choose to perform a cutover migration of on-premises Exchange mailboxes to Exchange Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to prepare for and configure a cutover migration; and explains what occurs during the migration process. 73611
Enabling Office 365 Services: Delegating Exchange Online Permissions Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365 Services; you can delegate Exchange Online sender permissions in order to restrict who can send as and on behalf of; and who has full access to certain mailboxes. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure Exchange Online permissions. 73639
Enabling Office 365 Services: Deploying Products Using the Office Deployment Tool Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services use the Office Deployment Tool setup EXE with the /Configure switch acting on a customized XML deployment file to deploy Office 365 Click-to-Run products. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to deploy Office 365 Click-to-Run products from the command line. 73561
Enabling Office 365 Services: Deploying the Telemetry Agent Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services' Telemetry Service requires the deployment of a Telemetry Agent. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to allow external content on the Telemetry Dashboard connected to the SQL server database; and deploys and installs the Telemetry Agent on machines not running Office 2013. 73571
Enabling Office 365 Services: Document Library Features in SharePoint Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you access to the Document Library feature in SharePoint Online which provides significant functionality. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access and use the Document Library as a tenant administrator. 73595
Enabling Office 365 Services: Downloading Products Using the Office Deployment Tool Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services use a customized XML download file passed to the Office Deployment Tool setup EXE as a command-line parameter to download Office. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to execute the command and download the required Office 365 Click-to-Run files. 73560
Enabling Office 365 Services: Enabling Personal Archives in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Exchange Online; the cloud-based version of Exchange within Office 365; allows administrators to assign personal archives for mailboxes to specified users. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to enable personal archives for mailboxes in the Exchange Administration Center (EAC) of Microsoft Exchange Online. 73640
Enabling Office 365 Services: Enabling Telemetry through Group Policy Nicolas Blank In Office 365 Services; the Telemetry Service can be enabled using Group Policy settings written to downloaded Group Policy administrative template files. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to download and install the required templates; and reviews the Telemetry Dashboard Group Policy settings. 73568
Enabling Office 365 Services: Ensuring Lync Online Compliance Nicolas Blank You can ensure compliance in Microsoft Office 365 by enabling or disabling the required features from within Lync Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to ensure Lync Online compliance by implementing a litigation hold on a user. 73646
Enabling Office 365 Services: Exchange Online Administration Nicolas Blank Microsoft Exchange Online is the cloud-based version of Exchange within Office 365 which can provide email administrators with a range of options for configuring the email requirements of an organization. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the administrative interface in the Exchange Administration Center (EAC). 73624
Enabling Office 365 Services: Excluding Products Using the Office Deployment Tool Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows the Office Deployment Tool to exclude deployment of Office 365 Click-to-Run product components. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how the ExcludeApp ID element in the XML configuration file prevents Office 365 Click-to-Run product components being installed. 73562
Enabling Office 365 Services: Exporting eDiscovery Content Nicolas Blank In Office 365 services; you can export content from an eDiscovery case. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Export button to export content with its name; versioning information; and encrypted items. 73604
Enabling Office 365 Services: External Sharing and Individual Site Collections Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow the external sharing of individual SharePoint Online site collections to be enabled or disabled. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to select SharePoint Online site collections and choose one of three different levels of external sharing. 73581
Enabling Office 365 Services: External Sharing in SharePoint Online Nicolas Blank In enabling Office 365 services; the SharePoint Online administrator may need to enable; disable; or even control sharing at a global level. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the available SharePoint sharing options to discuss authentication-based and invitation-based sharing. 73580
Enabling Office 365 Services: External Sharing Settings for Site Collections Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow the external sharing of multiple SharePoint Online site collections to be enabled or disabled. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to select all SharePoint Online site collections and choose one of three different external sharing levels. 73582
Enabling Office 365 Services: Getting Started with Excel Services Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow you to work with live Excel workbooks with a browser from within a SharePoint portal. This is possible using the Excel Services application service provided by SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to upload Excel spreadsheets to SharePoint Online and consume workbook data via Excel Services using the Excel Web Access Web Part. 73622
Enabling Office 365 Services: Getting Started with OneDrive for Business Nicolas Blank In enabling Office 365 services; you will find that OneDrive for Business is similar to a SharePoint document library. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create a new PowerPoint presentation document and a new folder. 73593
Enabling Office 365 Services: Getting Started with Project Online Nicolas Blank In enabling Office 365 services; you may want to make use of a subscription-based service called Project Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Active Users option to examine the Project Online license assigned to a particular user. 73592
Enabling Office 365 Services: Getting Started with the Office 365 App Store Nicolas Blank Office 365 is a combination of cloud services and productivity applications. The Office 365 App Store is a platform allowing Microsoft users to browse for; download; and use apps from within each of the Office products. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to navigate around the App Store; as well as how to use the different features. 73621
Enabling Office 365 Services: Getting Started with Visio Services Nicolas Blank Office 365 services support Visio Services; a service application that allows you to easily consume Visio diagrams through the browser without needing a Visio client. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access Visio documents from within a SharePoint document library; refresh the data; and collaborate on diagrams with commenting. 73623
Enabling Office 365 Services: IMAP Migrations Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services provides Exchange administrators with various methods to migrate mailboxes; one of which is the Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) migration. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to migrate user data using IMAP in Exchange Online. 73612
Enabling Office 365 Services: In-Place eDiscovery in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services provides Exchange administrators with the In-Place eDiscovery feature; which allows for mailbox searches to find content related to compliance; policies; or legal issues. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to assign the Discovery Management role; which permits mailbox searches; placing users in a legal hold. 73614
Enabling Office 365 Services: In-Place Hold in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services provides Exchange administrators with the In-Place Hold feature for placing user mailboxes in legal (or litigation) hold. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to place mailboxes in legal hold so that they can be searched for content related to compliance; policies; and legal issues. 73615
Enabling Office 365 Services: Installing Office for Mac Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows the installation of Microsoft Office for Mac from the Office 365 management portal. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to download; install; and configure Microsoft Office for Mac from the Office 365 settings menu's Office page. 73556
Enabling Office 365 Services: Installing Office Mobile Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows the installation of Microsoft Office Mobile from the Office 365 administration portal. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to install and configure Microsoft Office Mobile from the Office 365 settings menu's Phone & tablet page. 73555
Enabling Office 365 Services: Installing the Telemetry Processor Nicolas Blank In Office 365 Services; the Telemetry Service data is collected and stored in a SQL database by a Telemetry Processor. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Microsoft Office Telemetry Processor setup and settings wizards to install and configure the Telemetry Processor. 73569
Enabling Office 365 Services: Introducing Click-to-Run Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services' Click-to-Run streaming and virtualization technology allows the installation and immediate use of required Office 365 ProPlus applications. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to install Microsoft Office 2013 using the Click-to-Run installer and open multiple applications before installation is complete. 73557
Enabling Office 365 Services: Licensing Office 365 ProPlus Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows for the licensing of Office 365 ProPlus users and lets them install from the browser. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates; as an administrator and user; the licensing of Office 365 ProPlus users from the Office 365 management portal. 73552
Enabling Office 365 Services: Lync Online Administration Nicolas Blank The Lync Online administration console in Microsoft Office 365 allows you to manage and configure various user and organization settings. In this video; Nicolas Blank discusses the features of the Lync Online administration console; such as selecting and changing user options; dial-in conferencing requirements; and troubleshooting features. 73647
Enabling Office 365 Services: Lync Online Dependencies Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365 Services; you can easily fulfil the infrastructure dependencies and software requirements needed in order to deploy Lync Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank discusses the dependency and software requirements of Lync Online deployment; such as the OS requirements and DNS management. 73648
Enabling Office 365 Services: Lync Online Presence and Push Settings Nicolas Blank In Office 365 Services; Lync Online is the cloud-based version of Lync where people can connect from anywhere at any time; providing an experience for presence; instant messaging; voice; and video. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use Lync Online to manage presence and push settings; using the Lync Administration Center. 73617
Enabling Office 365 Services: Lync Online Services Nicolas Blank Microsoft Lync Online; which is part of Office 365; provides many of the same features as the on-premises Microsoft Lync Server. In this video; Nicolas Blank discusses the presence; instant messaging; and conferencing services provided by Lync Online. 73645
Enabling Office 365 Services: Mailbox Migrations to Exchange Online Nicolas Blank When enabling Office 365 services; you have a number of options when migrating mailboxes into Exchange Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the migration menu to migrate mailboxes to Exchange Online in a hybrid mode setting. 73609
Enabling Office 365 Services: Making Bulk Changes to Mailbox Properties Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow Exchange Online administrators to easily and effectively make bulk changes to mailbox information from within the Exchange admin center (EAC) web-based management console. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to select multiple shared mailboxes and use the bulk edit feature in the EAC details pane bulk update custom attributes. 73626
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Activated Installations Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows the management and revocation of Office 365 ProPlus user licenses from the Office 365 administration portal. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to revoke and manage Office 365 ProPlus user licenses as an administrator and user. 73554
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Distribution Lists in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 allows you to easily manage features of your distribution groups; including membership; and delivery management. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage distribution groups in Exchange Online. 73638
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing eDiscovery Permissions Nicolas Blank When enabling Office 365 services; you can grant permissions to transcend eDiscovery functionality to both SharePoint and Exchange. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Crawl Log Permissions option to grant read permissions to the security group. 73601
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Exchange Online Mailbox Features Nicolas Blank Office 365 services provide an easy-to-use management console that allows administrators to view or change mailbox features and settings in Exchange Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure a user mailbox using the mailbox properties' mailbox features section in the Exchange admin center (EAC). 73628
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Exchange Online Mailbox Use Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow administrators to customize the Exchange Online mailbox database defaults by using PowerShell to change storage quota and item retention settings. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Set-Mailbox cmdlet and the parameters used to specify mailbox size limits and the period for retaining deleted items. 73631
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Exchange Online SIP Addresses Nicolas Blank Office 365 services provide useful functionality that allows administrators to manage the Exchange Online SIP addresses that route a user's communication session. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how changes to the User Principal Name (UPN) in the Office admin center change the primary SIP address automatically; and how to force SIP address updates in the Exchange admin center (EAC). 73630
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing External Access Using Lync Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services allows administrators to use Lync Online to give users access to other users; particularly users outside their organization. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set external Lync communication to specific domains while blocking other domains. 73618
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Lync Online User Settings Nicolas Blank With Lync Online as part of the Office 365 services subscription; administrators can easily access Lync Online users and configure their settings from within the Office 365 portal. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage an individual and multiple user settings using the configuration options in the Lync admin center. 73620
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Resource Mailboxes in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow administrators to manage resource mailboxes that are especially useful when scheduling resources as part of a meeting request. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Exchange admin center (EAC) to change room mailbox properties. 73633
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing SharePoint Site Collection Administrators Nicolas Blank In enabling Office 365 services; the overall SharePoint administrator must assign and manage SharePoint site collection administrators. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Manage Administrators menu to discuss the difference between the primary site collection administrator and the site collection administrators. 73585
Enabling Office 365 Services: Managing Telemetry Privacy Issues Nicolas Blank The Office 365 Telemetry Service offers Telemetry and Reporting Services; which expose filenames; file paths; and titles in the Telemetry reports. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to disguise or obscure user and file data shown in the Telemetry Dashboard; using multiple methods. 73575
Enabling Office 365 Services: Manual Data Collection with the Telemetry Agent Nicolas Blank In the Office 365 Telemetry Service; you can trigger the Telemetry Agent to collect data manually. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure the Telemetry Agent to manually collect data by using the registry; as well as the Task Scheduler options in Windows. 73574
Enabling Office 365 Services: Office Web Apps Nicolas Blank When enabling Office 365 services; Office Web Apps can extend the functionality within Office 365 by choosing and installing applications for users. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the organization node to explore the three editing options for the applications. 73579
Enabling Office 365 Services: Outlook Connection Modes Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow you make use of Outlook 2013. Within Outlook 2013 you have the option of running between cached and non-cached modes. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the differences between cached and non-cached modes. 73578
Enabling Office 365 Services: OWA Access and ActiveSync in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 Services allows Exchange administrators to control how users access their mailboxes using Outlook Web Access (OWA) or ActiveSync in Exchange Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to enable or disable mobile mail access using OWA or traditional mail access using ActiveSync. 73616
Enabling Office 365 Services: Planning and Creating eDiscovery Cases Nicolas Blank In enabling Office 365 services; you can plan; create; and manage eDiscovery cases. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the Use unique permissions option to grant permissions to a particular group. 73602
Enabling Office 365 Services: Planning Exchange Online Archives Nicolas Blank Office 365 is a combination of cloud services and productivity applications. Exchange Online Archiving makes it possible to host primary mailboxes on an on-premises server; as well as store historical e-mail data in cloud-based archive mailboxes. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to plan Exchange Online archives in Office 365; navigating through the interface and explaining the processes involved. 73613
Enabling Office 365 Services: Planning Outlook 2013 Clients Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to make use of Outlook 2013; which provides a wide range of functionality for dealing with mail. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates some of the key features of Outlook 2013 and offers advice on how to plan for Outlook 2013 clients. 73576
Enabling Office 365 Services: Releasing Quarantined Messages Nicolas Blank In Office 365 services; users and administrators can examine or release quarantined messages. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Advanced search option to specify search criteria for quarantined messages. 73606
Enabling Office 365 Services: Removing Products Using the Office Deployment Tool Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow the exclusion and removal of Office 365 Click-to-Run products from the Office Deployment Tool command line. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure an Office 365 ProPlus Retail Suite installation's XML configuration file to remove an application. 73564
Enabling Office 365 Services: Restrict Self-Provisioning of Office 365 ProPlus Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow tenant administrators to limit the users' ability to download and install Office 365 ProPlus software components. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure Office 365's User Software settings to prevent users downloading and installing software. 73551
Enabling Office 365 Services: Searching Using the eDiscovery Center Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to perform searches using the eDiscovery Center. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to conduct a search if you don't have the URL for the Discovery Center; how to use wildcards; and possible issues you may encounter. 73598
Enabling Office 365 Services: Secondary E-mail Aliases in Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 services allow Exchange Online administrators to add e-mail aliases to a user's account; enabling the routing of several addresses to a single mailbox. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure multiple e-mail aliases using the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and set the default reply address for a single mailbox from the Exchange admin center (EAC). 73627
Enabling Office 365 Services: Setting Up an eDiscovery Center in SharePoint Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to set up an eDiscovery Center in SharePoint Online; which requires a multi-discipline approach spanning many document types. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set up an eDiscovery Center; detailing the configurations options needed and storage quota considerations. 73597
Enabling Office 365 Services: Setting Up Lync Clients Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow you to make use of the Lync client; which can be downloaded and installed due to its availability within the subscription of Lync Online within Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to install and set up Lync Clients. 73577
Enabling Office 365 Services: SharePoint Online and OneDrive for Business Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services OneDrive for Business is a SharePoint feature and sync area allowing users to originate; upload; edit; manage; and share documents supported by Office Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use SharePoint Online's OneDrive for Business feature. 73586
Enabling Office 365 Services: Sharing Documents with External Users Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allows for the sharing of SharePoint Online content at a site or document level. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to invite and grant an external user authenticated access to a document within an Office 365 SharePoint site document library. 73584
Enabling Office 365 Services: Sharing Sites with External Users Pierre Devereux Office 365 Services allows the sharing of SharePoint Online sites with external users. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to e-mail an invitation to an external user so the recipient can authenticate to and access a specific SharePoint team site. 73583
Enabling Office 365 Services: Staged Migrations Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can migrate on-premises Exchange mailboxes to Exchange Online using a staged migration method. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to prepare for a staged migration and how to configure and start a migration batch. 73610
Enabling Office 365 Services: The Office Deployment Tool Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services' Office Deployment Tool allows administrators to configure Click-to-Run for Office 365; limiting end-user Office 365 management portal installations. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to download the Office Deployment Tool's setup and configuration files to a shared folder. 73558
Enabling Office 365 Services: The Telemetry Service Nicolas Blank In Office 365 Services; the Office Telemetry Service allows organizational compatibility monitoring against legacy versions of Office and document types. In this video; Nicolas Blank discusses the attributes of the Telemetry Dashboard; and outlines the logic and processes behind it. 73567
Enabling Office 365 Services: Updating Office 365 ProPlus Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services uses Windows Scheduler to ensure that Office 365 ProPlus updates are available; downloaded; and applied. In this video; Nicolas Blank discusses the update options available to Microsoft Office 2013; and explains the various triggers ensuring that it updates automatically. 73565
Enabling Office 365 Services: Updating Products Using the Office Deployment Tool Nicolas Blank Office 365 Services allow for the configuration of Office 365 Click-to-Run products by the Office Deployment Tool from the command line. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure the Office Deployment Tool default XML configuration file to enable product updates. 73563
Enabling Office 365 Services: Using PowerShell to Manage E-mail Addresses Nicolas Blank As an alternative to the management console; Office 365 services allow administrators to manage primary and secondary e-mail addresses in Exchange Online using PowerShell commands. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create a remote session to Exchange Online; and set a primary and alias e-mail address for a user using PowerShell command syntax. 73629
Enabling Office 365 Services: Yammer versus SharePoint Newsfeeds Nicolas Blank In enabling Office 365 services; you will find there is a difference between SharePoint and Yammer newsfeeds. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Enterprise Social Collaboration section to specify using Yammer as a newsfeed service. 73591
Exchange 70-342: Assigning Policies to User EAC Steps Michael Murphy After grouping retention tags within a retention policy in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you should apply the retention policies to mailbox users and effect message retention settings. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to use the Exchange admin center (EAC) and Exchange Management Shell (EMS) to assign policies to mailboxes; and how to configure the Managed Folder Assistant. 71382
Exchange 70-342: AD RMS Accounts Michael Murphy When using Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you are able to use Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS). This feature allows you to protect content in your organization and prevent it from being extended to external parties. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of AD RMS. 71366
Exchange 70-342: Assign a Dial Plan Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; a user enabled for Unified Messaging (UM) can be assigned an extension number and linked to a dial plan via the UM mailbox policy. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how a user can be assigned a dial plan in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and Exchange Administrative Center (EAC). 71469
Exchange 70-342: BitLocker Considerations Michael Murphy BitLocker provides encryption of data in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the concerns when using BitLocker to secure Exchange data. 71361
Exchange 70-342: Call Answering Rules Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can create and configure Unified Messaging (UM) call answering rules with specified conditions and corresponding actions. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how call answering rules can be created by the user in Outlook or by the administrator in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and Exchange Administrative Center (EAC). 71467
Exchange 70-342: CAS Proxies Requests I Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports CAS 2013. This has a great impact if you are migrating from an earlier version of Exchange and have existing namespaces and published URLs. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates CAS 2013 and how it functions in relation to Exchange 2007 and 2010. 71405
Exchange 70-342: CAS Proxies Requests II Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can use Exchange 2013 CAS to migrate from legacy systems. Configuring your system to work with CAS 2013 involves a range of different settings. In this video; Michael Murphy continues his discussion on CAS 2013. 71406
Exchange 70-342: Certificate and Firewall Requirements Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you need to use certificates and firewalls for secure cross-forest communication. The type of certificate you use depends on whether the trust is Windows-based or Exchange Federation based. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the considerations for certificates and firewalls to secure cross-forest communication. 71413
Exchange 70-342: Certificate and Firewall Requirements Michael Murphy When using Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Microsoft recommends the use of self-signed certificates for external communication. You can choose to purchase a third-party certificate; but you need to take various considerations into account when doing so; including various firewall considerations when using federated sharing. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates certificate and firewall requirements. 71400
Exchange 70-342: Changes in Exchange 2013 Affecting Availability Michael Murphy There are several enhancements in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 that provide a greater level of high availability and site resilience over previous versions. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the enhanced feature for system recovery; lagged copies; and maintaining service availability. 71318
Exchange 70-342: Changes in Exchange 2013 Affecting Availability - Enhancement High Availability Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports changes to its architecture that improve its availability and site resilience. The improved best copy and server select (BCSS) algorithm and new Set-ServerComponentState cmdlet are examples of these enhancements. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of the changes to the Exchange 2013 platform that result in increased availability. 71319
Exchange 70-342: Changes in Exchange 2013 Affecting Availability - Enhancement Storage I Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 contains architectural improvements that impact the availability; robustness; and resilience of the platform. One improvement is enhancement to the storage; including reduced I/O operations per second (IOPS) and multiple databases per volume. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses storage enhancements. 71317
Exchange 70-342: Coexistence Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports Exchange 2013 CAS; however legacy systems such as Exchange 2007 still host clients and need to be supported. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the coexistence of legacy systems with Exchange 2013 CAS. 71407
Exchange 70-342: Coexistence Strategies Michael Murphy The migration from Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or 2010 to 2013 requires a coexistence strategy that includes plans for the installation of client access servers (CAS) and mailbox servers. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the best practices in deploying certificates as part of the coexistence strategy for a server migration. 71476
Exchange 70-342: Common Certificate Validation Errors Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 requires the use of certificates for authentication. When you use a certificate; there are various concerns relating to its validity and authenticity; for example certificates could expire or a signature could be revoked. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on common certificate validation errors. 71439
Exchange 70-342: Configure a UM Call Router Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; the Unified Messaging (UM) Call Router Service enables a CAS server to process incoming calls. Configuring the Call Router service includes steps such as switching to startup mode; assigning listening ports; and configuring dial plan settings. In this video; Michael Murphy explains how to configure the Call Router service. 71461
Exchange 70-342: Configure an IP Gateway Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 accepts incoming SIP requests only from a Unified Messaging (UM) IP gateway that it's associated with. You can create this gateway using either the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) or Exchange Administrative Center (EAC). In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on configuring a UM IP gateway. 71464
Exchange 70-342: Configure MailTips Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports MailTips; which allow you to view informative messages when composing messages in Outlook. MailTips are available when a recipient or attachment is added. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create MailTips using the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71394
Exchange 70-342: Configure UM Service Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; the Unified Messaging (UM) service runs on Mailbox servers. You can configure this service using both the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) and Exchange Management Shell (EMS). Configurable options include the startup mode; SIP Access Service; and dial plan settings. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the configuration of UM. 71462
Exchange 70-342: Configuring a Shared Namespace Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports instances where organizations merge and users are migrated into an existing Active Directory. Partner connectors are used to support this process. In these instances; existing options are simply edited to support post migration. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to configure shared namespaces. 71410
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Custom Policies Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to configure custom data loss prevention (DLP) policies and define rules that help to protect sensitive data specific to your organization. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create a new custom DLP policy and define rules using the Exchange admin center (EAC); before describing the rule authoring process and basic rule structure. 71384
Exchange 70-342: Configuring DAG Networks - DAG Network Encryption and Compression Michael Murphy Encryption and compression in database availability group (DAG) networks helps to maintain the integrity and optimization of data as part of the replication process in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy describes how to configure DAG network encryption and compression properties using the Set-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup cmdlet in the Exchange Management Shell. 71325
Exchange 70-342: Configuring DAG Networks - Example Configurations Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there are two types of Database availability group (DAG) configurations - single-subnet and multi-subnet. In this video; Michael Murphy describes the MAPI and replication traffic associated with network adapter and enumerated DAG network settings in both single and multi-subnet DAG configurations. 71323
Exchange 70-342: Configuring DAG Networks - iSCSI Networks Michael Murphy There are several best practice recommendations for Internet SCSI (iSCSI) storage with database availability group (DAG) configuration in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses these best practices and demonstrates how to disable iSCSI networks from being detected and used as DAG networks. 71324
Exchange 70-342: Configuring DAG Networks I Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can configure database availability group (DAG) networks that form a collection of subnets for either replication traffic or MAPI traffic. In this video; Michael Murphy describes how a DAG network is configured for a DAG network using separate subnets and network interface cards (NIC) for MAPI and replication traffic. 71321
Exchange 70-342: Configuring DAG Networks II Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; database availability group (DAG) networks can be configured automatically; or manually using the Exchange Management Shell. In this video; Michael Murphy describes the configuration of the underlying network adapters that enable a successful DAG network auto-configuration; and the cmdlets used to create and configure new DAG networks manually. 71322
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Mailbox Access Logging Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to audit mailbox access. It is important to review the audit logs associated with the audits so that you are warned of potential problems beforehand. You can search the mailbox audit log using the Search-MailboxAuditLog cmdlet. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to perform mailbox access logging. 71374
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Mailbox Audit Logging Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to configure non-owner access auditing on mailboxes so that you can track access of mailboxes in an organization. Enabling mailbox auditing can be performed in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on how to enable mailbox audit logging. 71372
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Mailbox Policies Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Unified Messaging (UM) mailbox policies provide a wide range of settings that can be applied against a user's mailbox. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how mailbox policies can be configured to enable or disable specified UM features for different end users in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and Exchange Administrative Center (EAC). 71471
Exchange 70-342: Configuring MX Records for Failover Scenarios I Michael Murphy The transport pipeline; which is any service that provides the secure flow of e-mails between servers and clients; is very different for Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 than in earlier releases. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how the services that make up the transport pipeline provide secure communication for Exchange Server 2013. 71350
Exchange 70-342: Configuring MX Records for Failover Scenarios II Michael Murphy A single mail exchange (MX) record or multiple MX records may be specified for a single domain when directing inbound e-mail in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to configure MX records to regulate the flow of incoming e-mail with Exchange Server 2013. 71351
Exchange 70-342: Configuring MX Records for Failover Scenarios III Michael Murphy You can configure Mail Exchange (MX) records to deal with different disaster recovery scenarios for Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to configure MX records for different failover scenarios. 71352
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Protected Voice Mail Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can apply Information Rights Management (IRM) protection with Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) templates to prevent unauthorized access of Unified Messaging (UM) voicemails. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to use AD RMS templates to protect voicemail messages in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and the Exchange Administration Center (EAC). 71472
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Site-Resilient Namespace URLs I Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can configure site-resilient namespace URLs when designing an infrastructure solution. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to configure Exchange web service URLs and how to implement split-brain DNS solutions. 71342
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Site-Resilient Namespace URLs II Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can design a resilient site in which the same namespace URL is used in more than one datacenter. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to configure site-resilient namespace URLs for connections between Exchange and Outlook. 71343
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Site-Resilient Namespace URLs III Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can configure your site design to use the same resilient namespace URL in more than one datacenter. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to configure site-resilient namespace URLs via cmdlets to use ActiveSync and modify virtual directory services. 71344
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Site-Resilient Namespace URLs IV Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can configure a site from the command prompt to use a resilient namespace URL in more than one of its datacenters. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to use cmdlets to configure a site-resilient URL for the Autodiscover service. 71345
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Site-Resilient Namespace URLs V Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can design a site in which a resilient namespace URL is used across multiple sites. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to configure a site-resilient namespace for a layer 4 load-balancing solution. 71346
Exchange 70-342: Configuring Transport Decryption and IRM Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports transport decryption; which enables Exchange servers to inspect packets while in transit. The Set-IRMConfiguration cmdlet in EMS can be used to configure this setting. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to perform depacket decryption as part of Information Rights Management (IRM). 71371
Exchange 70-342: Create a Dial Plan Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports the Unified Messaging (UM) service. If a user is UM-enabled; they are added to a dial plan. There are three types of plans and three possible levels of security. You can configure a dial plan using the Exchange Administrative Server (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). In this video; Michael Murphy discusses creating dial plans. 71463
Exchange 70-342: Create and Configure an Auto Attendant Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; the Unified Messaging (UM) auto attendant feature can answer incoming calls and transfer callers to the appropriate user or department. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how auto attendants can be created in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and Exchange Administration Center (EAC). 71466
Exchange 70-342: Create Send and Receive Connectors Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to perform cross-forest collaboration. This is useful in situations where two organizations merge and require a secure communication pipeline between them. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create Send and Receive connectors to do this. 71409
Exchange 70-342: Create; Configure; and Deploy Message Classifications Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 contains a built-in feature that allows you to apply message classifications to e-mail messages so that users are provided with certain information about the message. To define classifications; you can use the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to work with these classifications. 71393
Exchange 70-342: Creating an AD RMS Template I Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can use Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) to prevent content from being shared without authorization. AD RMS templates allow you to create certificates that encrypt and authenticate mail. The templates can be created using Windows Server GUI or Windows PowerShell. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to create these templates. 71367
Exchange 70-342: Creating an AD RMS Template II Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can create Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) templates and then distribute them to users; internally or externally. You can also specify the location of the templates to AD RMS; and archive older templates. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on distributing AD RMS templates. 71368
Exchange 70-342: Creating an AD RMS Template with PowerShell Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you are able to use Windows PowerShell to create Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) templates. PowerShell has to be prepared for AD RMS before the specified cmdlets can be run. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to create AD RMS templates using PowerShell. 71369
Exchange 70-342: Creating and Configuring Custom Tags Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to create customized retention tags that define how long messages remain in mailboxes and the actions that are applied when items reach their age limit. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create retention policy tags and modify their configurable parameters using the Exchange admin center (EAC) and the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71381
Exchange 70-342: Creating Archive Policies Michael Murphy Messaging records management (MRM) in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 uses retention tags and retention policies to specify how mailbox data is managed in an archiving solution. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how retention tags and policies are created using the Exchange Management Shell; Exchange management center; or Outlook Web App and how to plan for an archiving solution. 71378
Exchange 70-342: Creating Journal Rules EAC Michael Murphy With a journaling mailbox in place; Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 provides features that allow you to easily create and manage rules specific to an organization's journaling needs. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create; modify; enable or disable; and remove a journal rule using the Exchange Admin Console (EAS) and the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71388
Exchange 70-342: Creating New Sharing Policy Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports sharing policies so you are able to share calendar information externally. Policies can be created on a per-mailbox basis or applied to a subset of mailboxes. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create sharing policies in bulk using the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71403
Exchange 70-342: Creating Sharing Policies with EMS Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to create sharing policies using the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) to share calendar information with external users. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create these policies using the command shell and the New-SharingPolicy cmdlet. 71402
Exchange 70-342: Creating Transport Protection Rules Michael Murphy With Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can use transport rules to automatically apply Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS) templates to e-mail messages in transit. Transport rules can be created using the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to create transport protection rules. 71370
Exchange 70-342: Cross Forest Move Using the EMS Michael Murphy The Exchange Management Shell (EMS) in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to migrate mailboxes between the different Exchange forests in a cross-forest topology. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to use cmdlets in the EMS to create mail-enabled users in the target forest and move mailboxes from one forest to another. 71416
Exchange 70-342: Cross-Forest Availability Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can share availability and calendar information across two Exchange forests. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to share free/busy information between users of different forests in both trust and no trust scenarios. 71412
Exchange 70-342: Cross-Forest Coexistence Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports cross-forest coexistence; which is useful if two Exchange organizations merge and their technology needs to be managed together or separately. There are various considerations when working with a merge scenario; such as using a single namespace or separate namespaces; and rewriting addresses. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to manage this coexistence. 71408
Exchange 70-342: Cross-Forest Send Connector Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; connectors are software interfaces for processing mail between organizations in a trust relationship. When configuring a cross-forest Send connector; you need to decide on the type of connector; authentication method; and address space you are routing to. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to configure cross-forest Send connectors in the Exchange admin center (EAC). 71411
Exchange 70-342: Database Availability Groups (DAG) - Operational Overview I Michael Murphy The database availability group (DAG) is used to address database-level redundancy and is central to any high availability; site resilient solution in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the benefits and features of DAGs and how they are used to provide continuous replication between Mailbox servers; and optimization features in Exchange 2013. 71315
Exchange 70-342: Database Availability Groups (DAG) - Operational Overview II Michael Murphy You can create and manage database availability groups (DAG) in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the process of creating a DAG and a mailbox database copy using either the Exchange Administration Center or the Exchange Management Shell; and how to manage a DAG using Active Manager roles. 71316
Exchange 70-342: Delivery Reports Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; delivery reports allow you to track whether mail was delivered to the intended destination. Users can generate their own delivery reports in Outlook Web App (OWA); and administrators can search more broadly using the Exchange admin center. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to generate delivery reports in the Exchange admin center. 71425
Exchange 70-342: Deploying Hybrid Configuration Michael Murphy When deploying a Hybrid Configuration in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there are several steps to follow. These include preparing the organization; examining the Exchange servers; and running the Hybrid Configuration wizard. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the process involved in deploying a Hybrid Configuration. 71396
Exchange 70-342: Deployment Issues Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; the Hybrid Configuration Wizard (HCW) is used to perform hybrid deployments. There are areas that are outside the scope of the HCW - these include certificates and errors specific to the HCW. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses deployment issues when integrating an Exchange on-premise solution with an online solution. 71444
Exchange 70-342: Design and Configure Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS) Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS); which allow you to communicate with a third party over a relying party trust. AD FS supports the single sign-on process; which is helpful if you're deploying an online-hosted service. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to design and configure AD FS. 71398
Exchange 70-342: Design UM for High Availability Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Unified Messaging (UM) can be designed for high availability (HA) by using load balancing solutions. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates load balancing options that allow UM to distribute the load across Client Access servers (CASs) for high availability. 71468
Exchange 70-342: Designing and Configuring Journaling Michael Murphy Journaling is a Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 feature that helps organizations meet regulatory requirements or internal policy mandates by maintaining targeted communication records in designated mailboxes. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the Journaling agent; the journaling options provided by Exchange 2013; and the key aspects of journal rules; journal rule replication; and journal reports. 71387
Exchange 70-342: DLP Template Overview Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to protect sensitive data by creating data loss prevention (DLP) policies from pre-existing DLP policy templates. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how DLP policies examine messages; how DLP templates define policy rules; and how to configure prebuilt rules inside DLP policies from the Exchange admin center (EAC) and the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71383
Exchange 70-342: EAC Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to define and manage retention policies and their associated retention tags using either the Exchange Admin Center (EAC) web interface management console; or Exchange Management Shell (EMS) command-line interface. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create; configure; and remove retention tags and policies using the EAC interface; as well as EMS cmdlets. 71380
Exchange 70-342: Ethical Walls Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to restrict communication between employees in an organization. To do this; you can leverage the power of transport rules in Exchange by creating ethical firewalls. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create firewalls using the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71391
Exchange 70-342: Exchange 2013 UM Features Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports the same Unified Messaging (UM) feature set as previous versions but also provides various function and administrative improvements. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of the UM features in Exchange 2013. 71450
Exchange 70-342: Exchange 2013 UM Improvements Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 offers an improved Unified Messaging (UM) service. Examples of improvements include voicemail preview and multi-language support for voicemail. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of various UM improvements. 71451
Exchange 70-342: Exchange Hosted Encryption (EHE) and TLS Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports both Exchange Hosted Encryption (EHE) and Transport Layer Security (TLS). EHS is used to establish wire encryption between clients and cloud-hosted services and TLS is used to establish wire encryption between Exchange and other SMTP servers. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the use of EHS and TLS in Exchange. 71365
Exchange 70-342: Exchange Migration Michael Murphy Every major upgrade since Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 has involved deployment to new servers and the migration of data; such as mailboxes; from legacy systems to the new servers. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the steps to be followed when migrating from Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 to 2013. 71474
Exchange 70-342: Get-ManagementRoleAssignment Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can assign administrative rights to users; granting them control over a subset of objects. You can user role-based access control (RBAC) to regulate this control. To troubleshoot RBAC; you can use the Get-ManagementRoleAssignment. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on using the Get-ManagementRoleAssignment cmdlet to troubleshoot RBAC. 71443
Exchange 70-342: High Availability Cmdlets Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 cmdlets enable administrators to configure and manage a high availability solution from within the Exchange Management Shell. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the database availability group (DAG); DAG network; mailbox database copy; and health and status cmdlets. 71320
Exchange 70-342: Hunt Groups Michael Murphy Hunt groups can be created in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 to route incoming calls from a single telephone number to multiple extensions so that callers can still connect if the primary contact is unavailable. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how hunt groups can be defined and created in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and Exchange Administrative Center (EAC). 71465
Exchange 70-342: Hybrid Configuration Wizard Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports the Hybrid Configuration wizard (HCW) which helps you configure hybrid deployments. The HCW allows all hybrid deployment features by default; such as domains; secure mail certificates; and mail flow. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the uses of the HCW. 71397
Exchange 70-342: Hybrid Deployments Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to deploy mailboxes to the cloud to make Online Hosted Exchange accessible to users anywhere through the use of an on-premises solution. To harness this hybrid solution; several pre-requisites have to be met. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create this hybrid deployment. 71395
Exchange 70-342: Information Rights Management Michael Murphy Information Rights Management (IRM) helps to ensure the confidentiality of e-mail messages in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of IRM's capabilities and restrictions; as well as its deployment features. 71363
Exchange 70-342: Integrating In-Place Federated Searches with SharePoint Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows authorized SharePoint personnel to perform In-Place Federated searches on Exchange mailbox content from within the eDiscovery architecture. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to configure Exchange for SharePoint eDiscovery Center; and configure eDiscovery in SharePoint to allow In-Place Federated searches. 71390
Exchange 70-342: Mailbox Archiving Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 In-Place Archiving allows you to store messages in an archive mailbox and eliminate the need for personal store (.pst) files. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how mailbox archiving addresses the drawbacks associated with .pst files; and how to enable an In-Place Archive using the Exchange Admin Center (EAC) or the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71376
Exchange 70-342: Manage Resubmission and Reroute Queues II Michael Murphy With Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can resubmit messages to the message categorizer for processing or you can manually resubmit them by using Queue Viewer or the command shell. In this video; Michael Murphy considers resubmission options in Exchange Server 2013 for messages in the delivery; unreachable; and poison queues. 71355
Exchange 70-342: Manage Sharing Policies Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you are able to define sharing policies that let you share calendar information with external users. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create sharing policies using the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71401
Exchange 70-342: Management Role Assignment Policies Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; individuals are granted rights though management role assignment policies; using specific role-based access control cmdlets. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of management role policies and demonstrates how to manage role groups and permissions. 71360
Exchange 70-342: Management Role Groups Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Role-Based Access Control involves associating rights and permission sets with the correct role group. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of the management role groups. 71359
Exchange 70-342: Managing Organization Relationships Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to create or modify organization sharing relationships. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to manage these organization relationships in the on-premises organization. 71404
Exchange 70-342: Managing Resubmission and Reroute Queues I Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; queues are used to hold messages before; during; and after delivery. In this video; Michael Murphy explains how the resubmission and rerouting of messages is managed with queues in Exchange Server 2013. 71354
Exchange 70-342: Managing UM Language Packs Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Unified Messaging (UM) language packs allow callers to select the language of the auto attendant that they speak to. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to manage language packs in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and the Exchange Administration Center (EAC). 71473
Exchange 70-342: Message Tracking Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can enable message tracking to provide a record or log file of all messages sent and received. Message tracking can be configured on the mailbox or Edge Transport server using the Set-TransportService and Set-MailboxServer cmdlets. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the importance of message tracking and how to configure it in Exchange. 71424
Exchange 70-342: Messaging Records Management (MRM) Michael Murphy When upgrading to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; the messaging records management (MRM) technology employed by legacy servers implementing a managed mailbox policy need to be migrated to use a retention policy. In this video; Michael Murphy compares retention tags to managed folders; and demonstrates how to migrate mailbox users from managed folders using the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71420
Exchange 70-342: Microsoft Federation Gateways Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports the Microsoft Federation Gateway service; which allows secure communication between an organization and any external service it wishes to use. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how a federated trust can be created using the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71399
Exchange 70-342: Migrating a UM Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; migrating from a legacy messaging system to Unified Messaging (UM) in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 involves several steps. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the steps involved when migrating to UM from Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 to 2013. 71477
Exchange 70-342: Migrating Mailboxes Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 provides enhanced management features that allow you to easily move mailboxes from a legacy source mailbox database to target mailboxes on an updated Exchange server. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates batch moves; migration endpoints; the different types of moves; and how to move mailboxes using the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and Exchange Admin Center (EAS). 71415
Exchange 70-342: Migrating Public Folders I Michael Murphy When upgrading to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you have the option of migrating the public folders that provide data sharing and collaboration on the legacy server onto Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the limits of public folders; how to download migration scripts; and prepare for the migration of public folders. 71418
Exchange 70-342: Migrating Public Folders II Michael Murphy After acquiring migration scripts and preparing the servers; migrating legacy public folders to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 is a multi-stage process that requires a careful and methodical approach. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to generate CSV files; create public folder mailboxes; and migrate public folders using the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71419
Exchange 70-342: Monitoring Calls and Call Statistics Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 provides built-in functionality that enables you to obtain reports on services; including Unified Messaging (UM). The UM Call Statistics report provides information such as number of calls and quality of service. The reports help you identify deterioration in service; so you can resolve issues quickly. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses call monitoring and call statistics. 71437
Exchange 70-342: Move Users Between Dial Plans Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Unified Messaging (UM) users can be assigned to a new dial plan after having previously being assigned a different dial plan. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how a UM user can be moved between dial plans in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and Exchange Administrative Center (EAC). 71470
Exchange 70-342: Moving the Exchange System Mailbox Using the EAC Michael Murphy When upgrading to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; moving the Microsoft Exchange system (arbitration) mailbox allows you to continue accessing organization-wide data and perform tasks such as eDiscovery searches. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to move the Microsoft Exchange system mailbox from Exchange 2012 to Exchange 2013 using the Exchange Admin Center (EAC) and the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71417
Exchange 70-342: Moving UM Mailboxes Between Sites Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Unified Messaging (UM) mailboxes may be moved between or within organizations. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to execute a local batch in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) and the Exchange Administration Center (EAC) to move mailboxes. 71478
Exchange 70-342: Moving UM Mailboxes Cross Forest Example Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you need the remote credentials when you move Unified Messaging (UM) mailboxes between forests. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how a cross-forest move can be executed in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71479
Exchange 70-342: Online Archiving Microsoft Exchange Online Archiving (EOA) provides an archiving solution that helps simplify Exchange Server 2013 on-premises infrastructures by allowing users to store their historical e-mail content in cloud-based mailboxes. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to enable Exchange 2013 features by configuring OAuth authentication; before enabling EOA for an Exchange 2013 hybrid deployment. 71377
Exchange 70-342: Overview High Availability and Site Resilience Michael Murphy A highly available and site-resilient solution is required to protect your Exchange Server 2013 mailbox database and the data that resides in them. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the interdependent services and how to address areas of critical failure in achieving an available and resilient site in Exchange. 71314
Exchange 70-342: Performing a Query-Based InPlace Hold Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to preserve mailbox items based on a determined set of query parameters using the In-Place Hold eDiscovery feature. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to place a user's mailbox on Hold using either the In-Place eDiscovery and Hold wizard or the Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71386
Exchange 70-342: Performing Steps for Site Rollover Michael Murphy In certain disaster recovery scenarios for Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; it may be necessary to perform datacenter switchovers. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the actions that the administrator can take to restore client connectivity to the secondary site if the primary datacenter fails or goes offline. 71348
Exchange 70-342: Performing Steps for Transport Rollover Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; every message that comes into the transport pipeline is copied and sent to a Safety Net on another server. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates what happens in two transport failover scenarios. 71356
Exchange 70-342: Pipeline Tracing Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to configure pipeline tracing; which is useful if a user is consistently having trouble delivering a message. Pipeline tracing captures the message; as well as the path it traverses through the transport pipeline. In this video; Michael Murphy explains how pipeline tracing enables you to trace why a message fails to deliver. 71427
Exchange 70-342: Planning and Configuring Send/Receive Connectors for Site Resilience Michael Murphy Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) connectors are software interfaces that direct the routing of e-mails in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how send; receive; partner; and foreign SMTP connectors are configured to process outgoing and incoming emails for site resilience in Exchange Server 2013. 71353
Exchange 70-342: Planning and Delegating RBAC Roles for eDiscovery Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 Role Based Access Control (RBAC) allows you to provide the Discovery Management role to non-technical users; so they can perform In-Place eDiscovery searches. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the Discovery Management role group and management roles; and how to create a custom management scope for eDiscovery. 71385
Exchange 70-342: Planning and Implementing Datacenter Activation Coordination (DAC) I Michael Murphy Datacenter Activation Coordination (DAC) mode is a property of a database availability group (DAG). It is used to prevent split brain syndrome in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy describes how split brain can happen after a catastrophic failure and how the Datacenter Activation Coordination Protocol (DACP) works to prevent it from occurring. 71330
Exchange 70-342: Planning and Implementing Datacenter Activation Coordination (DAC) II Michael Murphy With Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you are able to implement Datacenter Activation Coordination (DAC) protocol. There are various limitations and advantages to doing so. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the limitations in DAG; how to perform datacenters switchovers and manual switchovers; and how to enable DAC mode. 71331
Exchange 70-342: Planning Certificate Requirements for Site Failovers Michael Murphy Microsoft applications and services that integrate with Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 have different certificate requirements for datacenter switchovers. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the certificate requirements that enable Microsoft applications and services to connect to Exchange Server 2013 after a switchover. 71349
Exchange 70-342: Planning Cross-Site DAG Configuration - Secondary Datacenters Michael Murphy You can extend a database availability group (DAG) across multiple datacenters when planning resilient cross-site configurations in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the key considerations when planning a cross-site DAG configuration and extending single and multiple DAGs across two datacenters. 71327
Exchange 70-342: Planning Cross-Site DAG Configuration - Single DAG; Three AD Sites Michael Murphy In the optimized site resilient solution; a single database availability group (DAG) is configured with three Active Directory (AD) sites in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; discusses the effectiveness of a single DAG; three AD site configuration; its drawbacks; and how it compares to a multiple DAG; two AD site configuration. 71328
Exchange 70-342: Planning Cross-Site DAG Configuration - SLA Michael Murphy Service level agreements (SLAs) define the resilience and availability expectations of an organization when planning cross-site DAG configurations in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy describes a site resilient solution and the key aspects of an effective SLA that includes a recovery time objective (RTO) and recovery point objective (RPO). 71326
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Cross-Forest Namespaces Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there are best practices for managing cross-forest namespaces. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to manage cross-forest namespaces in Exchange 2013. 71335
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Internal and External Namespaces Michael Murphy There are best practices for managing internal and external namespaces in Microsoft Exchange 2013 to eliminate a disjoin between the Active Directory name and the Internet presence of the namespace. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to manage internal and external namespaces; within Exchange 2013. 71336
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Load Balancing I Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; load balancing is more flexible due to changes in the Client Access Server (CAS) architecture. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the application of Client Access Server (CAS) namespace load balancing in Exchange 2013. 71338
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Load Balancing II Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; DNS round robin is the key method for load balancing Client Access Server (CAS). In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the DNS round robin method of load balancing in Exchange 2013. 71339
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Load Balancing Scenarios I Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there are several load balancing scenarios that can be implemented; depending on your requirements. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the implementation of single and multiple namespace load balancing within different functional scenarios. 71340
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Load Balancing Scenarios II Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; load balancing can be implemented at Layer 4 or 7 of the OSI model. In this video; Michael Murphy compares single and multiple namespace load balancing at different layers of the OSI model. 71341
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Namespace Design Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there are several best practices for designing and developing site-resilient namespaces. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to design site-resilient namespaces in Exchange 2013. 71332
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Namespace Models Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; several best practices should be followed for designing and developing site resilient namespaces. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to use and manage unbound namespaces; in an Exchange environment. 71333
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Namespace Models Bound Model Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; several best practices should be followed for designing and developing site resilient namespaces. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to use and manage bound; and combined bound and unbound namespaces; in an Exchange environment. 71334
Exchange 70-342: Planning Site-Resilient Namespaces - Other Namespaces Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there are several best practices for managing required namespaces; such as Autodiscover and legacy namespaces. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to manage the required namespaces of Exchange 2013. 71337
Exchange 70-342: Predicting Client Behavior during a Rollover Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 leverages the inherent namespace tolerance by using multiple Internet Protocol (IP) addresses; datacenters; and Active Directory (AD) sites with load balancers for automatic failover. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how automatic adjustments on the client side will compensate for the loss of a single hardware load balancer without the need for administrative intervention. 71347
Exchange 70-342: Private Key Availability Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to archive the private key of a certificate so that if the key or certificate is ever lost; the private key can be retrieved. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of private key archival. 71441
Exchange 70-342: Problems with SSO/AD FS Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to create objects in Active Directory and then clone those objects in the cloud using directory synchronization. When configuring Active Directory Federated Services (AD FS); there are various issues that can arise. These issues can lead to authentication issues surrounding single sign-on (SSO). In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of these problems. 71446
Exchange 70-342: Proxy Redirection Issues In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; the Internet-facing 2013 Client Access Server (CAS) is able to proxy all incoming client requests. The process differs according to whether the user's mailbox is on Exchange 2007 or Exchange 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of proxy redirection issues. 71431
Exchange 70-342: Queue Viewer Michael Murphy The Queue Viewer in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to view the contents and status of mail delivery queues. You can also perform various actions on the queue; such as deleting messages or suspending the queue. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the information provided by the Queue Viewer and the various tasks you can perform on queues. 71423
Exchange 70-342: Quorum Options - Quorum Concept Michael Murphy Quorum is employed by Windows failover clusters to allow the majority of a DAG's nodes to be online and functional in Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy defines quorum and how it ensures consistency and acts as a tie-breaker; before discussing DAG quorum models and the dynamic quorum feature in Windows Server 2012. 71329
Exchange 70-342: RBAC Michael Murphy Role-based access control (RBAC) is an approach to assigning end-user and administrative permissions in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. In this video; Michael Murphy describes how the RBAC method has been refined and perfected. 71358
Exchange 70-342: RCA Overview Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports the Remote Connectivity Analyzer (RCA); which enables you to identify remote connectivity issues for clients and provides you with guidance and pointers on how to correct those issues. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how RCA can be used effectively. 71428
Exchange 70-342: Restore-DatabaseAvailabilityGroup Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to perform easy manual switchovers between datacenters; using Datacenter Activation Coordination (DAC) mode. In DAC mode; the Stop-; Start; and Restore-Database AvailabilityGroup cmdlets can be used to perform this switchover. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on how to use these cmdlets. 71433
Exchange 70-342: Retention Tags Michael Murphy Organizing mail with message retention management (MRM) in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 depends on the retention tags used to apply specific actions to mailbox items through a retention policy. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how MRM is achieved using retention tags; and the process; and different types of retention tags that can be applied to a retention policy. 71379
Exchange 70-342: S/MIME Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports the use of Secure Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME). This standard for public encryption is used to provide digital signing of messages and end-to-end encryption of mail content. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses S/MIME; as well as its advantages and drawbacks. 71364
Exchange 70-342: Securing Exchange 2013 Messaging Solution Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 comes with enhanced security capabilities to safeguard against threats like malware; phishing and hackers. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses some of the security features that secure the messaging infrastructure of Exchange Server 2013. 71357
Exchange 70-342: Set-MailboxDatabase Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to enable or disable per-mailbox database journaling which captures all the messages sent to and from addresses on a mailbox database. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to use the Set-MailboxDatabase cmdlet in the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) to enable per-mailbox database journaling. 71389
Exchange 70-342: Single and Multi-Phase Upgrades When upgrading to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 from a legacy Exchange version; you can implement a migration strategy in single or multiple phases depending on organizational needs. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the advantages of a single-phase and a multi-phase coexistent migration; and the process of transitioning from Exchange 2003 to Exchange 2013 and Exchange Online. 71414
Exchange 70-342: Smartcard Overview Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; smart cards; serve as a means of certificate-based authentication. In this video Michael Murphy provides an overview of these tamper-resistant authentication cards. 71362
Exchange 70-342: Startup Mode Michael Murphy When using Unified Messaging (UM) in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can choose to encrypt voicemail messages. To ensure encryption; you need to change the startup mode from TCP to either Dual or TLS. Microsoft recommends setting it to Dual. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on how to change the startup mode. 71435
Exchange 70-342: Steps to Remove 2010 Michael Murphy When upgrading to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; after the desired period of coexistence mode and with the necessary checks in place; removing a legacy Exchange server can be accomplished relatively easily in a few decommissioning steps. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the steps remove Exchange 2010 and Exchange 2007. 71421
Exchange 70-342: Test Connectivity Cmdlets Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to use the Exchange Management Shell (EMS) to perform testing. For instance; you can test the health of bad replication or client-side connectivity. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of some of the connectivity cmdlets and parameters used to perform testing. 71430
Exchange 70-342: Testing IRMConfiguration Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 can be integrated with Active Directory Rights Management Services (AD RMS). You can test AD RMS integration with Exchange using the Test-IRMConfiguration cmdlet to verify IRM functionality. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of the Test-IRMConfiguration cmdlet. 71442
Exchange 70-342: Testing SMTP with Telnet Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; Telnet allows you to test the SMTP connection between messaging servers. It's not installed on Windows servers by default and needs to be added manually. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the process of using Telnet to test SMTP and the various troubleshooting scenarios that should be considered. 71426
Exchange 70-342: Testing UMConnectivity and ExchangeUMCallFlow Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports Unified Messaging (UM); which enables various types of messaging over a single interface. To test the UM service; you can use the Test-UMConnectivity cmdlet. The Test- ExchangeUMCallFlow cmdlet enables you to test the whole pipeline. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on how to test UM connectivity. 71436
Exchange 70-342: The Set-AdminAuditLogConfig Command Michael Murphy Administrator audit logging is enabled by default in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013. This logging records the actions performed by administrators and users who have administrative privileges. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of the Set-AdminAuditLogConfig command and its parameters. 71375
Exchange 70-342: The Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation Command Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to perform mailbox auditing. Often third-party applications are downloaded and integrated into e-mail applications. These applications often generate too many unnecessary audit log entries. To avoid this; you can create a BypassAssociation. In this video; Michael Murphy explains the purpose of the Set-MailboxAuditBypassAssociation command. 71373
Exchange 70-342: Transport Rules Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you are able to create transport rules that let you specify conditions under which mail is transmitted. A transport rule has three components - conditions; exceptions; and actions. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to create these rules in Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). 71392
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshoot Cross-Forest Availability Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to share free/busy calendar information between separate organizations. This form of sharing can occur when no trust relationship exists between the organizations and when a trust does exist. However; the level of information shared will differ for each one. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on troubleshooting cross-forest availability. 71448
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshoot DAG Issues Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can test the health of the Database Availability Group (DAG) using the Test-ReplicationHealth cmdlet. The cmdlet can be used to perform various tests; including testing the cluster service and QuorumGroup. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses troubleshooting DAG. 71432
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshoot Quality for a Specific User Michael Murphy With Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can troubleshoot problems in Unified Messaging (UM) on a per-user basis or organizational basis. To troubleshoot problems on a per-user basis; you can use the user's call log. Or you can use the Call Statistics report if the problem is across an organization. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses troubleshooting quality in UM. 71438
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshoot with Get-ExchangeCertificate Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to troubleshoot issues relating to certificates. For example; you can validate if a certificate is published correctly or ensure that a certificate is configured with the location of a certificate revocation list (CRL). In this video; Michael Murphy reviews how to troubleshoot certificates. 71440
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshooting and Configuring Mutual Transport Layer Security (MTLS) Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports Unified Messaging (UM). UM ports differ depending on whether the Client Access Server (CAS) or the Mailbox server is used. If port conflicts occur; ports can be reassigned using the Exchange Administrative Center (EAC) or Exchange Management Shell (EMS). In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to use Mutual Transport Layer Security (MTLS) with UM. 71434
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshooting DirSync Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; you can use the Active Directory Synchronization tool to synchronize content between an on-premise solution and an online deployment. Sometimes objects may not sync because they fail to update; or changes made to the on-premise solution may not reflect in the cloud. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to troubleshoot DirSync. 71447
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshooting Exchange Federation Trust and Organization Relationships Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 enables you to configure federated sharing; which involves configuring a federation trust; an organization relationship; and a sharing policy. To troubleshoot federation sharing; you can test the federation trust certificate or even test OAuth connectivity. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview on troubleshooting federation trust and organization relationships. 71445
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshooting Mail Flow Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there can be numerous causes of mail flow disruptions; including DNS and site link failures. Troubleshooting should start with determining the scope of the problem. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates how to troubleshoot mail flow in Exchange using the Test-Mailflow cmdlet. 71422
Exchange 70-342: Troubleshooting the Autodiscover Service Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports the Autodiscover service; which enables users to access their Inbox. If this service fails; you can use Outlook's built-in Test E-mail AutoConfiguration tool to validate Autodiscover and identify errors. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses how to troubleshoot the Autodiscover service. 71429
Exchange 70-342: UM Architecture Flow Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 makes provision for unanswered calls to a UM client. The call flow consists of various steps; which result in a message waiting indicator; voicemail; or an e-mail message that contains the voicemail as an attachment. In this video; Michael Murphy describes the UM call architecture flow. 71454
Exchange 70-342: UM Architecture Ports Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; the Unified Messaging (UM) process consists of three steps that involve receiving incoming calls; redirecting traffic to a TCP port; and establishing a media channel between the mailbox server and the source. In this video; Michael Murphy describes the UM process and its port architecture. 71453
Exchange 70-342: UM Deployment Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports Unified Messaging (UM). The UM deployment process consists of a series of steps. These are configuring the telephony components; installing mailbox and cache servers; and then configuring UM. In this video; Michael Murphy discusses the UM deployment process. 71460
Exchange 70-342: UM Overview Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports Unified Messaging (UM); which enables you to communicate via e-mail; fax; or voicemail from a single communication channel. A UM deployment has various components and relies on various protocols to function. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of UM. 71449
Exchange 70-342: UM Voice Architecture Services Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports various processes for Unified Messaging (UM). Services used for UM in Exchange 2013 include the Client Access Server (CAS) and Mailbox servers. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of these voice architecture services. 71452
Exchange 70-342: Upgrade Prereqs Michael Murphy The migration from one version of Microsoft Exchange Server to another has prerequisites that must be fulfilled. In this video; Michael Murphy demonstrates the prerequisites to migrate from Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 and 2010 to 2013. 71475
Exchange 70-342: Voice Architecture I Michael Murphy In Microsoft Exchange Server 2013; there are different Unified Messaging (UM) services. For example; the Call Router service on the CAS server and the UM service components on the Mailbox server. Each service is responsible for different functions and runs on a different port. In this video; Michael Murphy provides an overview of UM voice architecture. 71455
Exchange 70-342: Voice Architecture II Michael Murphy Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 supports Unified Messaging (UM). This service runs on a specific set of ports and protocols. In Exchange 2013; UM has been enhanced to provide greater support and functionality; but like with all services; there are various issues to consider when deploying UM. In this video; Michael Murphy describes UM voice architecture. 71456
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring Enhanced Data Loss Prevention Capabilities After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the new DLP sensitive information types. 94681
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring How to Find Mail and People Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the improved search functionality including the search suggestions and refiners and the ability to find people quickly when creating an e-mail message. 94687
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring Hybrid Improvements After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the improvements made to Hybrid Configuration including the cloud-based Hybrid Configuration Wizard. 94682
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring Performance and Reliability Features After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the performance and reliability improvements; including faster recovery; simple deployments; and automated repair. 94679
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring Single-Line View and Undo Features Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the new single-line inbox view and the undo button features. 94685
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Archiving and Emojis Features Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to recognize where to locate and use the archiving and emojis features. 94686
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Birthday Calendar and Calendar Search Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the new birthday calendar and calendar search features. 94692
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Charms Calendar Feature Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and configure charms in calendar events. 94694
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the E-mail Reminder Calendar Feature Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to recognize and use the new e-mail reminder feature for calendar events. 94691
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Inline Image and Inline Reply Features Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the new inline image and inline reply features; and how to use them. 94690
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the New Action Toolbar and Message Options Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new action toolbar and its options; the available message controls; and subject line and message visibility. 94684
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the New Sweep Feature and Themes Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to identify and use the new sweep feature; and the new available themes. 94689
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Outlook Web Experience After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the improved Outlook web experience including supported browsers; cleaner user interface look and feel; and accessing options using AppLauncher. 94683
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Pins and Flags Features Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to identify the new pin and flag features; and how to use them. 94688
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Propose New Time Calendar Feature Peter Rockwell After watching this video; you will be able to identify and configure the Propose New Time feature in calendar events. 94693
Exchange Server 2016: Exploring the Simplified Architecture After watching this video; you will be able to recognize the improved simplified architecture including server roles. 94678
Exchange Server 2016: Identifying Updated Compliance Features After watching this video; you will be able to identify the improved compliance features including auditing and the in-place eDiscovery and hold features. 94680
Exercise - Windows 10: Adding a Microsoft Account Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to add a Microsoft account. 100708
Exercise - Windows 10: Bitlocker without TPM Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to implement Bitlocker with TPM. 100710
Exercise - Windows 10: Edge Homepage Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to make use of the Edge homepage. 100703
Exercise - Windows 10: Enabling Sideloading Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to enable sideloading. 100711
Exercise - Windows 10: Exclude Process in Windows Defender Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to use the exclude process in Windows Defender. 100709
Exercise - Windows 10: File History Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to use file history. 100707
Exercise - Windows 10: Hyper-V Virtual Switch Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to use the Hyper-V virtual switch. 100706
Exercise - Windows 10: Remote Desktop Connection Settings Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to implement remote desktop connection settings. 100705
Exercise - Windows 10: Start Sync Settings Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to implement sync settings. 100702
Exercise - Windows 10: Storage Spaces Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to implement storage spaces. 100704
Exercise - Windows 10: Updating Settings Jason Yates After watching this video; you will be able to update settings. 100712
First Encounters with Windows 10: Command Prompt Jason Yates Windows 10 has a number of features that have been enhanced; inclusing the Command Prompt. To fully understand these changes you need to review how it behaved in previous versions of Windows. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates the new features and enhancements that have been made to the Command Prompt. 65045
First Encounters with Windows 10: File Explorer Jason Yates Windows 10 has made some enhancements to File Explorer leading to additional convenience for users. In this video; Jason yates demonstrates some of the features that have been made to File Explorer; such as the Home location and its groups. 65046
First Encounters with Windows 10: Modern Apps Jason Yates Using applications in Windows 8 was not as user friendly to desktop users compared to touch screen users. This has been addressed in Windows 10. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates how to use the Modern Apps feature in Windows 10. 65041
First Encounters with Windows 10: Overview of Windows 10 and the Technical Preview Jason Yates Windows 10 is the latest operating system from Microsoft. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates the new Windows 10 Technical Preview and what you can learn from it. 65047
First Encounters with Windows 10: Start Menu for Desktop Users Jason Yates Windows 10 has incorporated the functionality of Windows 7 with the look and feel of Windows 8. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates the desktop start up menu in the new Windows 10 environment. 65040
First Encounters with Windows 10: Start Screen for Tablet Users Jason Yates Windows 10 has functionality that allows you to change the Start Screen for tablet users; and looks a lot like Windows 8. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates how to change the appearance of the Start Screen. 65039
First Encounters with Windows 10: Task View Jason Yates Windows 10 has a Task View which allows you to switch between multiple windows in a more flexible way than in Windows 8. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates how Task View makes it easier to switch between multiple windows. 65042
First Encounters with Windows 10: Virtual Desktops Jason Yates Windows 10 has a number of new features; including Virtual Desktops which give users another option to group and manage multiple windows. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates how to use Virtual Desktops and highlights some of their features. 65043
First Encounters with Windows 10: Windows Snap Jason Yates Windows 10 has a few features that have been enhanced; including Windows Snap which allows you to manage multiple open windows on a desktop. In this video; Jason Yates demonstrates some of the enhancements that have been made to Windows Snap. 65044
Mac OS X Yosemite: Preparing a Host for Remote Management Jamie Campbell After watching this video; you will be able to prepare a Mac OS X Yosemite host for remote management. 81179
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: AD FS Internal Topologies and Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to deploy active directory federation services internally. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates some of the important considerations to take into account at various stages of the federation deployment process. 65557
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: AD FS Proxy Settings for Office 365 Nicolas Blank Having installed your AD FS server for Office 365; there are two ways to configure it. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure your AD FS Server using either the PowerShell module; or the AD FS Management snap-in. 65564
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Adding and Verifying Vanity Domains in Office 365 Nicolas Blank The Microsoft Office 365 Administration GUI can be used to add and verify domains; but it is easier to use PowerShell for bulk operations. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage Office 365 identities and requirements by adding and verifying vanity domains in Office 365. 65491
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Adding Office 365 Domains with Unsupported Extensions Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 doesn't support domain extensions unless they are listed in the IANA Root Zone Database. However; administrators can add non-existing domains via the Windows Azure Active Directory Module For Windows PowerShell. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage Office 365 identities and requirements by adding Office 365 domains with unsupported extensions. 65493
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Analyzing E-mail Hygiene Reports Nicolas Blank In Office 365; Exchange Online comes with an array of security features you can implement. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates some of the security features you can use; such as spam filtering; multilayered malware protection; and hygiene reports. 65572
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Analyzing Mail Protection Reports Nicolas Blank Office 365 manages e-mail protection by utilizing the services of Exchange Online Protection (EOP). In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to generate and analyze mail protection reports using EOP. 65568
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Analyzing Office 365 Service Reports Nicolas Blank In Office 365; monitoring and maintaining service levels; as well as tracking mechanisms of services; is made very easy by being able to generate service reports. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use on-premises troubleshooting to analyze service reports for Exchange and Lync Server nodes. 65567
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Analyzing the Auditing Log Nicolas Blank In Office 365; SharePoint contains a range of different types of reports; including the Audit Site Collections report. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access the Audit Site Collections report and discusses its key attributes. 65569
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Application SSO and Office 365 Nicolas Blank Specific Microsoft Office 365 applications can use Single Sign-on (SSO). In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the domain setup involved in supporting SSO for Office 365 services and distinguishes between the authentication processes used by applications that do and don't support SSO. 65552
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Assign or Revoke Administrative Roles in Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; administrators can assign or revoke multi-level administrative permissions for domain users. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to assign some administrative roles to users in Office 365 as well as how to revoke those roles. 65517
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Browser-Based SSO and Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; a web-based application uses a specific Single Sign-On (SSO) process to access Office 365 services. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates what occurs in the browser-based SSO process; including the role of a domain-joined AD FS server and the use of a SAML token for authentication purposes. 65554
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Built-in Domains in Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; administrators can add a tenant to which domain names get assigned automatically based on the namespace that was chosen for a particular tenant. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage identities and requirements for built-in domains and namespaces in Office 365. 65489
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Bulk Import Using the Office 365 Administration Center Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; managing users often means dealing with users in bulk. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to create and manage bulk users via the GUI. 65522
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Certificate Requirements for AD FS Nicolas Blank Office 365 tenants can be provided with Single Sign-On (SSO) capabilities by deploying certification through the Active Directory Federation Services (AD FS). In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the certificate requirements and dependencies for using AD FS. 65556
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Changing the DirSync Schedule for Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Office 365; the default schedule for synchronization can be changed to run every hour; minute; and/or second as specified. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to change the DirSync schedule by modifying the tags in Notepad. 65542
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Configuring a Technical Contact in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Once you set up your Office 365 subscription; it may be necessary to change the technical contact information. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to edit the technical contact information for the tenant; and change your language option. 65485
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Configuring DirSync for Use with Office 365 Nicolas Blank Once you've downloaded and installed the Directory synchronization appliance; Microsoft Office 365 allows you to configure it to meet your needs. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates Active Directory synchronization configuration. 65540
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Connecting Office 365 Pilot Accounts Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can connect up to five existing e-mail accounts. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to add a connected e-mail account using the Outlook Web App; how to edit the settings of a connected mail account; and how to set the default reply e-mail address. 65502
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Create a Tenant Nicolas Blank In order to use Office 365 services; such as SharePoint; Exchange; and Lync; it's necessary to create a tenant. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set up a tenant and an Office 365 license. 65487
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Creating Custom Domains in Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can create a custom domain name and associate it with tenants on that domain if you own it. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage identities and outlines the requirements when creating custom domains in Office 365. 65490
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DirSync - Object Ownership; Scope; and Matching Nicolas Blank In Office 365; DirSync allows object ownership; synchronization scoping; and object matching during the synchronization process. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Forefront Identity Manager to expose running processes and configure Management Agents. 65546
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DirSync and Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Office 365; directory synchronization using the DirSync tool makes it possible to manage identities from a central location. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the DirSync tool and its features; including Password Synchronization. 65538
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DirSync and Office 365 - DirSync Quotas and Errors Nicolas Blank Office 365 doesn't let you synchronize an unlimited number of objects from on-premises Active Directory to Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates some of the quotas put in place to limit the number of synchronized objects and how to manage synchronization error messages. 65547
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DirSync and Office 365 - Identity Mastering Nicolas Blank In Office 365; during directory synchronization it's crucial to understand the difference between hard and soft matches in order to configure identity mastering. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to implement identity mastering using DirSync. 65550
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DirSync and Office 365 - Password Synchronization Nicolas Blank In Office 365; directory synchronization also allows you to apply password synchronization. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Directory Synchronization Configuration Wizard to synchronize passwords during the directory synchronization process. 65549
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DirSync and Office 365 - The Synchronization Process Nicolas Blank You can use the Directory Synchronization tool to synchronize data for use in Microsoft Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates which backend processes occur when directory synchronization happens; and what can be expected from the synchronization process. 65541
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DirSync and Office 365 - Understanding Object Flow Nicolas Blank In Office 365; directory synchronization follows a specific; defined flow of information. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the synchronization object flow cycle in DirSync; how to import data to the Metaverse from Office 365; export directory connectors to Office 365; and import these changes to the Active Directory. 65548
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DNS Records for Exchange Online Nicolas Blank In managing Office 365 identities and requirements; you need specific external domain name server (DNS) records for various services; such as Exchange Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the View DNS records option to browse through the MX; CNAME; and TXT records for Exchange Online. 65506
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DNS Records for Lync Online Nicolas Blank In managing Office 365 identities and requirements; you can set up domain name server (DNS) records for Lync Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Edit SRV Records link to add two SRV records by service; protocol; port; weight; priority; name; and target. 65559
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DNS Records for Office Authentication Nicolas Blank In managing Office 365 identities and requirements; you can use domain name server (DNS) records for Office authentication. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the msoid authentication record to register the required DNS records. 65563
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: DNS Records for SharePoint in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 uses SharePoint Online to provide structures to handle complex tasks in content publishing; allowing you to easily create and share public facing web sites. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure SharePoint Online and the DNS external records to make a public facing web site visible. 65507
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Exchange Online PowerShell Throttling and Office 365 Nicolas Blank Exchange Online throttling in PowerShell restricts the amount of resources you can consume in the Office 365 environment; helping to provide consistent service quality and performance. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates throttling in action on multiple PowerShell sessions and explains the limits defined by a default Office 365 policy. 65570
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Exchange Online Throttle Policies and Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 includes client throttling policies that affect Outlook connections and Exchange Web Services (EWS); helping to ensure server reliability by limiting the resources consumed by individual users or applications. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how the default throttling policies in Office 365 affect Outlook and EWS clients connecting to Exchange Online. 65571
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Federation Proxy Server and Office 365 Nicolas Blank There are two types of Active Directory Federation Services available when working with Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Federation Proxy server service in Office 365. 65561
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Firewall Configuration for Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 has a number of port and protocol requirements that you need to be aware of when configuring or troubleshooting firewall functionality. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the ports used in Office 365 firewall settings; such as SMTP; IMAP; and POP. 65515
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Installing AD FS Proxy Servers Nicolas Blank In Windows 2012 R2 there is no longer a separate AD FS Proxy Role. Windows 2012 R2 instead uses the Remote Access feature which contains VPN direct access and Web Application Proxy Functionality. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set up an AD FS Proxy using the Remote Access Feature for use in Office 365. 65562
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Installing AD FS Servers Nicolas Blank In Office 365; you can use Microsoft Server Manager to install and configure internal-facing AD FS servers. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to install an AD FS server and deploy PowerShell within it. 65558
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Installing DirSync for Use with Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can synchronize data using the Active Directory synchronization tool. This requires installing and activating Directory synchronization in the Office 365 GUI. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the steps for the downloading and installing the Office 365 Synchronization tool. 65539
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Introduction to Windows Azure Rights Management Nicolas Blank Windows Azure Rights Management allows you to protect your data within Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates key features of Windows Azure Rights Management; such as persistent and offline protection. 65508
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Logging and Managing Service Requests Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 supports service requests based on selections made during the submission process. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to add; filter; and search service requests before using Office 365's interactive menus to compile a submission. 65575
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Managing Company Information for Office 365 Tenants Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 administration information can be accessed and managed through the GUI; as well as via commandlets in Windows PowerShell. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage identities and requirements for company information and tenants in Office 365. 65488
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Managing IT Deployments of Office 365 ProPlus Nicolas Blank It may be necessary to manage the way Microsoft Office 365 ProPlus is deployed depending on your network environment. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates some of the deployment options available when working with Office 365 ProPlus; and discusses reasons why you might experience deployment failures. 65505
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Managing Office 365 Domains via PowerShell Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; the administration console GUI is useful; but some tasks can be performed just as easily using Windows PowerShell. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use commandlets to manage Office 365 identities and requirements for Office 365 domains in Windows PowerShell. 65492
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Managing Office 365 Users Using PowerShell Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; not only do you have a GUI available when administering users and groups; but also the option of using Windows PowerShell. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use Windows PowerShell to manage Office 365 users and groups. 65521
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Managing User-Driven Client Deployments in Office 365 Nicolas Blank To ensure the correct user-driven deployments of Microsoft Office 365; it's important to manage Office 365 Identities and requirements. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how you are able to manage user-driven deployments of Office 365 by understanding what elements can be controlled. 65504
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Managing Users via the Office 365 Administration Center Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; administrative users can manage users and groups via the Office 365 Administration Center. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the administrative options available when managing users and groups in Office 365. 65520
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Monitoring and Testing DirSync with Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 keeps track of the directory synchronization process with the event viewer. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to monitor and test directory synchronization failures and successes in DirSync. 65543
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Monitoring Service Health in Office 365 Nicolas Blank By signing in to Office 365 as an administrator; you can monitor the status of subscribed services and find out when planned maintenance events are scheduled at any time. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the features on the service health page in the Office 365 admin center for monitoring service health issues. 65573
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Moving Ownership of DNS to Office 365 Nicolas Blank In managing Office 365 identities and requirements; you can move the ownership of the domain name server (DNS) to Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the domain registrar to change the name server to Office 365 for the primary and secondary domains. 65495
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Multi-Factor Administrator Authentication in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to use multi-factor authentication to improve the security of your administrative accounts. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set up multi-factor authentication for an administrative account using a phone call; an SMS; or a software token. 65526
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Multi-Factor User Authentication in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 provides multi-factor authentication that you can configure to add layers of security against attacks on user accounts. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure authentication methods over and above standard usernames and passwords. 65525
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Administration Portals Nicolas Blank Office 365 combines a set of distinct technologies including; Exchange; SharePoint; and Lync. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to open the administration portals for these technologies. 65484
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Client Bandwidth Requirements Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you should consider the client bandwidth requirements to ensure an optimal end user experience. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how consideration of bandwidth requirements optimizes access to Office 365 services. 65514
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Datacenters Nicolas Blank In managing Office 365 identities and requirements; you need to consider datacenter locations and compliance standards when deploying Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Country or region drop-down to change the country and explore the regions where primary and secondary datacenters are located. 65481
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Deployment Across the Organization Nicolas Blank To deploy services in Microsoft Office 365; you have to convert to a paid subscription and update the domains. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage Office 365 identities and requirements by deploying across the organization. 65499
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Enhanced Deployment Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 has several sophisticated services that become available after enhanced deployment. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage Office 365 identities and requirements through Office 365 enhanced deployment. 65500
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Licensing Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; choosing the most appropriate Office 365 licensing plan can be challenging; as there are so many plans to choose from. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage identities and requirements for licensing plans in Office 365. 65482
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Pilot Deployment Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 allows users with administrator privileges to manage identities and requirements through its subscription-based services. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use Pilot Deployment in Office 365. 65498
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 PowerShell Providers - Azure AD and Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 provides a range of services that have PowerShell attached to them. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use two of the PowerShell providers for Office 365: Azure AD and Exchange Online. 65532
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 PowerShell Providers - Lync Online and SharePoint Online Nicolas Blank Office 365 provides various services that have PowerShell attached to them; and each service has slightly different connection and setup requirements. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use Lync Online and SharePoint Online to illustrate how each of these services becomes manageable via PowerShell. 65565
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Office 365 Service Descriptions Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; the service descriptions online documentation provides an up-to-date list of system requirements and software restrictions for each product in the Office 365 suite. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to navigate the Office 365 Service Descriptions online documentation; focusing on the limits associated with Exchange Online and SharePoint Online plans. 65501
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: OnRamp for Office 365 Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 allows administrators to manage identities and requirements through subscription-based services and to run tests against those services with Microsoft OnRamp for Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use OnRamp for Office 365 to manage identities and service requirements. 65497
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Password Management in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 Windows PowerShell allows you to view and change password policies when required. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to view and change the default settings for the number of days before users receive password notifications and how long their password will be valid for. 65519
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Planning a Pilot Deployment of Office 365 Nicolas Blank It is important to plan your Office 365 pilot deployment in advance so that the results can be measured accurately. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the need for and importance of deployment criteria; and the roles users can play in a pilot deployment. 65496
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Planning for Office 365 Clients Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 ProPlus can be client deployed or IT deployed. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates Office 365 ProPlus client deployment considerations and licensing requirements; reviews connectivity requirements for the software's update process; as well as how to download and install the software. 65503
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Proxy Server Configuration for Office 365 Nicolas Blank Client applications within Microsoft Office 365 can connect transparently to any of their related child addresses; when configured appropriately. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how configuration of the proxy server allows transparent connections in Office 365. 65513
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Removing an Office 365 Domain Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365; as a precaution; does not permit administrators to remove a domain if it is associated with any email addresses; user accounts; or distribution groups. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage Office 365 identities and requirements by removing an Office 365 vanity domain. 65494
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Rich Client SSO and Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; the Single Sign-On (SSO) process differs depending on whether you attempt to access services via a rich client or a browser. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the steps that occur when a rich client; such as a Lync client; uses SSO to access Office 365 services. 65553
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Single Sign-On in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Single Sign-On (SSO) is based on Active Directory Federation Services and is one of the ways that authentication within Office 365 is extended into an on-premises Active Directory. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the relationship between SSO; Password Synchronization; and the on-premise Active Directory. 65551
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Soft Object Deletions in Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can easily restore a user if they were deleted by accident. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage identities and requirements related to soft object deletions in Office 365. 65523
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Switching Office 365 Plans Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; Microsoft has simplified switching between plans by providing a handy migrating wizard in some instances. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to manage identities and points out some of the requirements of switching plans in Office 365. 65483
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Synchronizing Office 365 Objects with DirSync Nicolas Blank In Office 365; DirSync allows the automatic synchronization of on-premises users; groups; and contacts with Office 365's Active Directory (AD). In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how object attributes imported into the Forefront Identity Manager are published to Office 365. 65545
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Synchronizing Office 365 Users and Groups with DirSync Nicolas Blank In Office 365; DirSync allows the automatic synchronization of on-premises security and distribution groups with Office 365's Active Directory (AD). In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how DirSync enables access to and consumption of Office 365 services. 65544
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Tenant Naming Considerations Nicolas Blank There are a number of important considerations to take into account when naming an Office 365 tenant. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the global Office 365 tenant environment and how it influences the individual tenant; as well as how to check for tenant name availability. 65486
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: The Hybrid Free/Busy Troubleshooter and Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 uses a hybrid free/busy troubleshooter to ensure that hybrid mode in Exchange runs smoothly. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access and use the hybrid free/busy troubleshooter. 65580
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: The Office 365 Administration Center Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; most of the published services and features can be observed and managed via the Office 365 Administration Center. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how manage Office 365 identities and requirements by using the features of the Administration Center. 65524
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: The Office 365 Permissions Model Nicolas Blank In managing Office 365 identities and requirements; you can assign one of five predefined administrator roles to a user. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses the Assign role dialog to discuss the Billing administrator; Global administrator; Password administrator; Service administrator; and the User management administrator roles. 65516
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: The Windows Azure Active Directory Graph API Nicolas Blank PowerShell provides greater control than the Office 365 GUI in terms of managing identities and accessing information about them. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how Windows Azure Active Directory Graph API is the equivalent of what we're able to do on-premises against Active Directory. 65527
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Understanding Identities in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 permits two kinds of identities: Cloud Identity and Federated Identity. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the two identities and how users of each one are authenticated. 65518
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Use PowerShell to Manage Office 365 Cloud Identities Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can use PowerShell to manage identities and requirements. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to use the Windows Azure Active Directory MSOnline module within PowerShell to access user related Get commandlets. 65536
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using AD FS Access Filtering with Office 365 Nicolas Blank You can use AD FS to limit who can access Office 365 from an internal network by using Active Directory Federation Services Claims Rules. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set up and configure different kinds of Claims Rules. 65560
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using MOSDAL with Office 365 Nicolas Blank The Microsoft Online Services Diagnostic and Logging (MOSDAL) Support Toolkit provides numerous features that help you to perform tests and gather data when troubleshooting issues with applications connecting to Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to download and install the MOSDAL Support Toolkit; before using it to collect data and create reports related to a service issue. 65577
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Add Federated Office 365 Subdomains Nicolas Blank You can add federated subdomains in Office 365 by using the PowerShell module. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to add a federated subdomain using the Windows Azure Active Directory Module for Windows PowerShell. 65566
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Bulk Create Office 365 Users Nicolas Blank Office 365 PowerShell allows you to bulk create users; setting each password with a randomized value. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to write a script file that is run in PowerShell using a CSV file as input. 65534
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Delete Office 365 Users Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; you can use the Windows Azure Active Directory module for PowerShell to delete multiple users and restore deleted users. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the options available for deleting and restoring multiple users efficiently in both PowerShell and in the Office 365 GUI. 65537
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Manage Office 365 Licensing Nicolas Blank In Microsoft Office 365; licensing multiple users can be a time consuming process. However; through using the Windows Azure Active Directory Module for Windows PowerShell you can license multiple users more efficiently. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to find and license multiple users; as well as how to update their licences. 65535
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Manage SSO Settings Nicolas Blank You can use Windows Azure Active Directory Module for PowerShell to manage Office 365 single sign-on settings. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access the available commands associated with single sign-on; what each of the commands is used for; and also how you would convert a single sign-on domain to a standard domain. 65555
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Monitor Office 365 Services Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 allows the use of PowerShell to monitor and identify issues affecting an individual user's services. In this video; Nicolas Blank uses tenant's licenses to identify issues denying individual users access to specific services. 65574
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Set Password Expiry in Office 365 Nicolas Blank When using PowerShell with Microsoft Office 365; you set password expiry times at the domain level. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set a password policy; validation days; and a notification period in MsolService. 65529
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Set Password Policy in Office 365 Nicolas Blank In order to access more complex password policies in Microsoft Office 365; you will need to access the Windows Azure Active Directory Module for Windows PowerShell. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to set complex password policies for single users and groups Office 365. 65531
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Set Passwords in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 allows you to use PowerShell to set user passwords. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates resetting the password for multiple users using PowerShell to generate the new password; supply a password manually; or supply a password via a CSV file. He then shows how passwords are checked for password policy compliance. 65530
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using PowerShell to Update Office 365 User Properties Nicolas Blank The Office administration centre in Microsoft Office 365 offers a range of customizable features. However; it may be necessary to edit certain feature properties at the PowerShell level. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to find and edit single and bulk properties for an individual or a group. 65533
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using the MCA with Office 365 Nicolas Blank The Microsoft Connectivity Analyzer (MCA) Tool helps administrators and users identify connectivity issues between e-mail clients and Office 365 directly from their computers. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to access the MCA tool from the Microsoft Remote Connectivity Analyzer (RCA) website and run an Outlook connectivity test from inside a firewall. 65579
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using the Microsoft Remote Connectivity Analyzer Nicolas Blank Microsoft's Remote Connectivity Analyzer (RCA) is a feature rich Web-based tool that allows you to test the availability of Office 365 services and help troubleshoot connectivity issues. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the tests available on the Office 365 tabbed page in the RCA; as well as how to perform a specific connectivity test and analyze the resulting details. 65576
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using the Windows Azure PowerShell Module in Office 365 Nicolas Blank Office 365 provides you with Windows Azure Active Directory PowerShell Module to automate management tasks in Office 365. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to download; install; and run the module; and use it to issue a PowerShell commandlet to manage users and groups. 65528
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Using TRIPP with Office 365 Nicolas Blank When using Lync Online with Office 365; the Transport Reliability IP Probe (TRIPP) can be used to test your connection and provide valuable diagnostic information about the connection's quality. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to run a test on a Lync Online connection using TRIPP and analyze the results in the connection summary produced by the reliability tool. 65578
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Windows Azure Rights Management and Exchange Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 uses Azure Rights Management to provide security for data created and exchanged throughout RMS configured applications and services. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure Exchange Online to work with the RMS. 65510
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Windows Azure Rights Management and Office 365 Nicolas Blank In Office 365; once enabled; Windows Azure rights management integrates with Exchange Online and SharePoint Online. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates the Windows Azure rights management is used to protect Exchange Online messages; and how it is utilized by SharePoint Online. 65509
Managing Office 365 Identities and Requirements: Windows Azure Rights Management and SharePoint Online Nicolas Blank Microsoft Office 365 allows you to configure the application of RMS to SharePoint Online. In this way; you can ensure that Azure Rights Management protection is applied at the list and library level within SharePoint. In this video; Nicolas Blank demonstrates how to configure SharePoint online to work with RMS. 65511
Microsoft Windows 7 Administration: Configuring Disks Jonathan Summers With elevated administrative credentials; you'll be able to utilize the simple interface in the Disk Management section of the Computer Management tool in Windows 7 to easily configure disks. In this video; Jonathan Summers uses Disk Management in Windows 7 to create and format a partition on a basic disk. 48234
Microsoft Azure: Cloud Introduction Aaron Sampson After watching this video; you will be able to describe the characteristics of cloud computing. 81221
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Application Creation Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can use the Microsoft Installer (MSI) to create or import applications; such as modules; in your systems via the BizTalk Server Group. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to create; import; and install applications using the Microsoft Installer in the BizTalk 2010 Server. 58556
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Application Deployment Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server allows you to save; publish; and deploy applications across a server farm. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to sign a document and set up application requirements during the creation of an MSI object. 58557
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Application Removal Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server you can remove components; such as applications; files; and modules; contained in the Microsoft Installer (MSI). In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to uninstall modules from the MSI. 58555
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Application Starting and Testing Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server allows you to test deployed applications. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to check that the processes executed during a test have worked correctly. 58558
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Application Version Control and Synchronization Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server allows you to organize your applications in BizTalk 2010 and synchronize and maintain control of all your application versions on various systems. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to utilize BizTalk 2010 to edit and update applications over various system versions. 58554
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Applying the NEW Adapters - LOB Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; there is a new Adapter in the Line of Business (LOB) environment which allows you to integrate various applications easily. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the TwoWayBridge capability in the Cloud that can be used to connect a number of LOB applications; such as SharePoint and SQL Server. 58534
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Applying the NEW Adapters - SharePoint Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server uses the Windows SharePoint Services Adapter Web Service component to process inbound and outbound documents on multiple sites through SharePoint Services. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to create a receive port and location; and then configure Windows SharePoint Services and Source Library URLs. 58533
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Azure Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server Azure; you can use Azure to create virtual machines and expand your computing power. In this video; Clive Herman uses Azure to demonstrate how to add additional computing power. 58516
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Backing Up and Restoring Data Clive Herman You can use Microsoft BizTalk 2013 to backup and restore server data. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to administer application backups using the BizTalk Server Administration tool. He also explains the various backup levels in the Message Box. 58574
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Activities and Monitoring Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Business Activity Monitoring (BAM) capabilities offer business analysts multiple dynamic and archived views of BizTalk data and business processes. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to incorporate BAM Add-Ins into Excel; create new activities; define and promote items of different types; and initiate the processing of a view. 58536
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Activity Workbook Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Business Activity Monitoring (BAM) capabilities allow the creation of activity workbooks as Excel views. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to process an Excel activity workbook view; create a Pivot Table containing selected fields and data; and prepare to view it from the Business activity portal. 58537
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Interceptor Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's BAM Interceptor allows the interception of Business Activity Monitoring processes and the introduction of custom .NET code for alerts; display; or information purposes. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use the BAM Interceptor to introduce information derived from outside the Business Activity Monitoring message flow through the Tracking Profile Editor. 58539
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Observation Model Creation Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; you can use Excel to create a Business Activity Monitor (BAM) Observation Model for users and stakeholders. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to create a new BAM view and configure its elements with specific information. 58571
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Observation Model Deployment Clive Herman You can use Microsoft BizTalk to deploy a Business Activity Monitoring (BAM) Observation Model. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use the file used for BAM deployment. 58572
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Portal Access Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Business Activity Monitoring (BAM) views; offer business analysts query criteria that allows them to extract and filter results from dynamic datasets or view them in aggregation Pivot Tables and charts. In this video; Clive Herman uses a Business visibility portal and the Tracking Profile Editor to demonstrate how dynamic data is accessed; manipulated; and viewed. 58538
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Process Definition Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; you can use Business Activity Monitoring (BAM) to capture and monitor a business activity. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use Microsoft Excel to define a process which can be monitored; and how to make configuration changes in Excel which will allow certain processes to be monitored. 58570
Microsoft BizTalk Server: BAM Tracking Profiles Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Tracking Profile Editor allows the creation of tracking profiles to view documents flowing step by step through BizTalk. In this video; Clive Herman uses BizTalk's Profile Tracking Editor to tie event source items to a selected BAM Activity Definition and create a tracking profile. 58540
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Binding the Orchestration Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; after you have built the send and receive logical and physical ports; you need to combine them to the orchestration. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to combine your send and receive ports to the orchestration based on the input ports; outbound logical ports; and bindings; and create sndError and SendShip Notice messages. 58565
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Building Messages and Promoting Elements Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; elements get promoted when you build messages and want to have access to BAM. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the new schemas in BizTalk; how to build a message; promote elements; use EDI requests; and configure ports. 58548
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Business Activity Monitoring (BAM) Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Business Activity Monitoring (BAM) capabilities offer business analysts dynamic and archived views of BizTalk data and business processes. In this video; Clive Herman uses a Business visibility portal's aggregation viewer and search functionality to demonstrate the dynamic processing and querying of purchase orders. 58535
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Configuring a Server in the Cloud Clive Herman In the last three years; Microsoft has put a lot of effort into putting all of their products into the cloud environment; and this is particularly true for Microsoft BizTalk 2013. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to configure a server in the cloud. 58521
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Configuring New MAPPER Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Mapper allows easy Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) across organizations through the BizTalk Administration Console and Visual Studio. In this video; Clive Herman uses Microsoft Visual Studio to demonstrate the integration of BizTalk Toolbox EDI and XML components needed to build predefined BizTalk items. 58517
Microsoft Biztalk Server: Creating Basic Business Rules Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server allows you to create and add basic rules to documents. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to create and add basic vocabulary definitions to a document by creating a Constant Value. 58559
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Creating Complex Business Rules Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you have many options available you can use to create complex business rules. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use the Vocabularies option to develop complex business rules with Functions and Predicates. 58560
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Creating Envelopes Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server allows for the definition of envelopes to wrap child schemas; the defined subrecords of which are processed as distinct messages. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the selection of child-item containers in a schema and their configuration as envelopes containing subrecords. 58527
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Creating MAPS XML Document Formats Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Mapper allows the dynamic mapping and calculation of document fields in Visual Studio. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to add a named BizTalk map to a project and map or link field items by structure from a source schema to its equivalent items in a destination schema. 58530
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Deploying Business Policies Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server allows you to deploy business policies in a business environment. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to deploy a discount policy by configuring a SharePoint service on a Receive Location. 58562
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Development Production Clive Herman You can use Microsoft BizTalk in the cloud as a schema in order to make the Development environment as similar as possible to the Production environment. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the components of the BizTalk Production environment. 58543
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Enhancing Business Rules Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can add sophistication and elegance to business rules to fit unique environments. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use the BizTalk Server Samples Folder to examine enhanced business rules. 58561
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Enterprise Service Bus Toolkit Clive Herman The Enterprise Service Bus is a new feature of both BizTalk 2013 and a number of cloud services. With BizTalk 2013; there is an Enterprise Service Bus Toolkit to make life easier for you. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to download the Enterprise Service Bus Toolkit. 58520
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Exploring Business Processes Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk performs a variety of business processes; such as invoicing and order entry. In this video; Clive Herman uses the AdventureWorks example company to explore some of these processes; including the Business Rule Composer; policies; scalability; and consistency in BizTalk. 58544
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Functoids Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can use functoids to provide a range of functions for manipulating data. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the concatenate; string; and database functoids; as well as the functoid inputs and categories that are available in BizTalk. 58550
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Hosting a Server in the Cloud Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server has made hosting a server in the cloud easier and safer than ever. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates new BizTalk Server features including gallery standards and the VM agent. 58522
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Hosting Rapid Development in the Cloud Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can create a development environment in the Cloud to use for Rapid Development. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to create virtual machines to use as a development environment that mimics the production environment. 58541
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Hybrid On-Premise and the Cloud Clive Herman You can use Microsoft BizTalk Server to create a Hybrid environment both On-Premise and in the Cloud. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use the Enterprise Service Bus to set up the components for a complete Hybrid environment. 58542
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Importing Schemas Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013 allows the import of XML documents; or documents that have been converted to XML; allowing for the import of schemas into existing business solutions. In this video; Clive Herman uses Visual Studio to import; in XSD format; an existing Oracle item into a BizTalk solution. 58526
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Management Pack Clive Herman You can use the BizTalk Server 2013 Monitoring Management Pack to monitor capabilities for artifacts and BizTalk related Platform Components. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to download and install the Management Pack; and explains the basic contents of the folder downloaded from the Microsoft Download Center. 58573
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Mapping Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server allows you to use document mapping to integrate data from one server to another. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates using document mapping in BizTalk to create an XML Stylesheet Translation (XSLT) table. 58549
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Message Processing Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server handles all documents as messages. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how these messages are processed in a Service-Oriented Architecture system. 58546
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Orchestration Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can use orchestration to integrate one application with another application. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrate how to create an orchestration and specify its operations in BizTalk. 58551
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Overview Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013's Messaging engine allows the creation and implementation of logical business processes spanning multiple applications. In this video; Clive Herman uses BizTalk 2013's Administration Console to demonstrate the workflow of inbound XML documents and messages through BizTalk's Service-oriented Architecture (SOE). 58515
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Promoting Properties Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013 allows the promotion; in Visual Studio; of a document's instance-specific or general data-field properties. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to promote a message's field to metadata in Visual Studio to allow routing decisions and Business Activity Monitoring (BAM). 58525
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Publishing and Subscribing Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; Publishing and Subscribing provide a great measure of reliability; availability; and scalability. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the basics of operating in the BizTalk publishing environment. 58547
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Receive Ports and Locations Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; Receive Ports are the connection between the virtual and physical location; and can be either static or dynamic. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to set up a Receive Port; and explains how they work. 58563
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Receiving Services Clive Herman In BizTalk; one of the first components you come across is Receive Services. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the automatic processing that occurs in the basic environment when an order is received. 58545
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Secure File Transfer Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can use Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) to transmit data from one location to another. In this video; Clive Herman uses BizTalk 2013 to set up a ReceivePort. 58518
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Send Ports and Locations Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; much like Receive Ports and locations; Send Ports and locations can also be both physical and virtual. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to create Send Ports and guides you through their various requirements and components. 58564
Microsoft BizTalk Server: SharePoint Workflows Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; collaboration is the key to business organization workflow methods. You can use SharePoint to control that collaboration. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use the Use Client OM option to communicate with a SharePoint Server. 58553
Microsoft Biztalk Server: Simple Document Schemas Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can easily create and use Simple Document Schemas for individual business solutions. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to create and customize a Simple Document Schema by adding components to an existing record. 58523
Microsoft BizTalk Server: SOAP Header Schemas Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server has a range of standardized document formats; one of the most common being the Simple Open Application Protocol (SOAP). In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to use SOAP header schemas; as well as the impact of HTML5 and JSON on this protocol. 58529
Microsoft BizTalk Server: SWIFT; X12 EDI; EDIFACT and HIPAA 5010 Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server has added a number of new features especially in the HIPAA environment. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates some of the new features added to BizTalk; where to find them; and how to use them. 58519
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Testing Application Business Rules Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; when business rules change it's important to have a method capable of checking if they have been applied correctly. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to test new bindings and application business rules. 58566
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Tracking Message Flows Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; when something goes wrong; you are able to follow the track that a message flowed through. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the section of BizTalk that deals with the tracking of queries; explores data tracking; and views a message flow. 58567
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Using BTSTASK to Export Applications Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk; it can be easier to use a scripting environment than a graphic user interface. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to export an application using BTSTASK. 58568
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Using BTSTASK to Import Applications Clive Herman You can use Microsoft BizTalk to import working applications from other systems. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to import an application from the Module4-BAM.msi location. 58569
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Using Functoids in the BizTalk Mapper Module Clive Herman There are a variety of new functoids contained in Microsoft BizTalk Server. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to add; map; and link a functoid; and examines the different functoids available for use. 58531
Microsoft BizTalk Server: Validating Regular Expressions Clive Herman Microsoft BizTalk Server 2013 uses pattern matching to validate regular expressions and restrict inbound field-element data. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to restrict the properties of BizTalk element fields and uses Visual Studio's Pattern Editor to define a regular expression to which inbound data should conform. 58528
Microsoft BizTalk Server: XML Document Processing Clive Herman In Microsoft BizTalk Server; you can convert documents into XML documents. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates the various XML document schemas available in BizTalk 2013 and how to access the preloaded standard file structures in the BizTalk EDI folder. 58552
Microsoft BizTalk Server: XML Document Schemas Clive Herman You can use Microsoft BizTalk Server to create a document schema in XSD from well-formed XML. In this video; Clive Herman demonstrates how to generate a well-formed XML Document Schemas. 58524
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Add Remove Tags from Retention Policy David Santana Adding and removing tags from a retention policy in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 is easy. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add and remove retention tags. 52512
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Adding Users to Administration Roles David Santana Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to add users to administration roles. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to assign an administration role to a user. 52531
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Apply Retention Policy to Mailbox User David Santana Applying a retention policy to a specific user in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 is possible for members of the records management role group. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to apply a retention policy to a mailbox user. 52508
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Apply Retention Tags to Multiple Mailboxes via PowerShell David Santana Applying retention tags to multiple mailboxes via PowerShell in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 is simple. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to choose multiple mailboxes to apply retention tags. 52514
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Block Version of Outlook David Santana Configuring Outlook client blocking in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to block users who are running older versions of Outlook from accessing your Exchange mailboxes. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to block a specific MAPI client version. 52518
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Configure Manage System David Santana The Manage Folders Assistant in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to change the work cycles. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure the Manage Folders Assistant. 52515
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Create an Email Address Policy David Santana Creating email address policies in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to generate primary and secondary email address. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and apply an email address policy. 52534
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Create Retention Policies David Santana Creating retention policies in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to incorporate retention tags to be applied to a specific mailbox. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a retention policy. 52507
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Create Retention Tag David Santana Creating retention tags in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to retain mail items and mailboxes for specific periods of time. In this video; David Santana reviews some of the new technologies; features; and services in the new Exchange Admin Center and demonstrates how to create retention tags. 52506
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating a Distribution Group David Santana Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to create distribution groups to list the mailbox users in a specific group. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a distribution group. 52526
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating a Dynamic Distribution Group David Santana Creating a dynamic distribution group in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to send an email to specific group that resides in a specific location; such as New York or Rochester. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a dynamic distribution group. 52527
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating a Journal Rule David Santana Creating Journal Rules in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to forward specific messages to specific email accounts with the original messages attached in an attachment. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a journal rule. 52520
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating a Mailbox David Santana Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to create a mailbox for an existing user that has a user account but not a corresponding mailbox. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a specific user mailbox. 52528
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating a New Role Assignment Policy David Santana Creating a new role assignment policy in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to grant a group of end-users the permission to set their Outlook Web App options and perform self-administrative tasks in their Outlook Web App. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a new role assignment policy and customize permissions. 52532
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating a Room Mailbox David Santana Creating a room mailbox in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to appoint specific meeting dates and times by specifying a room. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a room mailbox. 52524
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating an Equipment Mailbox David Santana Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to create an equipment mailbox to book and track a specific equipment type; such as a projector. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create an equipment mailbox. 52525
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating Default Policy Tag David Santana Creating a default policy tag in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to delete all messages. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a default policy tag by using the PowerShell. 52510
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Creating Public Folders David Santana Creating public folders in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to share access and provides an easy way to collect; organize; and share information with other users. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a public folder. 52529
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Deleting Voicemail Messages David Santana Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to delete voicemail messages. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to delete a voicemail message by creating a specific default policy tag. 52511
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Granting Full Access David Santana Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to grant other users full access to your mailbox. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to grant full access rights to a mailbox user. 52523
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Granting Send on Behalf David Santana Granting send on behalf in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows a specific user to be able to send mail on behalf of the mailbox user that they have been assigned to. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to apply send on behalf. 52522
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Managing Permissions on Public Folders David Santana Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 simplifies managing permissions on public folders. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to manage permissions on a public folder. 52530
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Outlook Web App Policies David Santana Outlook Web App policies in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 can be configured to control the features available to users. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and apply an Outlook Web App policy. 52533
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Place a Mailbox on Retention Hold David Santana Placing a mailbox on retention hold in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users on vacation to logon to their mailbox and change or delete items. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to place a mailbox on retention hold. 52516
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Remove Retention Hold on Mailbox David Santana Removing retention hold on a mailbox in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 is essential when a user again becomes available. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to remove a retention hold on a mailbox. 52517
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Restoring Access to a Blocked Outlook Client Version David Santana Restoring access to a blocked Outlook client version in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows a blocked user to access your Exchange mailboxes. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to restore access for a specific mailbox user. 52519
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Send Messages to Moderator David Santana Sending messages to the moderator in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to have the message approved before it is sent to the intended recipient. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to send messages to the moderator. 52535
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Setting Up an Undeliverable Report David Santana Setting up an undeliverable report in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows users to report all mails that failed to reach the intended email address. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up an undeliverable report. 52521
Microsoft Exchange Server 2013: Start MRM Assistant David Santana Starting the MRM assistant in Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 allows you to move or delete messages based on the settings. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the Exchange Management Shell for 2013 and manually start the process. 52509
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Access and Security Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) can be configured to require certificates or to use website authentication for security. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how you can add security to your websites by either using or setting up certificates; the self-signed certificate; or simple Windows Authentication. 75048
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Application Pools Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) makes use of application pools; which let you manage your sites and applications at a more granular level. In this video; Pierre Devereux provides an overview on working with application pools; where; for example; you can isolate sites and services from each other or prevent one application from using resources from another application pool. 75052
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Applications Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows you to use applications from a pool. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to create an application and then assign it to an application pool to be used with different settings on other websites. 75047
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Certificates Pierre Devereux In Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS); there are three types of certificates that allow you to use the IIS Security services; each best suited for use in specific environments. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates the application of these certificates through the Server Manager. 75059
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Communication Ports Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) when installed; by default; creates an initial website and assigns port 80 to it. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to change your default ports for use from another program or another application. 75046
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Completing a Certificate Request Pierre Devereux In Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS); as the administrator of the Certificate Authority; you are allowed to either approve and issue; or deny Certificate Requests that are sent to the Certificate Authority. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to complete and issue Certificate Requests sent to the Certificate Authority through the IIS. 75061
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Configuring and Importing Certificates Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allow you to create certificate requests from within Windows. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to create and import a certificate request from your Windows OS and then import this request into the IIS Manager. 75063
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Creating a Certificate Request Pierre Devereux In Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS); you can create your own Certificate Requests and send them to your network Certificate Authority for approval. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to create and send a Certificate Request from your Server Manager. 75060
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Event Logs Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows you to use the Microsoft IIS Event Logs for troubleshooting issues. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use Microsoft IIS Event Logs when searching for possible reasons behind suspect service behaviour; such as when a Microsoft IIS Service behaves outside of the expected parameters. 75049
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Exporting and Importing Certificates Pierre Devereux In Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS); the Microsoft Management Console Snap-in allows you to easily export and import certificates. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to access and use the MMC Snap-in. 75062
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Extensions Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) include a number of extensions and features to choose from. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to select and apply IIS extensions for specific needs. 75054
Microsoft Internet Information Services: IIS Server Services Pierre Devereux While Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) is running and presenting websites to clients; there are services running in the background that make this possible. If you are having problems with IIS; you can troubleshoot these services by accessing information; such as the service's status and startup type. In this video; Pierre Devereux provides an overview of IIS services. 75051
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Installing Extensions Using PowerShell Pierre Devereux In Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS); extensions can be downloaded and installed onto your server through the graphic user interface or PowerShell. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to install extensions for IIS using PowerShell. 75056
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Installing Extensions Using the GUI Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) extensions can either be downloaded using the Microsoft Web Platform Installer or by downloading it manually. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to access and install extensions using the graphic user interface. 75055
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Installing IIS Features with GUI Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows you to easily install a range of features with the GUI. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to install basic features for IIS and discusses the roles and features button. 75042
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Installing IIS Features with PowerShell Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows you to install IIS features with Microsoft PowerShell. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to install features for IIS using PowerShell; and how you can also run a PowerShell command to check if a feature is already installed. 75043
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Installing IIS in the Windows 2012 Security Model Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allow you to install services in the Windows 2012 Security Model. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to install IIS Windows 2012 Security Model; ensuring that the configuration is done correctly to avoid potential security vulnerabilities. 75039
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Installing IIS via GUI Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows you to install services via the graphic user interface (GUI) of the Server Manager; or by using PowerShell commands. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to install IIS via the GUI. 75040
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Installing IIS via PowerShell Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows you to install the service via PowerShell. This can be done for remote and multiple installations. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to install IIS via PowerShell; and also install a series of management tools. 75041
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Managing Extensions Pierre Devereux In Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS); you can install extensions that provide additional features to your services and manage these extensions. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to manage extensions through the Server Manager. 75057
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Removing Extensions Pierre Devereux When you work with Microsoft Internet Information Services; you can add and remove extensions as you require. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to remove an installed server extension by using the Control Panel. 75058
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Restarting IIS Services Pierre Devereux One of the ways to troubleshoot in Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) is by restarting its services. This is especially the case when you have connection issues. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to restart IIS from the Services Manager. 75053
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Service Health Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows you to host web-based applications and services on a system. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to administer IIS health to ensure optimum functionality; using tools such as the Microsoft Baseline Security Analyzer and Best Practices Analyzer. 75050
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Sites and Host Headers Pierre Devereux Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) allows for multiple sites to be assigned to one IP address. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to add multiple websites using the same IP address and the same port numbers on one server. 75044
Microsoft Internet Information Services: Virtual Directories Pierre Devereux When dealing with Microsoft Internet Information Services; you should be aware that content for a website may not always be stored in the same location as the site itself. In this video; Pierre Devereux demonstrates how to use the Service Manager to add virtual directories to direct a website to the content's location. 75045
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Meetings Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can specify a meeting policy for your organization. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses Outlook to create a new meeting after creating and applying the meeting policy to all users. 69783
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Enable Ocslogger Tracing Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; the Ocslogger; normally referred to as the Lync Logging Tool; and the Snooper Tool can be used to assist with troubleshooting. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to set up and run the Ocslogger and Snooper tools; and extract data from them to troubleshoot possible problems with your Lync deployment on a network. 69790
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Add Edge Server to Existing Topology David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to deploy an Edge server to your existing topology; thereby making it possible for external users to communicate with users in your organization using Lync Server. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Topology Builder to define the topology for an Edge server. 53147
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Analyze Event Viewer Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; trace logging information can also be accessed on the client level; and these events can be viewed. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to enable logging information in the client level and access this trace information in EventViewer. 69791
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Approve Device Updates David Santana As an administrator in Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can use the Lync Server Control Panel to easily approve updates made to specific devices before rolling the updates out to your organization. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Control Panel to approve a device update. 53146
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Archiving Policies Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can archive conversations so that you can review them at any time. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Archiving Policy tab to create a policy for archiving. 69772
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Archiving With Exchange Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can archive data with Exchange Server. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses PowerShell to enable archiving for Exchange and instant messages. 69773
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Associated PSTN Usages David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables administrators to create and associate Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) usage records with existing voice policies. In this video; David Santana uses Microsoft Lync Server 2013 to associate a new PSTN usage record with a voice policy. 53152
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Backup Application Service Data Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can backup application service data to ensure a recovery from a failure if anything happens to your server infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses export commandlets to backup application service data. 69766
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Conferencing Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to confer with multiple participants. Lync provides three different types of conferencing that we can use - Web Conferencing; AV Conferencing and Dial-In Conferencing; all governed by Conferencing Policies. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses Lync to create and assign these conferencing policies. 69749
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure an Announcement Service David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators to use the Lync Server Management Shell and the New -CsAnnouncement command to create custom; site-specific announcement services. In this video; David Santana creates an announcement service; configuring its attributes; parameters; and values. 53157
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Call Park David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators to use the Lync Server Management Shell to create a call park orbit; which allocates a range of retrievable numbers to callers placed on hold. In this video; David Santana uses the New-CsCallParkOrbit command to create a named call park service on an application-server pool. 53155
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure CDR And Quality Of Experience Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can configure the Call Detail Recording (CDR) and Quality of Experience (QoE) settings that relate to your monitoring reports. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Set-CsCdrConfiguration command to change the CDR configuration for the global setting and disable data purging. 69786
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Client Policies Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can create; add; and remove client policies. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the New-CsClientPolicy command to create a user or site policy. 69779
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Client Security Options Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can set security options and policies for clients. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to configure security settings for users connecting to Lync and also how Lync handles authentication. 69780
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Client-Coexistence Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 supports client-coexistence; which is useful in a phased migration scenario; allowing Lync Server 2013 to coexist with components of an earlier deployment version. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Lync Server 2013 Control Panel to edit a client version policy; permitting users of a specified previous version to connect to a Lync Server 2013 infrastructure. 69765
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Clients Features Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to customize Lync settings from a central location. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to specify client feature settings by using a group policy object in Lync 2013. 69778
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Common Area Phone Hotdesking Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to configure common area phones that are not associated with individual users as hot-desk phones that allow users to log on to their own user accounts. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to run Windows PowerShell cmdlets to create a new common area phone; before modifying a global client policy to enable hotdesking. 69757
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Conference Policies Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can configure conference policies. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Users tab to assign a conferencing policy to a particular user. 69784
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Core Reliability and Media Quality Monitoring Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to monitor how Lync performs. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to configure Call Reliability and Media Quality Monitoring from the Operations Manager. 69795
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Edge Server Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can configure access to the Edge Server for different users. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Access Edge Configuration tab to grant access to the Edge Server for remote and anonymous users. 69787
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure External Access Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can create access policies for external users. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Federation and External Access tab to create an external access policy for a user; and enable communication with federated users. 69788
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Federation Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to configure access policies that control whether external users of federated domains can collaborate with Lync Server 2013 users. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to enable communication with federated users using the configuration options in the Lync Server 2013 Control Panel. 69759
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Mobile Push Notification Telmo Sampaio The mobile push notification feature allows Microsoft Lync Server 2013 to send alerts; show icons; and display badges on mobile devices. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to set the Microsoft Push Notification service and Apple Push Notification service to true. 69754
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Music On Hold Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to change the default Call Park service music on hold file; specifying your own audio file that is played to parked callers who are on hold. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to enable music on hold and to assign an audio file in Windows PowerShell. 69755
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Music on Hold David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators to use the Lync Server Management Shell to enable music on hold for specific callers or sites. In this video; David Santana retrieves the site's call park service configuration and changes its EnableMusicOnHold attribute. 53156
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Persistent Chat Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to use Persistent Chat; which is a feature that allows users to create a discussion room that persists forever and is available at any point in time. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to configure and create chat rooms with Persistent Chat in Lync. 69785
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Pin Policies Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can configure PIN policies. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the PIN Policy tab to specify how many digits to use for a PIN and how many attempts can be made before locking out the user. 69781
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Public IM Connectivity Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 provides support for users of public instant messaging (IM) providers; such as Skype and Lync Online; who wish to collaborate with Lync clients within an organization via an external access policy. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses both the Lync Server Control Panel and Windows PowerShell ISE to enable communication for public IM users. 69760
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure RBAC Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 provides role-based access control (RBAC) that allows you to delegate administrative tasks by assigning users within your organization to predefined and custom RBAC roles. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the capabilities of the built-in administrative roles that ship with Lync Server; and how to create a scoped role in Microsoft PowerShell. 69762
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Regions And Dial-In Numbers Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can create a dial-in access number that users can dial to call into a site. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Conferencing option to create a dial-in access number to the Miami site. 69782
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Remote User Access Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to grant remote user access for employees within your organization who sign in to Lync Server from outside your network; whether working from home or on the road. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to enable communication with remote users either through the Lync Server Control Panel or with Windows PowerShell ISE. 69761
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Synthetic Transactions Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to manage applications by working with synthetic transactions and watcher nodes. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to configure the watcher nodes that run synthetic transactions in Lync. 69793
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure The Address Book Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to synchronize data maintained in the Lync server with data that comes with from the Active Directory. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to manage the Lync Address Book with the Address Book service. 69751
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Configure Users for Enterprise Voice David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables administrators to configure users for Enterprise Voice. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure a user account for Enterprise Voice. 53159
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Control Client Version Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 helps you manage client applications and control client access by specifying the version of clients that are supported within your Lync environment. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Lync Server 2013 Control Panel to edit version configuration settings; and create a new client version policy. 69753
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create a Common Area Phone David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to create common area phones - IP phones deployed in common areas that are not associated with an individual user. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Management Shell to create and configure a common area phone. 53142
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create a Device Policy David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators to use the Lync Server Management Shell to create device policies on target sites. In this video; David Santana uses the New-CsUCPhoneConfiguration commandlet to create a device policy on a target site. 53139
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create a Dial Plan David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 requires a dial plan to be defined when deploying an Egde server. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Control Panel to create a dial plan for a specific site. 53149
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create a New PSTN Gateway David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators to define new public switched telephone network (PSTN) gateways. In this video; David Santana uses Topology Builder to set up a PSTN gateway in Lync Server 2013. 53148
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create a New Unified Messaging Dial Plan David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables administrators; on creating a Unified Messaging (UM) dial plan in Exchange Admin Center (EAC); to integrate Exchange UM into Lync Server. In this video; David Santana configures a new SIP URI dial plan and incorporates a dialing rule into the default UM mailbox policy. 53160
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create a Test Device Policy David Santana Using Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can create test device policies that allow you to verify the functionality of a specific policy before deploying it globally; or within a single site. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Control Panel to create a test device policy. 53145
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create a Trunk Configuration David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators to create custom; site-specific trunk configurations using the PSTN usage records for several associated routes. In this video; David Santana uses Lync Server 2013 to create and configure a trunk configuration associated with existing PSTN usages. 53154
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create an Unassigned Number David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables administrators to allocate a range of unassigned numbers to one or more internal phone numbers; thereby diverting outside callers to an announcement service. In this video; David Santana uses Lync Server to create and configure a new unassigned number range and its accompanying announcement service. 53158
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create Normalization Rules David Santana Using Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can create a normalization rule when setting up a dial plan for external access with an Edge server. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Control Panel to create a normalization rule. 53150
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create Routes David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables administrators to use voice routing to create specific routes for selected call traffic. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and configure a new route. 53153
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Create Voice Policies David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators creating external access policies to create and configure a Voice Policy at the site or user level. In this video; David Santana uses Lync Server 2013 to create a new site-level voice policy on a selected site and configure its calling features. 53151
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Decommission Old Servers Telmo Sampaio When migrating to Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you need to decommission servers and pools from a legacy deployment of Lync Server 2010. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to update DNS SRV records using the DNS Manager; before moving the Central Manager Server and conference directories from Lync Server 2010 to Lync Server 2013 using cmdlets in Microsoft PowerShell. 69764
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Deploy A Mediation Server Telmo Sampaio You can add a Mediation Server to your Microsoft Lync Server 2013 infrastructure to integrate the Lync infrastructure with the PSTN. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to add a single computer pool for the Mediation Server. 69774
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Deploy An Edge Server Telmo Sampaio You can use an Edge Server to allow external users to access your Microsoft Lync Server 2013 infrastructure and use it for voice conferencing; audio; and video. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to add an Edge Server to Lync Server. 69776
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Deploy Clients and Devices Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to use the Office Customization Tool (OCT). In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the OCT to deploy a Lync client to Windows. 69777
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Deploy Monitoring Reports Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to create monitoring reports. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to deploy these reports using the Lync Server Deployment tools. 69797
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Deploy Trunks And Gateways Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can deploy SIP trunks and PSTN gateways. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a PSTN gateway and specify its domain name or IP address. 69775
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Download Address Book Telmo Sampaio With the necessary credentials; Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to update an address book and force the Lync client to download the new up-to-date address book file. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use a PowerShell cmdlet to update an address book; before generating a registry key on the client computer and forcing an address book refresh. 69756
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Edit a Device Policy David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables administrators to alter and edit device policies using the Lync Server Management Shell. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Management Shell and the Set command to edit or change the values or attributes of the CsUCPhoneConfiguration device policy's features. 53140
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Enable Or Move Lync Users Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 requires users to be enabled within the Lync infrastructure to have access to all the resources available to them. Users are assigned to one of many Lync server pools. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates hwo to enable users; and moves users from one pool to another in both the Control Panel for Lync and PowerShell. 69750
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Enable Users David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to add and enable users by assigning them to specific pools. In this video; David Santana uses the Control Panel's User section to add; enable; and configure communications permissions for a Lync Server user account. 53131
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Enable Users for Lync Server Shell David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to use the Lync Server Management Shell to configure and enable users in an Active Directory Users and Computers (ADUC) container. In this video; David Santana details best practices and explains key variables as he uses the Lync Server Management Shell to configure a container and enable its users. 53134
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Enterprise Voice Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to use Lync in Telephony. The Enterprise Voice Feature is one of the main features of Lync; and through the Lync client; you can dial out to phone numbers. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to enable Enterprise Voice for Lync Users and uses Lync to assign voice policies and dial plans. 69748
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Filestore Data And Contacts Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can backup and restore filestore data. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Topology Builder tool to find out which shared folder has filestore data. 69768
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Grant Rights to Specific Users David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables you to grant rights to users added to specific security groups in the Active Directory Users and Computers (ADUC) console. In this video; David Santana uses the ADUC to add two members to a security group. 53135
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Import a Device Update David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators using the Lync Server Management Shell to perform the regular updates to devices that an organization requires. In this video; David Santana uses commands in the Management Shell to import a device update and verify that it will work. 53144
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Interpret Monitoring Reports Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can create event reports. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses PowerShell and Internet Explorer to access and interpret these logged reports. 69792
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Manage Contact List Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to search for contacts and add them to the listed contacts in Lync and group those contacts together in contact lists or groups. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to manage contacts from the client side by creating groups and adding contacts and how to view contact information from the server side. 69752
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Manage RGS Delegated Administration Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 provides two roles for managing response groups when an organization deploys the Lync Server Response Group application to handle calls in a customer service or internal help desk scenario. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the capabilities of the Response Group Administrator and Response Group Manager roles using Lync Server 2013 resources. 69758
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Migration Sequence Telmo Sampaio As with other Microsoft products; Microsoft Lync Server 2013 supports a migration process that allows you to successfully move your production deployment from a previous version of Lync Server. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the eight phases of a migration process from Lync Server 2010 to Lync Server 2013. 69763
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Recover CMS Telmo Sampaio The CMS (central management server) is a database that contains the settings and topology for Microsoft Lync Server 2013. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Install-CsDatabase commandlet to install the CMS database on a new server. 69771
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Recover LIS Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; Location Information Services (LIS) associates IP addresses; switches; and subnets with actual physical locations. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the Export-CsLisConfiguration commandlet to export the subnet location information. 69769
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Recover RTC Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can recover the RTC database instance; which contains front-end pool information stored in a SQL Server set of databases. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses SQL Server Management Studio to connect to the RTC instance and view a series of databases with different information. 69770
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Restore Application Service Data Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can easily restore backed up application service data. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses import commandlets to restore application service data. 69767
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Retrieve a CsClientPolicy David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows administrators to use the Lync Server Management Shell to retrieve a site's client policies - excluding their attributes and properties. In this video; David Santana uses the Get-CsClientPolicy piped to the Identity commandlet; to retrieve a simple rather than a verbose list of a site's client policies. 53138
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Retrieve Common Area Phones in Your Organization David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 provides administrators with the ability to retrieve common area phones and their configuration settings within an organization. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server Management Shell to retrieve information for a common area phone as well as information and examples for the Get-CsCommonAreaPhone cmdlet itself. 53143
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Run Lync BPA Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can install the Best Practices Analyser (BPA) and first scan instructions to troubleshoot a Lync deployment. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to install the BPA and configure the software to run a first time scan. 69789
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Support Access by Users of Federated Domains David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to set up a Federation Trust with another organization; giving outside users access to your domain. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to access and edit your Global External Access Policy so that its users can communicate with federated; remote; and public users. 52119
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Test Connectivity With Powershell Telmo Sampaio Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to test network connections using commandlets. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use PowerShell to implement a number of function tasks to test Lync credentials and network connections. 69794
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Validate Group Membership David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 allows you to validate the group membership of a specific Organizational Unit (OU). In this video; David Santana uses the Active Directory Users and Computers console to verify the existence of an OU and its members. 53133
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Validate the Configuration David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables you to validate a user account by using the Lync Server Management Shell to update the user database and Address Book. In this video; David Santana uses commands in Management Shell to update the user database and Address Book. 53132
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Verify Device Policy Creation David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2013 enables you to verify any device policies that might have been created. In this video; David Santana uses the Lync Server 2013 Control Panel to verify a device policy that was previously created with PowerShell. 53141
Microsoft Lync Server 2013: Verify Service Health And Cms Replication Status Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft Lync Server 2013; you can configure Lync and pass connectivity from Lync using predefined test user accounts. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to check for CMS Replication and Health Monitoring in Lync. 69796
Microsoft Lync Server: Configure the Administrative Access URL David Santana The Administrator Access URL in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 allows you to have access to the Lync Control Panel. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure administrator access using the Lync Administrative Tools. 48381
Microsoft Lync Server: Create a Common Area Phone David Santana Setting up common area phones in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 will allow you to configure call control behaviour; such as allow call transfers from a lobby. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a common area phone using the cmdlet New-csCommonAreaPhone. 50638
Microsoft Lync Server: Creating a Device Policy David Santana Creating a device policy in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is quick and easy. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to integrate a device policy in the Lync Server Management Shell. 50637
Microsoft Lync Server: Deploy and Run the Topology Builder David Santana The Lync Server Topology Builder allows you to deploy Microsoft Lync Server 2010 by publishing your topology. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and configure a new topology for a new site. 48376
Microsoft Lync Server: Editing and Troubleshooting a Device Policy David Santana You can edit and troubleshoot device policies in Microsoft Lync Server 2010. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to correct an error in the device policy from the Lync Management Shell. 50680
Microsoft Lync Server: Enable Users David Santana Enabling users in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is a simple task. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure Internet Explorer security settings and enable multiple users to use the Lync Server services. 48382
Microsoft Lync Server: Install the Local Configuration Store David Santana Installing the local configuration store in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 allows you to publish your topology and have the Central Management Store in place in your front-end pool. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure the local configuration store. 48377
Microsoft Lync Server: Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Associate the Dialplan with Lync Server David Santana Associating your dial plan with the Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging makes it active. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add dialing restrictions and associate the dial plan with the server. 48385
Microsoft Lync Server: Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Create a Um Auto Attendant David Santana A Unified Messaging auto attendant allows you to automate the answering and routing of your incoming calls. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create an auto attendant while integrating the Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging with the Lync Server. 48386
Microsoft Lync Server: Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Create and Edit Umdialplan David Santana Integrating the Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging with Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is a key task. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create and configure a UM Dial Plan. 48384
Microsoft Lync Server: Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Run the ExchUcUtil David Santana Running the UcUtility and OcsUtility scripts is important for integrating Exchange Unified Messaging with Microsoft Lync Server 2010. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to run these utilities and allow for the dial plan and auto attendant to be enabled. 48387
Microsoft Lync Server: Integrating Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified: Running the Ocs Util David Santana The OCS utility; which allows for permissions; allows you to control both Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Unified Messaging and Lync Server. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to run the OCS utility by building a new normalization rule and committing the change. 48388
Microsoft Lync Server: Management Shell: Validate the Configuration David Santana The Lync Management Shell in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 enables you to automate administrative tasks. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to retrieve; format; and update user information at the PowerShell command prompt. 48383
Microsoft Lync Server: Prepare Active Directory for Lync Server David Santana The Lync Server Deployment Wizard in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 helps you deploy the Active Directory. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to verify system requirements and prepare the Active Directory using the deployment wizard. 48374
Microsoft Lync Server: Request and Assign Certificates David Santana Assigning certificates in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is essential to have access to specific URLs; such as the Dial-in or Meet URLs. In this video; David Santana walks you through requesting and assigning certificates to services. 48379
Microsoft Lync Server: Set Up Components with the Deployment Wizard David Santana Setting up the Lync Server components is an important task in Microsoft Lync Server 2010. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up the components using the Lync Server Deployment Wizard. 48378
Microsoft Lync Server: Start Lync Server Services David Santana Starting the Lync Server Services in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is important. In this video; David Santana shows you how to verify on your front-end server that the services are running. 48380
Microsoft Lync Server: Troubleshooting and Logging David Santana Microsoft Lync Server 2010 allows you to troubleshoot and set up login. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to troubleshoot the Lync line by reviewing log files and enabling login. 50681
Microsoft Lync Server: Using RBAC to Add an Administrator to the CSAdministrator Group David Santana Adding an administrator in Microsoft Lync Server 2010 is a vital task in preparing the Active Directory and deploying the Lync Server. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use role-based access control to verify and add a member to the CSAdministrator group. 48375
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Adding and Removing E-Mail Addresses Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can add and remove e-mail addresses of individuals or multiple recipients from your organisation. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the Set-Mailbox command to add and remove an e-mail address of an individual. 62513
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Adding; Modifying and Removing Server Side Inbox Rules Patrick Loner Exchange Management Shell can be used by administrators to create rules for a particular mailbox or across multiple user mailboxes. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to create a rule for one mailbox; how to give yourself full access rights as an administrator; and how to create a rule for users in a segment of an organization. 62518
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Adding; Modifying; Removing Mailboxes Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange allows you to add; modify; and remove user mailboxes using the Exchange Management Shell. In this video; Patrick Loner uses Exchange Management Shell cmdlets and parameters to add; modify; disable; and remove Exchange user mailboxes. 62507
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Allowing Managers to Modify Group Membership Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell allows administrators using the Exchange Management Shell to provide managers and users with the necessary rights in Exchange to modify the membership of distribution groups. In this video; Patrick Loner uses cmdlets in the Shell to add a role and assign it to a user; allowing the user to modify group membership. 62542
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Blocking Outlook Clients From Connecting to Exchange Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange allow administrators to control the versions of Outlook that can connect to the Exchange server. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use PowerShell to control connectivity methods; such as MAPI and POP; and restrict Outlook versions earlier than Outlook 2007 from connecting to the server. 61699
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Configuring Administrator Audit Logging Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell allows Exchange Server administrators to configure administrator audit logging settings that let you record administrator changes in your organisation using Exchange Management Shell cmdlets. In this video; Patrick Loner uses the Get-AdminAuditLogConfig cmdlet to return the default audit logging settings; before demonstrating how to configure specific cmdlets you can audit using the Set-AdminAuditLogConfig cmdlet. 62538
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Configuring Mailbox Database Limits Patrick Loner You can configure storage quotas with Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange on an individual level or across multiple databases. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to modify mailbox database settings using Exchange Management Shell cmdlets. 62551
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Configuring Message Delivery Restrictions Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can implement various message delivery configurations. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the Exchange Management Shell to configure message delivery restrictions. 62516
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Configuring Recipient Moderation Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can reserve the right to send messages through a particular group to only certain individuals. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the SendModerationNotifications parameter to send a notification through a distribution group to a particular individual. 62515
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Controlling ActiveSync Device Access Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange allow administrators to control access by ActiveSync devices. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to review the default ActiveSync settings for an organisation; and how to set ActiveSync settings for individual devices at the server level; as well as globally; across an organization. 61700
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Converting and Upgrading Distribution Groups Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell lets you convert and upgrade distribution groups within the Exchange Management Shell; allowing the groups to be fully functional and utilize any new features when migrating from earlier versions of Exchange to Exchange 2007 and beyond. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to convert non-universal distribution groups to universal; before upgrading them using the -ForceUpgrade parameter. 62541
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Creating Address Lists Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange Management Shell cmdlets allow administrators to subdivide the global address list; allowing mailbox users to locate other recipients. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates the creation; filtering; and management of address lists and their recipients within organizational units. 62546
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Creating Recipients in Bulk Using a CSV File Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can import data in bulk from an external file to create new objects. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the import-Csv command to pull entries from an external text file and create a list of users. 62511
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Deleting Messages From Mailboxes Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange's eDiscovery capability allows administrators to search across multiple mailboxes and delete selected e-mails. In this video; Patrick Loner uses Exchange Management Shell cmdlets to define; run; filter; and output search queries on single and multiple mailboxes from which e-mails have been deleted. 62525
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Detecting and Fixing Corrupt Mailboxes Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; the Exchange Management Shell can be used to detect and fix corruption at a database level; as well as at a mailbox level. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to detect potential types of corruption; and explains how to go about repairing them. 62532
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Determining the Average Mailbox Size per Database Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the native options within the Management Shell to determine the average size of the mailboxes in a particular database. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to determine the average mailbox size for a particular database in megabytes; and exclude disconnected and archived mailboxes. 62554
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Enabling Mailbox Audit Logging Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the mailbox audit logging feature to monitor activity in mailboxes. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to enable and modify mailbox audit logging using the Exchange Management Shell. 61695
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Excluding Hidden Recipients From a Dynamic Distribution Group Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell allows you to perform advanced filtering through cmdlets in the Exchange Management Shell; so you can configure recipient filters that exclude hidden recipients from Exchange dynamic distribution groups. In this video; Patrick Loner uses the Set-DynamicDistributionGroup cmdlet with the HiddenFromAddressListsEnabled property of the recipient to create a recipient filter and exclude a recipient from an address list. 62540
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Exporting Address List Membership to a CSV File Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the Exchange Management Shell to export content as a CSV file. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to create and export an address list as a CSV file. 62547
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Exporting Reports to Text and CSV Files Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can export outputs from the management shell into easily readable text and CSV files. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to export and format output data from the management shell into a text file and modify data to display in a CSV file. 62501
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Finding Inactive Mailboxes Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the Exchange Management Shell to identify the mailboxes that are not being used; but are still active on the server. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to identify these mailboxes and then remove them. 62531
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Finding the Total Number of Mailboxes in a Database Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange allow you to determine the number of mailboxes within a database. This number relates directly to the size of the database itself. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to determine the number of mailboxes in a database; using two different methods. 62553
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Finding Users with Full Access to Mailboxes Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange allow you to identify the users in your organization that have full access permissions to one or more mailboxes. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to filter permissions to identify users that have complete access to a mailbox; and display them in a table. 62499
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Generating Mailbox Folder Reports Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the Exchange Management Shell to generate mailbox folder reports. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to enumerate folders and examine their individual sizes by generating mailbox folder reports. 62527
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Grant Users Full Access Permission to Mailbox Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can grant personnel full access to user mailboxes by using Exchange Management Shell commandlets. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to grant a user full access permission to other user's mailboxes. 62498
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Hiding Recipients From Address Lists Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can easily hide recipients from the global address list. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the HiddenFromAddressListEnabled parameter to hide the administrator account from the address list. 62514
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Importing and Exporting Mailboxes Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange allows administrators to use Exchange Management Shell cmdlets to import or export user and archive mailboxes to or from PST files. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to assign the Mailbox Import Export role; shows how to export users' and archive mailboxes to a PST file; and reviews the MailboxExportRequest status. 62524
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Importing User Photos in Active Directory Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange's Management Shell allows the import of Outlook user thumbnail photos into the Global Address List. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates the required attributes of user thumbnails; uses PowerShell cmdlets to import single and bulk user photos; and enables and disables the indicator attribute pointing Cached Mode Outlook clients to the thumbnails in Active Directory. 62520
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Logging Shell Sessions to a Transcript Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can save a lot of time and effort when you log Shell sessions to a transcript. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use a transcript to save commands; and the output that you have seen; in the Exchange Management Shell. 62504
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing ActiveSync; OWA; POP3; IMAP4 Mailbox Settings Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can configure Client Access options in order to manage how individual users connect to mailboxes hosted on the Exchange server. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to enable and disable mail client options; such as POP; OWA; ActiveSync; IMAP; and MAPI. 61696
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Archive Mailboxes Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange allows the creation and management of In-place Archive mailboxes and their size quotas using cmdlets in the Exchange Management Shell. In this video; Patrick Loner uses the Enable-Mailbox and Set-Mailbox commands along with Archive and other parameters to archive and set the size quotas of single and multiple existing mailboxes in identified databases. 62523
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Auto Replies and Out of Office Settings for a User Patrick Loner The Microsoft Exchange Management Shell allows you to configure out of office messages and auto replies on behalf of a user. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to configure the out of office and auto reply settings for a particular user. He then explains how to create a scheduled auto reply. 62517
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Disconnected Mailboxes Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange keeps disconnected mailboxes in the database for a certain period of time. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to reconnect disconnected mailboxes; or connect them to a new user account using the Exchange Management Shell. 62526
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Distribution Groups Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use distribution groups to send e-mail messages to multiple users and contacts; both inside and outside your organization. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the New-DistributionGroup commandlet to create a distribution group. 62509
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Domains or Forests Using Recipient Scope Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; the recipient scope parameter allows you to control what areas the management shell focuses on within the active directory. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to configure the management shell view to only look at a particular section of the active directory. 62500
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Mailbox Folder Permissions Patrick Loner You can use Exchange Management Shell to configure permissions. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to configure permissions at mailbox and at individual folder level. 62519
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Outlook Anywhere Settings Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange allow administrators to configure client access servers to accept RPC over HTTPS using Outlook Anywhere. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the Exchange Management Shell to review and configure Outlook Anywhere settings on an Exchange server. 61698
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Public Folder Mailboxes Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; the Exchange Management Shell allows you to create and manage Public Folder Mailboxes. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates the latest changes that affect Public Folder Mailboxes; as well as how to create and manage Public Folders and Public Folder Mailboxes. 62534
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Resource Mailboxes Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; a resource mailbox represents a conference room and equipment mailboxes; and is used to schedule resources. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the -Room parameter to create a conference room mailbox. 62510
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing the Mailbox Databases Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the Exchange Management Shell to create; configure; and manage mailbox databases. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to create a database; mount it; and then configure it so that it is excluded as a default location for new mailboxes. 62549
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing Transport Rules and Settings Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange allow administrators to scan and control traffic flowing through the transport components in a mail server. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to create a transport rule to perform specific actions when the conditions of the rule are met. 61701
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Managing User Access to Public Folders Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use Outlook roles in the Exchange Management Shell to change default Public Folder client permissions. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to change Public Folder permissions for a group. He also demonstrates how to add a group; and give that group a certain permission role. 62536
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Manually Configure Remote PowerShell Patrick Loner Remote PowerShell allows you to connect to the Exchange Management shell remotely and run commands on it without the Exchange Management tools being installed locally. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to manually configure Remote PowerShell. 62496
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Moving Databases and Logs to Another Location Patrick Loner When working with Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you might need to move databases and logs to another location. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use Exchange Management Shell cmdlets to modify the location of databases and logs. 62550
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Placing Mailboxes on In-Place Hold Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange 2013 allows you to search mailboxes and then place the results on hold. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the Exchange Management Shell cmdlets to place mailboxes on an in-place hold; and discover the uses of retention hold messages. 62529
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Previewing Dynamic Distribution Group Membership Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell allows you to create code utilizing the Exchange Management Shell to preview members of a dynamic distribution group in Exchange Server whose membership is based on specific recipient filters. In this video; Patrick Loner uses the Get-Recipient cmdlet and RecipientFilter parameter to create a variable; before creating a reusable function to preview dynamic distribution group membership. 62539
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Removing Disabled User Accounts From Distribution Groups Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell allows Exchange administrators using the Exchange Management Shell to identify and remove disabled user accounts from distribution groups in organizations; thereby avoiding unnecessary database overhead. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to iterate through distribution groups; filter out and remove disabled users from the group; and how to generate a report based on disabled accounts. 62543
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Reporting on Database Status Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange allow you to access the backup statuses of databases throughout the server environment. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to display the last full backup of a mailbox; and locate mailboxes that have not been recently backed up. 61694
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Reporting on Distribution Group Membership Patrick Loner Microsoft PowerShell allows administrators using cmdlets in Exchange Management Shell to report on distribution group membership in Exchange Server with minimal coding effort. In this video; Patrick Loner uses a foreach loop with Get-DistributionGroup and Get-DistributionGroupMember cmdlets to return a list of group members and the distribution group they're in; before exporting the data as a comma-separated values (CSV) file. 62537
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Reporting on Mailbox Creation Time Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; the Exchange Management Shell allows you to report on the creation of various mailboxes. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how you can view all recently created mailboxes using the Exchange Management Shell. 62528
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Reporting on Mailbox Database Size Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can easily determine the size of the mailbox database. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the Exchange Management Shell cmdlets to find the size of a mailbox database. 62552
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Reporting on Mailbox Size Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange Management Shell cmdlets allow administrators to produce; format; filter; and output reports on the size and attributes of mailboxes. In this video; Patrick Loner uses the Get-MailboxStatistics cmdlet to generate reports; pipes the data into a Format List; filters attributes; and outputs reports. 62521
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Reporting on Public Folder Statistics Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; the Exchange Management Shell allows you to create various kinds of reports on Public Folders and their use throughout your organization. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates the commands used to create reports for mailbox sizes; and reports for sizes and settings for individual folders. 62535
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Restoring Deleted Items From Mailboxes Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the Exchange Management Shell to restore items deleted or purged from user accounts. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how the restoration process works and how to go about restoring deleted or purged messages. 62533
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Scheduling Scripts to Run at a Later Time Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can automate the running of scripts from the scheduled task area outside of PowerShell and from within the management shell. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to schedule jobs to run by defining a task to launch PowerShell and run a script; and by registering a scheduled job cmdlet in the management shell. 62503
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Scripting an Exchange Server Installation Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange allows the scripted; unattended installations of single and multiple instances of Exchange Server in organizational and remote-office environments. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates both the unattended installation and scripted unattended installation of Exchange Server; using PowerShell ISE. 62506
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Searching the Administrator Audit Logs Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use the Exchange Management Shell to track administrative actions; as well as the users who performed those actions. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to access the Administrative Audit Log and search it for the information you need. 62548
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Sending SMTP E-mails Through PowerShell Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can easily send SMTP e-mails from within the management shell. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to send a report via e-mail by using the send mail message commandlet; defining the To; From; Subject; Body; and attachments sections of the mail; and formatting the report as a .csv file. 62502
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Setting Internal and External CAS URLs Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; it's necessary to set Internal and External URLs on the Client Access servers; especially in multi-site environments. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to configure the External URLs for various virtual directories from within the Exchange Management Shell. 61697
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Setting Storage Quotas for Mailboxes Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; it's important to set limits on the amount of space that can be used by mailboxes. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to set storage quotas at the database level; as well as for for individual mailboxes. 62530
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Using Explicit Credentials with PowerShell Cmdlets Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell; you can explicitly save credentials by using commandlets; allowing for a more efficient execution of the script. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to save credentials explicitly with PowerShell. 62497
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Working with Contacts Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can create mail-enabled users and mail-enabled contacts. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the New-MailContact commandlet to create a mail contact with the individual's first and last name; as well as their e-mail address. 62508
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Working with Distribution Group Membership Approval Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange Management Shell cmdlets allow administrators to manage distribution group membership restrictions and settings. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates distribution group membership join and depart restrictions; and adds a manager to a distribution group for which membership approval is required. 62545
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Working with Distribution Group Naming Policies Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange Management Shell cmdlets allow administrators to manage the policies and naming conventions of user-created distribution groups. In this video; Patrick Loner uses Exchange Management Shell cmdlets and attributes to create and modify the group policies and naming conventions of new and existing user-created distribution groups. 62544
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Working with Move Requests and Performing Mailbox Moves Patrick Loner Microsoft Exchange's online move requests allow users continued mailbox access while mailboxes are moved between databases from the Exchange Management Shell. In this video; Patrick Loner uses the New-MoveRequest to move single and batched mailboxes to target databases and generates statistical and status reports on the queued and completed requests. 62522
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Working with Recipient Filters Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can control which recipient objects you want to view or change. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the filter command to get a select group of objects based on specified criteria. 62512
Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange: Working with Role-Based Access Control Patrick Loner In Microsoft PowerShell and Exchange; you can use role-based access control to create roles and ensure that administrators have the appropriate permissions throughout the Exchange organization. In this video; Patrick Loner demonstrates how to use the Add-RoleGroupMember commandlet to add a user to a particular group and grant them permissions. 62505
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Access Service App David Dye Microsoft PowerShell provides cmdlets that allow you to easily manage Access Service applications that run in a SharePoint site collection. In this video; David Dye uses the Get-AccessServiceApplication cmdlet to return an Access Service application; before demonstrating how to specify the maximum duration to perform an operation; and how to create a new instance of an Access Service application. 62471
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Add a Site Column David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint provide farm administrators with the ability to add a custom site column across multiple sites in multiple SharePoint farms using PowerShell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create and configure a site column at the root of the site collection using variables to maintain the identical configuration across multiple site collections and farms. 62485
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Add Sandbox Solution David Dye You can use Microsoft PowerShell to deploy; configure; and manage Sandbox Solutions for SharePoint's site collection. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to utilize PowerShell to work with Sandbox Solutions. 62444
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Add Server Solution David Dye You can add a server solution to SharePoint using Microsoft PowerShell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to add; deploy; remove; and disable the server solution using PowerShell cmdlets. 62443
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Alerts David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint allow administrators to retrieve information on; create; and remove alerts associated with a site collection list. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to set variables and use a foreach loop to iterate through alerts on a specific list; and how to change the properties of an existing alert. 62490
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Alternate Access Map David Dye Microsoft SharePoints allows the use of PowerShell cmndlets to create; configure; and remove Alternate Access Mapping within a SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates a list of all available Alternate Access Maps; filters URLs for specific Web Applications; and creates and removes a new alternate URL. 62462
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Antivirus David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell; you can use cmdlets to create scripts that allow you to configure antivirus settings consistently across your SharePoint environment. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to assign antivirus settings to a service using the AllowDownload property; and uses the DownloadScanEnabled and UploadScanEnabled properties to determine whether files are scanned when they are transferred. 62479
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Backing Up David Dye You can use Microsoft PowerShell to backup SharePoint. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use PowerShell along with the Task Scheduler to schedule and automate the backing up of SharePoint files; as well as view the history of the backups. 62436
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Blocked File Extensions David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to create commands that let you query; configure; and remove blocked file extensions consistently across multiple SharePoint servers. In this video; David Dye uses the BlockedFileExtensions property to retrieve a list of file extensions that are blocked from sites in a web application; before demonstrating how to add and remove blocked file extensions. 62478
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Configuration Database David Dye You can use Microsoft PowerShell to create and execute various actions associated with Configuration Databases. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create a Configuration Database; work with it; and also how to remove a Configuration Database. 62446
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Configure Outgoing E-mail David Dye Microsoft SharePoint allows the use of PowerShell cmndlets to programmatically configure a SharePoint farm's Outgoing E-Mail Settings. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create a variable object containing SharePoint's global administration settings; and uses the PowerShell UpdateMailSettings parameter and arguments to change the farm's Outgoing E-Mail Settings. 62461
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Configure Usage and Data Collection David Dye Microsoft SharePoint allows the configuration; management; and maintenance of Usage and Data collection by PowerShell cmndlets. In this video; David Dye uses PowerShell cmndlets to removes the current SharePoint SPUsageApplication; creates a new one to collect usage information from the server; defines a database; and configures and confirms the new SPUsageApplication's identity. 62460
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Configuring Sharepoint David Dye You can use Microsoft PowerShell to configure SharePoint after the initial installation. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to configure SharePoint along with the different server roles and service applications. 62438
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Content Database David Dye You can use Microsoft SharePoint to create a new Content Database; but you can do the same thing programmatically using the Microsoft PowerShell Management Shell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create and remove a Content database in Microsoft PowerShell. 62447
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Content Types David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint provide farm administrators with the ability to manage; query; and create custom content types using PowerShell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to retrieve a list of content types within a site collection and programmatically create a custom content type using PowerShell. 62487
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Copying a Site David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to use existing site collections as templates for creating new site collections within SharePoint. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create a new site collection based on an existing one by using a PowerShell commandlet. 62495
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Create New Site Collection with Explicit Content Database David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to programatically create a SharePoint 2013 content database capable of holding a site collection. In this video; David Dye uses PowerShell cmndlets to create and configure a new site collection and explicitly define a new SPContentDatabase associated with the default Web App. 62458
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Create Web Application David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell; you can create and configure a web application for SharePoint. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use various cmdlets to configure and query the configuration of a SharePoint application. 62439
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Deleted Sites David Dye Once a site collection has been deleted; Microsoft SharePoint allows you to use site management cmdlets within PowerShell to display a list of deleted site collections and either restore them or permanently delete them from the farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use the Get-DeletedSite; Restore-DeletedSite; and Remove-DeletedSite cmdlets to query; restore; and remove deleted site collections. 62468
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Developer Dashboard David Dye The Developer Dashboard within Microsoft SharePoint provides information you can use to locate the cause of any of the running problems with your application. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to turn on; run; and turn off Developer Dashboard. 62463
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Diagnostic Logging David Dye The logging cmdlets in Microsoft PowerShell allow you to configure diagnostic settings consistently across the entire SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to specify where the log files will reside and restrict disk space usage for log files using the Set-SPDiagnosticConfig cmdlet and its parameters; before using the Set-SPLogLevel cmdlet to set the trace logging level. 62476
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Enable Remoting David Dye Microsoft SharePoint allows you to configure servers from within PowerShell to receive remote commands that affect the SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to enable remoting using the Enable-PSRemoting cmdlet and enable the Credential Security Support Provider (CredSSP) from within a PowerShell session before remoting in from a different server and adding a SharePoint snap-in. 62466
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Export Lists David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint enable administrators to use a PowerShell script to export a site collection list to a flat file. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to set variables for the URL; list name; and path; and how to use the TryGetList and Export-Csv methods to export a comma-delimited file. 62491
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Farm Admins David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to have multiple Farm Administrators with varying administrative permissions. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to add and configure Farm Administrators within a SharePoint Farm; using the farmAdministrators variable. 62465
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Features David Dye In Microsoft SharePoint and PowerShell; you can create custom Features on the SharePoint site. In this video; David Dye demonstrates where to find the Features folder in the Microsoft SharePoint backend; and how to install; remove; enable; and disable a single Feature; as well as how to enable multiple features in a subsite. 62445
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: General Commands David Dye In Microsoft SharePoint; the general commands available from within PowerShell allow you to perform a variety of tasks that include the assignment of variables and the configuration of settings within the SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye uses general commands in PowerShell to enable the Customer Experience Improvement Program; configure Bing Maps; and assign variables. 62470
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Import and Export Sites David Dye Microsoft PowerShell can be used to import and export site collections. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to export site collections into a CMP file and how to import a site collection using PowerShell. 62449
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: InfoPath Forms Service David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint provide administrators with the ability to query the InfoPath Forms Service configuration within a SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use PowerShell to configure all SharePoint environments identically. He then retrieves information on form templates; using the PowerShell Get cmdlet; and enables and disables specific templates. 62481
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Lists David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint provide SharePoint farm administrators with the ability to work with lists and list items directly within PowerShell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to set variables to retrieve lists and list items from a specific site collection by title and id and format them as a table. 62486
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Managed Accounts David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to easily manage your existing Managed Accounts. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to query and add Managed Accounts; as well as how to remove and configure existing Managed Accounts. 62451
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Managed Paths David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to add and configure Managed Paths for applications. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to add; configure; and remove a Managed Path in SharePoint. He also demonstrates how to query a managed path and Host Header Information using PowerShell. 62452
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Managing User Licenses David Dye Microsoft PowerShell provides cmdlets that allow you to manage supported SharePoint user licenses in the SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye uses the Get-SPUserLicense cmdlet to return a list of SharePoint licenses; before demonstrating how to create a new license mapping object and enable user-license enforcement from within PowerShell. 62473
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Piping David Dye You can pipe your results within a PowerShell cmdlet specifically for a SharePoint object. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to take the results from one cmdlet and pass it to another cmdlet; and then work with the result; or result set; within different cmdlets in a single query. 62441
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: PowerShell Variables David Dye You can create and utilize variables within the different cmdlets in Microsoft PowerShell within SharePoint. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to declare and initialize PowerShell variables. 62440
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Querying David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint allow administrators to retrieve property information from an object using PowerShell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to query properties using a Select statement within a PowerShell cmdlet; pipe variables; objects or Get statements to a Select statement; and pipe the results to a Sort. 62494
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Recovering Data From an Unattached Content Database David Dye Microsoft PowerShell provides database cmdlets that allow you to easily recover content from an unattached content database in a SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye uses the Dismount-SPContentDatabase cmdlet to detach a content database from its web application; before demonstrating how to use the ConnectAsUnattachedDatabase parameter with the Get-SPContentDatabase cmdlet to return a specific unattached database in the farm. 62477
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Resource Measures David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell; you can configure your SharePoint resource measures to reduce the resources used in a solution; limiting any weakening of the farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to configure your resource measures; using spcode variables and resource measures. 62464
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Restore David Dye You can use Microsoft PowerShell to restore all or some parts of the SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates the various levels of granularity at which SharePoint can be restored using PowerShell's backup history. 62437
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Retrieve Information About Content Database David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint; the SharePoint Management Shell can be used to retrieve various kinds of Content Database information. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to retrieve information on a Content Database using PowerShell and pipe the information results. 62448
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Save Site as a Site Template David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint allow administrators to specify and save a web as a template. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create a PowerShell script to create; name; describe; and save a web as a template; which can be used repeatedly throughout a SharePoint farm. 62489
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Search Service Crawl Content Source David Dye Microsoft PowerShell provides administrators with the ability to create; configure; and remove content sources within a SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to retrieve Search Service information to find available content sources; and ensure that content sources will be crawled to make search results available to the Search Service. 62482
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Search Service Crawl Rules David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint provide administrators with the ability to work with crawl rules in a Search Service application. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use PowerShell to create a script that uses cmdlets to configure; create; and remove crawl rules consistently across multiple SharePoint farms. This avoids potential errors when using Central Administration to configure each farm. 62483
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Search Service File Types David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint provide farm administrators with the ability to enable or disable various file types within the Search Service provider application in a SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to retrieve information on available file types; disable a file type; and then enable that file type using PowerShell cmdlets. 62484
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SharePoint Designer Settings David Dye Microsoft PowerShell provides cmdlets that allow you to configure Microsoft SharePoint Designer settings within a SharePoint farm. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use the allowDesigner property in PowerShell to enable and disable the use of SharePoint Designer in a web application; as well as how to configure the site collection administrators SharePoint Designer capabilities. 62472
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SharePoint Product Info David Dye Microsoft SharePoint allows you to easily return information about your SharePoint-related product components using cmdlets in PowerShell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use the Get-SPProduct cmdlet and its Local parameter to display SharePoint products installed on a local server; as well as how to retrieve additional detailed information and pipe the information to a text file. 62467
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Site Features David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint allow administrators to view; activate; and deactivate site features using PowerShell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create a script using the Get-SPFeature cmdlet to view the features of a particular site; and filter and sort results. He then activates and deactivates a feature using Enable and Disable. 62492
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SP Health Analysis Rule David Dye Microsoft PowerShell provides health monitoring cmdlets that allow you to manage health analyzer rules that are used by SharePoint Health Analyzer to monitor the farm. In this video; David Dye uses the Get-SPHealthAnalysisRule cmdlet to retrieve a specific health analysis rule before using cmdlets to disable and then re-enable the rule. 62475
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SPSecurityTokenServiceConfig David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint; you can query and configure Security Tokens. In this video; David Dye demonstrates which commandlets to use when querying a Security Token and how to configure a Security Token. 62453
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SPShellAdmin David Dye You can use PowerShell to add and remove Shell administrators for any SharePoint database. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to add; remove; and query the Shell Administrators. 62450
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SPSite Information David Dye Microsoft SharePoint's SPSite object allows the farm administrator to extract; configure; and manage site collection data. In this video; David Dye uses the SPSite cmndlet to demonstrate multiple ways to manage site collection and SPWeb data by piping information between cmndlets. 62456
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SPSiteAdministration David Dye Microsoft SharePoint allows farm administrators to view information about site collections using the Get-SPSiteAdministration cmdlet in PowerShell and return different information based on specified parameters. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to return information about all site collections; write the information to a text file; refine the query; and determine disk space usage; in each case utilizing Get-SPSiteAdministration. 62469
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SPUser David Dye Microsoft SharePoint's SPUser object allows the configuration of SPWeb security within site collections. In this video; David Dye uses PowerShell cmndlets to demonstrate how to create and add users to existing roles within a site collection subsite or SPWeb. 62454
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: SPWeb Information David Dye Microsoft SharePoint's SPWeb object allows the creation and configuration of subsites and the querying of their data. In this video; David Dye uses the SharePoint interface and PowerShell cmndlets; parameters; and methods to create; query; and edit SPWebs. 62455
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Start and Stop SP Service David Dye The service application cmdlets in Microsoft PowerShell allow you to start; stop; and manage service applications across farms in SharePoint. In this video; David Dye uses the Get-ServiceInstance cmdlet to return the status of a specific service instance on a particular server; before demonstrating how to start and stop the service instance from within PowerShell. 62474
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Timer Job and Log Information David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows the retrieval and management of SharePoint log information as well as the status of timer jobs. In this video; David Dye uses PowerShell cmndlets to Get an identified timer job and call and format parameterized data from it; before using the Get-SPLogEvent cmndlet to filter and list category-level log data. 62459
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Upgrade Content Database David Dye Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint allow administrators to use PowerShell to upgrade content databases across a site. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to test whether content databases can be upgraded; list the content databases on a site; and upgrade the content databases once all issues have been cleared. 62493
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Upgrade Status David Dye Microsoft PowerShell cmdlets allow you to verify the upgrade status of the different objects within a SharePoint farm by providing details about the status of each upgrade session. In this video; David Dye uses the Get-SPFarm cmdlet to return a SharePoint local farm; before demonstrating how to extract the upgrade information and pipe it to an external file. 62480
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Working with PowerShell David Dye Microsoft Windows PowerShell; compatible with SharePoint's syntax and object model; lacks the SharePoint objects; namespaces and assemblies loaded into the SharePoint Management Shell. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to work with SharePoint directly from within Windows PowerShell after loading the required SharePoint assemblies. 62457
Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint: Working with Services David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell and SharePoint; a number of services are exposed in the Windows Operating System allowing you to interact with them. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to query the status of the service; stop; start; and change the service start-up mode. 62442
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Create Alert David Dye Microsoft PowerShell integrates directly with SQL Server; allowing you to perform administrative tasks through the use of its commandline interface and corresponding set of cmdlets. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use cmdlets to create error alerts in SQL Server Agent. 61385
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Create SQL Audit David Dye PowerShell allows you to create and configure SQL audits. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create an audit in PowerShell; how to create and set the destination for the audit; and finally enable the audit. 61359
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Displaying Results in Grid View David Dye In PowerShell; you can display results using a grid view. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to install and enable grid view in Windows PowerShell; and explains the process of showing results in grid view in SQL PowerShell. 61357
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Enable PS Remoting on SQL Instance David Dye When using Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server; you can enable PS remoting on SQL instances. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to remote PowerShell commands to a network instance of SQL Server. 61353
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Execute SQL Agent Job David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell; you can execute SQL Server Agent Jobs that have already been created. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use PowerShell to execute the previously created GetToday SQL Server Agent Job to supply the current date. 61367
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Find Disk Space for SQL Files David Dye PowerShell has a number of commandlets available so you can analyze disk space on a disk or in a file group. In this video; David Dye demonstrates the process used to analyze the disk space available for SQL Server files. 61356
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Introduction David Dye When dealing with database administration; SQL Server can be integrated with PowerShell using PowerShell's command line interface and SQL Server Management Studio. This preloads modules and assemblies representing SQL Server within SQL PowerShell. In this video; David Dye introduces the PowerShell and SQL Server interfaces and shows how SQL can integrate into PowerShell. 61338
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Loading the SMO Assemblies into PowerShell David Dye When using Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server; loading SQL Server Management Objects (SMO) assemblies provides access to .NET objects within PowerShell that are designed to allow easy programmatic management of SQL Server. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to load an SMO assembly into PowerShell and highlights the difference between doing so in PowerShell and SQL PowerShell. 61341
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Managing Client Network Protocols with WMI David Dye When working with Microsoft SQL Server; the PowerShell cmdlets used with Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) allow you to carry out system administration tasks such as managing client network protocols. In this video; David Dye uses the Microsoft.SqlServer.Management.Smo.Wmi namespace's ManagedComputer class to access and configure client protocols using WMI on an instance of Microsoft SQL Server. 61347
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Managing SQL Server Services David Dye Managing SQL Server services using Microsoft's Windows PowerShell cmdlets allows you to easily and efficiently perform administrative tasks that include retrieving information; running; and stopping services. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use PowerShell cmdlets to retrieve information about a service; filter the information; modify the properties of a service; and start and stop a service. 61346
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: PowerShell and the SQLConnection .NET Class David Dye When using Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server; the SqlConnection class allows you to work with SQL Server connections using .NET directly within PowerShell. In this video; David Dye uses a SqlConnection to establish a connection with a SQL Server database before passing a query; filling a DataAdapter with a table; and displaying the information; all from within PowerShell. 61340
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: PowerShell from SSMS David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to run cmdlets directly within a Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio query using SQLCMD mode. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to enable Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio's SQLCMD mode before creating a table he populates using PowerShell cmdlets. 61364
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: PowerShell Job Step David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server; you can use a SQL Server Agent Job within a PowerShell Job Step. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to create an Agent Job by using a GETDATE script to send output to a file. 61363
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Restore All Databases from Most Recent Backup David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell you can use commandlets to restore all databases in a SQL instance. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to iterate through each one of the most recent backups to restore all databases. 61355
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Retrieve SQL Agent Job History David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell; the SQL Server Agent Job History can provide a range of useful information. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use PowerShell to retrieve a SQL Server Agent Job History; how to review that history; and filter it using PowerShell commandlets. 61368
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Send Query Results Email David Dye Microsoft PowerShell integrates directly with SQL Server; letting you perform administrative tasks through the use of its commandline interface and corresponding set of cmdlets. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to use the cmdlets to send an email containing a result set gathered from a SQL Server Query. 61383
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: sqlps Utility David Dye Microsoft PowerShell allows you to manually input assemblies in Windows PowerShell; or have certain assemblies already available in SQL PowerShell. In this Video; David Dye demonstrates the differences between Windows PowerShell and SQL PowerShell. 61358
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Use PowerShell Utility to Create Stored Procedure David Dye In Microsoft PowerShell; you can use the PowerShell Utility to create a Stored Procedure. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to utilize a PowerShell utility in order to be able to create a SQL Server Stored Procedure within an instance of SQL. 61371
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Working with Databases Using SMO David Dye When using SQL Server PowerShell from within Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio; SQL Server Management Objects (SMO) provides the .NET namespace that allows you to easily work with SQL Server databases using preloaded cmdlets. In this video; David Dye uses SMO to access SQL Server object information using PowerShell cmdlets. 61343
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Working with SQL Server Using SMO David Dye SQL Server PowerShell is a Windows PowerShell module that ensures that SQL Server Management Objects (SMO) is preloaded; allowing you to work directly with SQL Server. In this video; David Dye demonstrates how to view all of the properties; methods; and objects associated with a SQL Server instance using SQL PowerShell from within Windows Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio. 61342
Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server: Working with Tables Using SMO David Dye When using Microsoft PowerShell and SQL Server; SQL Server Management Objects (SMO) allows you to easily and efficiently work with tables by utilizing the .NET namespace. In this video; David Dye uses a Script object to script out the tables within a database and generates the DDL script into another instance using SMO in SQL PowerShell. 61344
Microsoft PowerShell: Adding Folders to the Index Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can use components from a .NET compiled DLL to get features that aren't natively provided with commandlets. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to examine the existing collection of search paths; and how to add a new search path to be catalogued. 61413
Microsoft PowerShell: Adding Text to Word with PowerShell Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell allows you to edit documents once you have created an instance of; or are connected to; the Word COM application. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to add text to a Word document using Office COM automation objects. 61706
Microsoft PowerShell: An Introduction to Hash Tables Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can create a hash table; which is something like a two-dimensional array. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to create a hash table; and how to access and change information in the hash table using the set_item; get_item; Sort-Order; and GetEnumerator methods. 61391
Microsoft PowerShell: Binding to Existing Applications Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell allows you to connect to existing applications and control them through COM automation. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the New-Object command to create multiple instances of COM objects at the application level; explains the errors that arise; connects to an instantiated app when needed; and shows you how to use a try...catch block to handle exception errors. 61442
Microsoft PowerShell: Cleaning Up After Your Office Scripts Byron Hynes When using COM automation with Microsoft PowerShell; it is important to clean up appropriately after scripting to avoid running issues at a later date. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates some of the ways you can clean up and release objects fully once scripting is complete. 61704
Microsoft PowerShell: Cmdlets and Modules Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can use commandlets to perform tasks. These commandlets are sometimes organized into modules of different types and with different functions. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates the fundamental commandlets and modules including WhatIf; Get-Command; and Get-Help; and explains how to create a module. 61393
Microsoft PowerShell: Creating a Module Byron Hynes Creating your own modules in PowerShell allows you to have greater control when it comes to managing your PowerShell session. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to create a custom module based on a function. 61405
Microsoft PowerShell: Creating a New Application Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell allows you to instantiate instances of applications belonging to the Microsoft Office Common Object Model (COM). In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the New-Object command to instantiate instances of top-level COM object applications and background processes in the Microsoft Office Suite; access enumerations by adding required Interop assemblies; and use third-party scripts to instantiate applications. 61441
Microsoft PowerShell: Enabling Remote Desktop Byron Hynes Using Microsoft PowerShell scripts; you can enable Remote desktop on local and remote computers allowing system administrators to easily and efficiently connect to; and manage; servers. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to access a WMI object and use the SetAllowTSConnection() method within a process block to enable Remote Desktop access both locally and remotely. 61423
Microsoft PowerShell: Error Handling Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; it's good practice to understand errors and know how to handle them in your script. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates the error types that can occur during execution; how they are logged and handled in PowerShell; and how Try; Catch; and Finally statements allow you to control script flow when you encounter errors. 61397
Microsoft PowerShell: Exploring Commands Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can gain access to the lists of various commands available in each instance of PowerShell. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to access lists which contain different kinds of command information using the Get-Command cmdlet. He also explains how to use Get-Command to lead a command. 61388
Microsoft PowerShell: Finding Empty Folders Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell can automatically find empty folders on your system. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the where-object command to filter through your computer to find empty folders. 61419
Microsoft PowerShell: Implicit Modules Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell provides developers with the ability to load modules implicitly into a PowerShell session. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how default modules are automatically loaded depending on which commands are issued; particularly as this relates to implicit remoting and running remote sessions. 61407
Microsoft PowerShell: Introducing Out-GridView Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell provides developers with the Out-GridView to view and work with return values in a live environment. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates the difference between the plain output of commands; such as Format-List and Get-Process; and what that output looks like when piped to Out-Grid View. 61410
Microsoft PowerShell: Listing File Extensions Byron Hynes With Microsoft PowerShell; you can analyze the types of files you have in your file system. In this video; Byron Hynes uses the Get-ChildItem command to list the groups of files and the file extensions on your system. 61417
Microsoft PowerShell: Listing Software Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell allows you to expose; list; and format your network's software installations. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how the MSI Installer writes an Uninstall key for each application to the relevant registry path; enabling you to use the Get-ChildItem cmdlet to swiftly extract the necessary data directly from the registry. 61436
Microsoft PowerShell: Opening a File Using Its Default Handler Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell provides developers with the ability to open files; directories; and URLs using their default handlers. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates several ways to invoke programs and open items; such as using the Invoke-Item command for files and applications; and the Start-Process command for URLs. 61409
Microsoft PowerShell: Profiles Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can create Profiles to control and automate your own PowerShell environment. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to set profiles up the way you want; and create modules; variables; and custom functions that are available for each session you start in a specific shell. 61399
Microsoft PowerShell: Removing Folders From the Index Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can use components from a .NET compiled DLL to get features that aren't natively provided with commandlets. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to collect search management tools into functions; put those functions into a module; and remove folders to be catalogued. 61414
Microsoft PowerShell: Removing Software Using Windows Registry Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell allows you to bypass WMI and uninstall software from your system using information contained in the Windows registry. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the Get-ChildItem command and /X uninstallString to locate; combine; and uninstall 32 and 64-bit programs from the registry; before exploring issues raised by the /I uninstallString and ClickOnce deployment tool. 61438
Microsoft PowerShell: Removing Software Using WMI Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell allows you to use the Get-WmiObject command; Uninstall() method; and product key to speedily uninstall software from your computer or network. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use the gwmi alias to search for Win32_Product class program objects he then stores as variables including the product key; before using the Uninstall() method to remove multiple applications. 61437
Microsoft PowerShell: Smooth Operators Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can use specialized operators which work with strings and allow you turn a string into an array and vice versa. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates the use of splits; joins; contains; and match specialized operators by showing what the function of each is before giving an example of how it can be used. 61389
Microsoft PowerShell: Snap-Ins Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; a snap-in is a dynamic link library (.dll) compiled in .NET that once installed allows you to extend PowerShell by adding cmdlets and providers to your PowerShell session. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to add; remove; and manage snap-ins through PowerShell commands while discussing the reasons for snap-ins being deprecated in favour of modules. 61398
Microsoft PowerShell: Splatting Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; Splatting refers to the passing of parameters to a cmdlet using a pre-defined block which has a Hash Table. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how Splatting can be used to bundle parameters to send to a command. 61403
Microsoft PowerShell: Start-Job Cmdlet Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can use job management tools to manage long running tasks and avoid being held up by blocking calls. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how to use job management tools in remoting and for automated job scheduling. 61401
Microsoft PowerShell: Using Eventing Byron Hynes Microsoft PowerShell provides developers with the ability to work with events; because PowerShell is an object-oriented language not just a scripting language. In this video; Byron Hynes uses a timer to demonstrate the difference between listening for an event; polling for an event; and waiting for an event. 61408
Microsoft PowerShell: Using the Windows Registry - Adding/Updating Values Byron Hynes In Microsoft PowerShell; you can not only read the registry; but add and update values. In this video; Byron Hynes demonstrates how you can manipulate registry values on a local and a remote machine. 61429
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Activate Cross-Site Collection Publishing Feature David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's publishing and authoring site templates enable administrators to publish specific lists; libraries; and term sets to different site collections using the Cross-Site Collection Publishing feature. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to access and enable Cross-Site Collection Publishing on specific templates. 53055
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Activating the Cross Site Publication Feature David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows for cross-site publishing with multiple functionalities built into authoring and publishing sites using templates designed for collaboration. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create an authoring site collection using the Developer's template. 53054
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Add a Managed Account David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows the administrator to register managed service accounts created in Active Directory. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to register and configure a managed service account for a specific service application. 52495
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Add a Server Name Mapping David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 provides users with the ability to add mappings for specific sites to override how server names appear in search results. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a new server name mapping. 53002
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Adding Documents with Windows Explorer David Santana SharePoint 2013 in conjunction with Windows Explorer allows you to easily add documents to your documents library. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how Windows Explorer is used in combination with SharePoint to upload a file to a shared documents library. 52463
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Adding Enterprise Key Word David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to group enterprise keywords in keyword sets; columns; or 'folksonomies' that display to and are shared by users and applications; enabling and filtering searches while providing you; the administrator; with metadata consistency. In this video; David Santana accesses SharePoint 2013's Enterprise Metadata and Keywords Settings page to enable an Enterprise Keywords column and Keyword synchronization. 53018
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Apps David Santana SharePoint 2013 organizes search items into categories; enabling you to easily access and add Noteworthy and other apps you can add to your site; arranged by name or time of listing. In this video; David Santana uses the new SharePoint search feature on the TeamSite page to access Your Apps in Site Contents. 52452
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Assign Badges David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to assign the badges you have created. In this video; David Santana shows you how to assign a badge to a specific member. 52172
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Assign Office Web Apps Service Application Connections David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables administrators to assign Office Web App Service Application connections or associations. In this video; David Santana edits a group of services; disabling a service associated with a service application. 53012
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Change a Managed Account Password David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to change managed account passwords from the Central Administration page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set; confirm; and configure a new password value for a managed service account. 52498
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Change Site Collection Administrators David Santana SharePoint 2013 provides administrators with the ability to change the primary and secondary site collection administrators by using the Site Collection Administrators settings in Central Management. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to change site collection administrators. 52473
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Change the SharePoint Farm Account David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows the administrator to change the farm account from the Central Administration page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to change and verify a farm account. 52496
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Checking Out and In a Publishing Site David Santana SharePoint 2013 uses a versioning control that enables site administrators to check out site pages; edit them; check them back in with comments for fellow administrators; and publish them. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to check out and edit pages; save and check them back in; and publish them. 52478
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Community Settings David Santana Community Settings in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to manage how visitors contribute to your site discussions. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to manage the community by changing the properties. 52174
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure a Document Set David Santana Configuring a document set in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to link specific documents in a set. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create a content type and add to an existing group. 52180
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure a Result Source Rule David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to create and configure query rules for result sources. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add a new query rule and to configure it for a specific result source. 53008
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Alternate Access Mappings David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to configure alternate access mapping; thereby ensuring that URLs are suitably presented to users accessing a particular site. In this video; David Santana provides a detailed overview of how administrators are able to configure alternate access mappings from within the Central Administration store. 52467
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure and Start Document Conversion David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to configure document conversion in Central Administration; thereby providing users with the opportunity to convert documents from one format to another. In this video; David Santana starts the services needed to enable document conversion in SharePoint 2013. 52488
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure and Start SharePoint Services David Santana In Microsoft SharePoint 2013; administrators have the ability to start and stop services through the SharePoint Central Administration web site that are to be deployed as service applications across sites throughout a farm. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how use the Central Administration web site to start and stop services. 52490
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Crawler Impact Rules David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to configure crawler impact rules. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add a new rule to adjust the load that the crawler applies to a specific content source. 53003
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Custom Application Proxy Group David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to easily create custom Application Proxy Groups. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a custom Application Proxy Group comprising several Application Proxies on a selected Web Application. 52502
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Diagnostic and Logging David Santana SharePoint 2013's Diagnostic Logging page allows administrators to configure diagnostic and logging reports; using event throttling to determine the data captured by Windows and trace logs. In this video; David Santana reviews logging options by category; event; and service before configuring and creating a set of administration event log files. 52484
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Diagnostic Logging David Santana In Microsoft SharePoint 2013; administrators can use diagnostic logging to determine the severity of issues; prevent event log flooding; and allocate time and storage resources to event and trace logs. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure diagnostic logging. 53013
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure File Types David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 provides you with the ability to add specific file types and configure them to a crawling database. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to delete and add a file type to include in your search. 52999
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Health Analyzer Timer Jobs David Santana The functionality of SharePoint 2013's Health Analyzer depends on the configuration of the timer jobs collecting and logging its data. In this video; David Santana enables Health Data Collection; explains the functions of the timer jobs listed in the Job Definitions page; and shows you how to edit them. 52485
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Incoming E-mail Settings in Central Administration David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables you to set up and configure incoming e-mail; directory management services; and incoming e-mail server settings. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure and verify the optimal SMTP settings for incoming e-mail. 53027
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Microblogging David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators who have logged into the Central Administration web site to configure the new My Sites microblogging feature; which lets users follow people; sites; and documents. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure microblogs from the SharePoint Central Administration web site. 52185
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Outgoing E-mail Address for Web Apps David Santana As an administrator; Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables you to specify your SMTP server settings and configure outgoing e-mail on your SharePoint installation. In this video; David Santana configures an SMTP server with the appropriate domains; addresses; and character set. 53034
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Outgoing E-mail Settings in Central Administration David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to configure the outgoing e-mail settings in central administration. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to access the system settings to configure the outgoing e-mail settings. 53029
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Password Change Settings David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to configure password change settings from the Central Administration page. For example; you can be notified of password expiry statuses and automatic password changes. In this video; David Santana configures password change e-mail notification; account monitoring process; and automatic password change settings. 52497
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Quotas and Locks David Santana As an administrator; SharePoint 2013 allows you to configure the quotas and locks for a specific quota template through the Site Collection Quotas and Locks page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the Site Collection Quotas and Locks page to configure a quota template. 52472
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Ratings David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows you to activate and configure two types of Rating settings that enable users to rate documents in a document library. In this video; David Santana uses the Library Ribbon to enable Rating settings before applying Star Ratings to documents in a library. 52447
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure RSS Feeds David Santana RSS feeds in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allow administrators or users to follow a discussion or a site page. In this video; David Santana shows you how to choose the RSS feature and synchronize it to a site page. 52156
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Self-Service Site Creation David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to create a specific site collection within their My Sites. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure self-service site creation. 52475
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure SharePoint Health Analyzer Rules David Santana SharePoint 2013's Health Analyzer enables you to configure rules set on specific timer jobs. In this video; David Santana uses the Health Analyzer Rule Definitions settings to configure a new rule. 52487
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure SharePoint Server Farm to Use Office Web Apps David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to configure SharePoint Server Farm to use Microsoft Office Web Apps. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up SharePoint Server Farm to use Microsoft Office Web Apps. 53031
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure SMPT on SharePoint Server David Santana Microsoft's Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager and New SMTP Domain Wizard enable you to configure Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) on your SharePoint Server. In this video; David Santana uses the IIS Manager to set authentication and relay restriction configurations and allocate a server IP address; before specifying an SMTP domain name and restarting the SMTP service. 53025
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure SSL for Central Administration David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 provides you with the ability to configure SSL for Central Administration. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to access the SharePoint Central Administration site and assign a specific port for SSL. 52501
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure the Default Content Access Account David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to configure the default content access account. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to specify the account to use as the default account when crawling content. 53001
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configure Usage and Health Data Collection David Santana SharePoint 2013's Health Analyzer's Log Collection Schedule enables you to configure data collection. In this video; David Santana configures the Log Collection Schedule and specifies a default Windows authentication server to import collected data. 52486
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Configuring Managed Properties David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 provides users with the ability to configure managed properties. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a new managed property; configure its settings; and then search for the property just created. 53004
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Confirm Site Use and Deletion David Santana SharePoint 2013 facilitates the freeing up of resources from unused sites by enabling administrators to send confirmation requests to site owners and automate the deletion of site collections if use is not confirmed. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the Site Use Confirmation and Deletion page in SharePoint 2013. 52470
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Connect a Publishing Site to a Catalog David Santana In SharePoint 2013; you can connect a publishing site to another site collection's lists or libraries so they can be used as a catalog of available files. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to select and connect to a catalog; and integrate the catalog into a site. 48328
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Connecting a SharePoint 2013 List with Outlook David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 lets site users collaborate more efficiently by connecting and synchronizing SharePoint contact lists with Microsoft Outlook; enabling the data to be viewed and edited in the Outlook interface and when not connected to SharePoint. In this video; David Santana uses the Connect to Outlook option in SharePoint 2013 to connect a SharePoint contact list with Outlook. 53044
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Connecting SharePoint 2013 Calendars with Outlook David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to connect a SharePoint calendar to Microsoft Outlook that can be viewed and edited alongside your main Outlook calendar using the Outlook interface; even when you're offline. In this video; David Santana uses the Connect to Outlook option in SharePoint 2013 to connect a SharePoint calendar with Outlook. 53045
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Crawl a Content Source David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to crawl content sources. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to start an incremental crawl on a specific content source. 53005
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Best Bet David Santana SharePoint 2013's SearchCenter interface allows administrators to create query rules or best bets by configuring query conditions and actions. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to name and configure a search query rule or best bet. 53009
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Content Source David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to create content sources for specific crawl servers. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add and configure a new content source that will perform a crawl on a server other than local SharePoint sites. 52996
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Crawl Rule David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to create rules for crawling their content sources. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and configure a crawl rule for a specific site. 52998
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Crawl Schedule David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to create and edit a crawl schedule for their content sources. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to edit and reschedule a specific crawl schedule. 52997
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Document Workspace David Santana In Microsoft SharePoint 2013; the Team Site; which has taken the place of the Document Workspace; allows you to create a custom Document Workspace where you and your colleagues can share tools and work together. In this video; David Santana describes some of the available apps in SharePoint 2013 before creating a custom Document Workspace. 53017
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Managed Metadata Column David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables administrators with the required managed lists permissions to append term sets to lists and columns once they've been created. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create; manage; and customize; a column for managed metadata using the Term Set Manager. 52505
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a My Site Collection David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables administrators who have logged into the Central Administration web site to create My Site host site collections. In this video; David Santana uses the Enterprise site template; My Site Host; to create a My Site host site collection. 52186
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a New Web App David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows administrators; using the Create New Web Application screen; to build claims or forms-based IIS web applications using Windows authentication to support site collections. In this video; David Santana uses SharePoint Web Services and the Create New Web Application screen to create a new IIS web site application and content database; before returning to the Site Collection page. 52479
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Publishing Page David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to easily create a site page; which; when checked out to you; is not editable by anyone else in your organization. Nor will it be visible to site visitors before publication. In this video; David Santana uses the Add a page dialog box to create an editable site page checked out to you. 52446
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Result Source David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 provides you with the ability to create a result source to limit the scope of your search results. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to add and configure a new result source; or search scope. 53007
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Service Account for Web Apps David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to create a service account for web apps. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure a service account for web apps in the Active Directory administrative center. 53032
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Service Account to Run Managed Metadata David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's managed metadata service application enables the use of managed metadata and allows you to share content types across site collections and web applications. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create and configure a new managed metadata service account. 53039
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Service Account to Run Word Automation Services David Santana You can; after defining Word Automation Services as a user in Windows PowerShell; create a user account enabling its use by Microsoft SharePoint 2013. In this video; David Santana uses Windows PowerShell to register Word Automation Services as an Active Directory user before he creates and configures a Word Automation Services account. 53041
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Service Application David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 uses service applications such as those for Access; Excel; and InfoPath that require service applications to be created by the administrator for them to work. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a service application in SharePoint 2103 Central Administration. 52492
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Site Page David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to easily create a site page using a template of your choice. You do this through the Sites and workspaces feature located on the Site Settings page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to name and configure a new site page; as well as select the appropriate site template. 52453
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create a Wiki Page David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 lets you create wiki sites that allows groups of people in an organization to quickly capture and share ideas. In this video; David Santana creates and edits a wiki site in SharePoint. 53015
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create Active Directory Security Groups David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables you to manage site users by assigning permission levels to security groups instead of to individual users or Active Directory Domain Services. In this video; David Santana creates; names; and configures a security group from the Active Directory Administrative Center and then adds a user to the group. 53043
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create an Asset Library David Santana Creating an asset library in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to upload specific images and video files. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create and add files to an asset library. 52176
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create an E-mail Enabled Announcement List David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to create an e-mail enabled announcement list. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set up and name an announcement list and then configure incoming e-mail settings. 53028
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create Badges David Santana Creating a badge in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to apply it to specific members for their achievements and any additional contributions. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create and apply a badge. 52171
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create Categories David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to create categories to locate specific post and discussions. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create a category. 52154
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create Categories in Blogs David Santana Creating categories in blogs in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 helps users navigate to the correct blog. In this video; David Santana shows you how to create a category. 52170
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create DNS Record for Domain and SharePoint Site David Santana Microsoft's Domain Name Server (DNS) Manager enables you to create a DNS record for your SMTP server role. In this video; David Santana uses the DNS Manager to create a new Host (A) record for the SMTP server role configured on the SharePoint server at the same IP address. 53026
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create Server Farm Account David Santana You can create a Microsoft SharePoint 2013 server farm account through your Active Directory Administrative Center. In this video; David Santana logs into the Active Directory Administrative Center and provides the details needed to set up a new; password-protected user account. 53020
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create Site Collections David Santana By using the Central Administration store in SharePoint 2013; administrators can create site collections; which are a grouping of sites under a top-level site sharing common administrative pages and site settings. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a site collection in SharePoint 2013. 52468
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Create SQL Server Alias David Santana You can use Microsoft SQL Server's SQL Server Client Network Utility to create a SQL Server alias for a database created for use by SharePoint 2013. In this video; David Santana launches the SQL Server Client Network Utility from both the Windows 32-bit and 64-bit system folders in File Explorer; and enters a SQL Server alias in each instance. 53022
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Delete Lists Using View David Santana Deleting items from lists in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is possible using View Item. In this video; David Santana shows you how to remove an item to the Recycle Bin. 52140
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Delete Site Collections David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows the site owner to permanently delete a site collection. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to delete a site collection through the Central Administration store. 52469
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Detach a Content Database David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to detach and perform maintenance on ? or move ? a content database through the Manage Content Database Settings page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the Manage Content Database Settings page to detach a database from the server. 52480
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Disable Loop Back Checking David Santana You can enable access to IIS-hosted domains; site collections; and applications on your Microsoft SharePoint 2013 Server by disabling the default loop back check in your system registry. In this video; David Santana uses Microsoft's Registry Editor to access and edit the BackConnectionHostNames entry before resetting IIS from Windows PowerShell. 53033
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Document Set Settings David Santana Document Set Settings in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to customize a document set. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to configure your document set. 52181
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Edit a Publishing Page David Santana Editing a publishing site page in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is simple and easy. In this video; David Santana shows you how to show the Ribbon interface and edit a publishing site page. 52182
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Edit a Thesaurus File David Santana In Microsoft SharePoint 2013; the Thesaurus in not editable; like it was in SharePoint 2010. Instead; you need to use Managed Properties to create specific searches and properties. In this video; David Santana introduces the Managed Properties page; where administrators can view; create; or modify managed properties. 53010
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Editing in Office Web Apps David Santana SharePoint 2013; when used in conjunction with Office Web Apps; allows you to view and edit Word; Excel; PowerPoint; and OneNote documents in your web browser. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to open and edit a document using an Office Web App. 52465
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Editing Properties in Manage Group David Santana Editing properties in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is easy using the Manage group. In this video; David Santana shows you how to perform this task. 52141
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Enable a Record Declaration David Santana By configuring record declaration; Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to create and store records within specific lists or libraries on a site. In this video; David Santana uses the Record Declaration Settings in SharePoint to enable the manual declaration of records at the site level. 53016
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Enable Document Conversion David Santana Before users can convert documents from one format to another using the document conversion in Microsoft SharePoint 2013; the feature first needs to be enabled by the Site administrator. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to enable and configure document conversion in SharePoint. 52489
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Enable SMPT on SharePoint Server David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's Add Roles and Features Wizard allows you to set up your e-mail server on the same server on which SharePoint is deployed. In this video; David Santana uses the Add Roles and Features Wizard to install the SMTP server feature. 53024
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Enable TCP IP Connectivity in SQL Server David Santana You can use Microsoft's SQL Server Configuration Manager to enable TCP/IP connectivity; thereby enabling your SharePoint 2013 server farm to communicate with your SQL Server databases. In this video; David Santana enables TCP/IP connectivity through the SQL Server Configuration Manager; reviews SQL Server's TCP/IP properties; and restarts the MSSSQLSERVER Service. 53021
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Explore a Publishing Site David Santana The publishing site in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is user friendly. In this video; David Santana discusses how this feature creates a friendlier and more inviting and intuitive site for content authors. 52183
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Explore Document Libraries David Santana Document libraries in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 offer you enhanced user experience. In this video; David Santana shows you how use the callouts to do inline editing and how to drag and drop files to the library. 52179
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Explore Query Crawl Logs David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to search and review the query crawl logs. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to view the crawl logs and to search for the crawl history on specific sites. 53000
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Extending Web Application to Another IIS Website David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to extend or isolate web applications to other Internet Information Services (IIS) sites; or zones sharing content with users. In this video; David Santana uses SharePoint 2013's Extend option to extend and configure the port; authentication; and sign-in page of a web application to a zone. 53051
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Hidden Ribbon Interface David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to access the Ribbon interface; which remains hidden from the end user; on your TeamSite and NewDocumentLibrary pages. In this video; David Santana shows you how to use tabs to access the SharePoint 2013 Ribbon interface from your TeamSite and NewDocumentLibrary pages; and introduces additional options that have been added to the Ribbon. 52449
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Install Active Directory Certification Services David Santana With Microsoft SharePoint 2013; you can install Active Directory Certificate Services (ADCS) and its related services; in order to acquire certificates from a certification authority. In this video; David Santana uses the Server Manager to install ADCS. 52500
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Installing Workflow Manager David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's Workflow Manager 1.0 Wizard and SharePoint Management Shell enable administrators to use Workflow Manager on the SharePoint Server to manage HTTP and HTTPS requests. In this video; David Santana installs Workflow Manager and uses the Register-SPWorkflowService command and WorkflowHostURI to register the service on his host site. 53050
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Interactive Options Hover Panel David Santana SharePoint 2013's hover panel offers previews; informational data; and interactive sharing and editing functionalities without having to log in to a site or document. In this video; David Santana activates the hover panel and explores its features. 52458
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Join a Community David Santana Joining a community in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is vital. In this video; David Santana shows you how to navigate to a community site and join as a member. 52165
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Leave a Community David Santana Leaving a community in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is important. In this video; David Santana shows you how to navigate to a community page and leave the community. 52166
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Logging In and Logging Out David Santana Logging in and logging out of a Microsoft SharePoint 2013 team site is important when you leave your desk or if you are logged in remotely. In this video; David Santana shows you how to use the familiar user interface of SharePoint 2013. 52184
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Make Term Set Available for Tagging David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's Term Store Management Tool enables site collection administrators to manage term sets and make them available for tagging for consumption by other sites. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the Term Store Management Tool to select a term set to ensure it's available for tagging. 52504
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Make Term Set Available to Offsite Collections David Santana Once you have created a term set on the site collection; with the necessary credentials; Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to make the term collection globally available to all publishing site collections. In this video; David Santana uses the Term Store management tool to create a global term set and make it available to all site collections. 48089
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Manage Categories David Santana Managing categories in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows end users to choose actual communities; discussions; or conversations. In this video; David Santana shows you how to manage items in categories and assign workflows and specify alerts. 52155
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Manage Comments David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to manage comments after creating a specific conversation in your Newsfeed. In this video; David Santana shows you how to manage comments. 52153
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Manage Content Database David Santana SharePoint 2013's Manage Content Database Settings page allows administrators to manage multiple database features and functionalities including failover; capacity; and database removal; as well as select servers for timer jobs. In this video; David Santana accesses the Manage Content Database Settings page to give an overview of the settings available to administrators. 52476
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Manage Discussion David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to manage discussions if you have elevated privileges. In this video; David Santana shows you how to manage discussions. 52169
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Manage Posts David Santana Managing posts in a Microsoft SharePoint 2013 blog site is easy. In this video; David Santana shows you how to navigate to manage your posts. 52152
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Manage Web Apps David Santana SharePoint 2013 provides the administrator with numerous options when managing web apps; for site content databases; through the Central Administration store. In this video; David Santana provides a detailed overview of the features and settings available to the SharePoint Administrator. 52466
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Map Proxy Groups to Web Apps David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables you to create specific associations between proxy groups of service apps and their web applications. In this video; David Santana give a comprehensive introduction to mapping proxy groups to web apps; thereby configuring service application associations. 53042
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Modify a Search Center David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows users to modify the look and feel of the Search Center. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to choose and preview a theme for your site. 53006
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Move Multiple Site Collections David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to use the SharePoint Management Shell to move multiple site collections between content databases. In this video; David Santana uses the get-spsite command in conjunction with the move-spsite command to retrieve the site collections in a content database and move them to a destination database ? verifying the command using the WhatIf commandlet. 52482
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Move Site Collections Between Databases David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to use the SharePoint Management Shell to move site collections between content databases on different servers. In this video; David Santana activates tab-complete and Quick Edit Mode in SharePoint Management Shell; before using the get-help and WhatIf commandlets to obtain information on and test the validity of the move-spsite command. 52481
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: My Site Social Computing Features David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 includes new features and a redesigned user interface for My Site; a dedicated personal site that allows you to connect with others and share expertise within an organization. In this video; David Santana demonstrates features new to My Sites in SharePoint 2013; including Newsfeed and blogging functionality. 52457
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Newsfeed Settings David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators and content authors with elevated privileges to alter your Newsfeed settings. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to set for privacy; email notifications; people I follow; and activities I want to share in my newsfeed. 52163
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Overview of Office Web Apps David Santana SharePoint 2013 is well integrated with the Office Suite products; and when combined with the Office Web Apps; provides you with the ability to easily view; edit; and create Office documents directly in a SharePoint document library. In this video; David Santana provides an overview of how SharePoint 2013 uses Office Suite products and Office Web Apps. 52464
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Provision a New Office Web Apps Server Farm David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to configure a new Office Web Apps Server Farm. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to provision a new Office Web Apps Server Farm for PowerPoint; OneNote; Excel; and Word. 53030
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Publish Service Application David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows you to publish Service Applications to server farms with which you enjoy a trust relationship. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to publish and configure a Service Application to be of use to administrators and users of trusted server farms linked by a federation trust. 52503
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Publishing a Library David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables administrators to publish site libraries; their columns; and metadata term sets as catalogs that allow other sites to search or navigate them. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to access a site library's catalog settings; check the last crawl time of its indexed items; and configure the library as a catalog. 53040
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Publishing a List David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables authoring-site administrators with the required permissions to publish and share library lists across sites. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a list; add and configure a managed metadata column; anchor it to a term set; and share it for consumption by other sites. 53038
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Query Rules David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's query rules enable you; as an administrator; to conditionally enhance searches by defining query rules that order rankings; promote relevant results; and display additional blocks of results. In this video; David Santana details the variables defining the time-sensitive context in which query results are generated or fired and adds a query rule; specifying its conditions and actions. 53019
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Rate an Item David Santana Rating a discussion item in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is useful for users who depend on reviews and ratings to follow discussions. In this video; David Santana shows you how to rate an item. 52168
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Recycle Bin David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to configure the Recycle Bin so that you can both delete and restore items to your document libraries. In this video; David Santana activates the Recycle Bin; which offers restore and delete options. 52448
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Refiners in Enterprise Search Center David Santana SharePoint 2013's Enterprise Search Center search page features refiners that allow you to narrow your search results by categorizing them; thereby providing detailed search results that enable you to easily locate specific information. In this video; David Santana performs a search and describes the results page refiner options. 52461
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Reindex a Catalog David Santana One of the new features in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is the ability to easily force the content of a list or library to be reindexed during the next scheduled crawl of the search service. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to navigate to and use the Reindex List feature in SharePoint 2013. 48095
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Reindex a Library David Santana In Microsoft SharePoint 2013; you can quickly and easily reindex a list or library to make finding newly added content more efficient. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to reindex a SharePoint document library. 48099
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Reply to Existing Discussion David Santana Replying to an existing discussion in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is simple. In this video; David Santana shows you how to reply to a discussion. 52167
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Reputation Settings David Santana Reputation settings in Microsoft SharePoint 2013; such as stars or I like it; allows users to specify reputation settings on specific items or members. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to customize rating settings; member achievements; point system; and achievement level points. 52173
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Request Manager David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's IIS (Internet Information Services) Request Manager enables administrators to deploy hardware load balancers (HLBs) to balance; prioritize; and route HTTP requests through to their front-end servers or site collections. In this video; David Santana uses the SharePoint 2013 Management Shell and SPServiceInstance to enable and configure Request Manager and its services on SharePoint Server. 53049
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Restart the Search Service David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to stop and restart the search service from the command-line utility. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to stop and restart the SharePoint search service. 53011
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Retrieving Members with People Search David Santana Using SharePoint 2013; you can view specific profile information; such as department and skill set; when performing a people search. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to perform a people search using both the Enterprise Search Center and the regular search functionality of SharePoint 2013. 52462
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Retrieving Search Results David Santana SharePoint 2013's Central Administration Store allows you to create and configure an Enterprise Search Center search page. You can access its results using options defining broad or refined categories. The hover panel offer further refinement. In this video; David Santana performs a search and introduces the results page refiner options; including the hover panel. 52460
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Review a Log File David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 provides you with the opportunity to monitor and troubleshoot SharePoint issues by reviewing log files. In this video; David Santana describes the information contained in a SharePoint log file. 53014
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Review Farm Account Settings David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to manage and configure the farm group account settings from Server 2012's Administrative Tools and through Internet Information Services (IIS). In this video; David Santana uses the Administrative Tools Services feature to explore the SharePoint Timer Service properties before accessing and reviewing basic and advanced farm account settings from within IIS. 52494
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Review Health Analyzer David Santana SharePoint 2013's Health Analyzer offers explanations; warnings; and remedies that enable you to monitor and review problems by category and service in your server farm infrastructure; thereby ensuring its health and ability to achieve optimal service performance. In this video; David Santana identifies a service problem and introduces the explanations; remedies; and viewable rule settings populated by Health Analyzer. 52483
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Review the Encryption of Central Administration David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows the encryption of the Central Administration page using Secure Socket Layer (SSL); thereby safeguarding your managed accounts' user names and passwords. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the security settings to check whether the page is encrypted for secure communication. 52499
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Ribbon Interface David Santana SharePoint 2013's hidden Ribbon interface; which enables you to access options and editing features; can be accessed from a NewDocumentLibrary page. In this video; David Santana shows you how to use access the Ribbon from the Library tab of a NewDocumentLibrary. 52450
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Run Products Configuration Wizard David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's Products Configuration Wizard enables you to connect your SharePoint Server to its farm; create content databases and site collections; and install and configure application services. In this video; David Santana introduces the Products Configuration Wizard. 53023
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Search Using Windows Explorer David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to perform searches in a split screen; displaying both your site's document library and a fully functional Windows Explorer that allows you to drag and drop files; and delete multiple files at once. In this video; David Santana searches on a site file and opens it in its default application from Windows Explorer. 52459
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Set Up a Community Portal David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to create Community Portals that provide a directory of Community Sites; enabling users to search for communities of interest. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a Community Portal from the SharePoint Central Administration web page in SharePoint 2013. 52177
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Set Up a Community Site David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 allows administrators to create Community Sites. This helps to encourage collaboration among organizational communities by providing places where members can discuss and explore common topics. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to create a Community Site from the SharePoint 2013 Central Administration web page. 52178
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Sharing Documents David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows you to share documents with other members through the Open Menu callout and Share dialog box. It also enables you to see who already has access to documents. In this video; David Santana shows you how to share a SharePoint document through the Share option in the Open Menu dialog box. 52451
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Site Settings David Santana SharePoint 2013 replaces Site Actions with Site Settings; a page listing the many features and settings available to you. In this video; David Santana shows you how to access the Site settings page from the Settings callout on your TeamSite page; and offers a brief introduction to each of its nine sections. 52454
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Specify Default Database Server David Santana SharePoint 2013 enables you to specify a default database server to hold your content databases and site collections. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the Default Database Server page to select a default SQL server database server and Windows authentication. 52477
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Specify Quota Templates David Santana SharePoint 2013 allows the administrator to specify quota templates; enabling storage limit values and warning limit values on a site collection to be set; so that when the maximum storage level is reached the site collection is locked to read-only. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to specify a quota template from the Quota Templates page. 52471
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Start the Timer Service David Santana As an administrator in Microsoft SharePoint 2013; it may be necessary to start the SharePoint Timer service; which is the service that runs other services by schedule. This is easily accomplished through the Services console. In this video; David Santana uses the Windows Services console to start the SharePoint Timer service. 52493
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Stop the Timer Service David Santana Administrators sometimes need to prevent some of the functionality in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 by stopping the SharePoint Service Timer service - the service that runs other services according to schedule. In this video; David Santana uses the Windows Command Prompt to stop the Timer service in SharePoint 2013. 52491
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Team Site Overview David Santana SharePoint 2013's TeamSite template allows you to create sites you can configure to facilitate user collaboration. In this video; David Santana introduces the functions of live tiles on a TeamSite page; explains the drag-and-drop capabilities of the file list; and points out features that allow you to invite people to your site or start conversations on your Newsfeed. 52455
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Unpublish a Page and Delete a Page David Santana SharePoint 2013's Ribbon allows you to unpublish site pages; enabling you to move these pages to the Recycle Bin. In this video; David Santana activates the Unpublish function before deleting the page. 52456
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Using Central Admininstration to Backup a Content Database David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013's Backup and Restore feature advises you of backups and restores under way; and enables you to select components; including Web Application databases; to back up. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to choose a backup type and specify a backup location for a Web Application database. 53053
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Using Excel Web App to Edit SharePoint Files David Santana When used together with Microsoft SharePoint 2013; Excel Web App allows you to open an Excel workbook from within a document library on your SharePoint site in order to edit data and perform other basic spreadsheet operations directly in the browser. In this video; David Santana uses the Excel Web App in SharePoint to change spreadsheet data in the browser. 53046
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Using PowerShell to Create a Host Named Site Collection with Multiple URLs David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 enables you to use Windows PowerShell to map multiple URLs to an existing host-named site collection. In this video; David Santana uses the set-spsiteurl commandlet and -Zone parameter to configure multiple URLs for an existing SharePoint 2013 host-named site collection. 53036
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: View All Site Collections David Santana SharePoint 2013 assists administrators by listing all the site collections for a web application; and by providing easy access to information about a particular site collection in the Site Collection List page. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to view all the site collections for a web application from within the Central Management store. 52474
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: View Most Popular Items in SharePoint 2013 David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 combines analytics and search results; providing you with the ability to determine which content is most popular by viewing usage statistics for all items in a library or list. In this video; David Santana demonstrates how to use the Most Popular Items page to view popularity trends reports for specific files in a SharePoint document library. 53048
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Viewing Popularity Trends David Santana Microsoft SharePoint 2013 lets you generate Popularity Trends reports via Excel; which allows you to view historical data on hits and unique users for a site collection; site; or even for a specific document. In this video; David Santana uses the Popularity Trends option in SharePoint 2013 to generate a usage report. 53047
Microsoft SharePoint 2013: Working with Site Pages David Santana Working with site pages in Microsoft SharePoint 2013 is simple. In this video; David Santana shows you how to add sub-sites and do site searches on the Followed Sites page. 52150
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Schema and Content Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use SharePoint to sort content. In this video; Joe Barrett uses SharePoint to demonstrate the three ways content is classified. 61489
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Access Data Using a Custom WCF service Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 supports the creation of Windows Communication Foundation (WCF) custom web services that provide an interface between SharePoint and applications. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates hosing a WCF service in IIS and SharePoint and how to create and deploy a custom WCF service hosted in SharePoint. 61526
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Access Data Using REST API Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 provides the Representational State Transfer (REST) API that allows you to remotely interact with SharePoint sites using the REST and OData web protocol standards. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to make REST calls to SharePoint hosted data from a browser using HTTP requests and OData operators. 61525
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Accessing Data Outside of Sandbox Scope Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; a sandbox solution can't access anything outside the solution; such as a file system or network; on its own. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use a full-trust proxy to access data on behalf of a sandbox solution. 61548
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: App Permission Request Scopes Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use permission scopes and rights to grant user authorization or restrict user actions. In this video; Joe Barrett explains the permissions which can be granted to certain scopes of action; including the permission anomalies for certain scopes. 61512
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: App Permissions Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use apps to build custom solutions which run outside the SharePoint Server for a lighter footprint. In this video; Joe Barrett explains how to build an app; set permissions; where to install an app; and how to configure a remote app to call into the SharePoint Server data. 61511
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Applying Chrome Control for Apps Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; Chrome Control allows you to give a provider-hosted app the look and feel of a regular SharePoint page. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how you can apply Chrome Control to a provider-hosted app; and modifies the js and appManifest files to implement ShowChrome. 64012
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Assembly Binding Redirection Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013's Assemblies element specifies binding redirects for DLLs installed with a solution upgrade. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to change the assembly version number; before updating the solution manifest by creating an Assemblies element in the Package.Template.xml file. 61543
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Authenticating a User from a Client Application Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to authenticate users for SharePoint web applications. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates the Claims Based Authentication method and the Windows Authentication package; and then determines which authentication is configured in SharePoint Central Administration for different zones. 61510
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Building a CAML Query Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to use Collaborative Application Markup Language (CAML) to build queries against SharePoint lists and views. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to customize a Content Query Web Part and use CAML queries in your code. 61517
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Choosing Appropriate APIs Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 provides several sets of APIs that you can choose from when accessing SharePoint data. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the different APIs and the factors that determine which API to use; before providing examples that illustrate how to choose the right API in a given scenario. 61521
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Client-side Object Model Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 provides the SharePoint .NET Framework client object model (CSOM) that allows you to access SharePoint objects from a client machine. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the main CSOM classes and how to use CSOM operations to complete list-related tasks programmatically. 61523
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Code to Provisioning Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to provision a new SharePoint site and make it available to the end user. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use code to provision a SharePoint site by inheriting from an existing class and overriding the provisioning method to create a custom site definition. 61482
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configure and Troubleshoot a Sandbox Solution Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can publish and deploy a sandbox solution. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the different ways that farm administrators and site collection administrators can deploy a sandbox solution. 61547
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configure Feature Dependencies Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows Feature dependencies to be set by name or by GUID. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to establish and configure a SharePoint Feature's dependency settings in Visual Studio. 61539
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configure Feature Upgrades and Versioning Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows the programmatic upgrades of a Feature's manifest file in Visual Studio and PowerShell. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the UpgradeActions element and the Upgrade() method to programatically upgrade a Feature. 61541
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configure No-code Customizations Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to export and reuse a no-code solution you've created. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to save a no-code solution as a template and how to activate and reuse the template. 61552
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configure Solution Dependencies Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows solution dependencies to be established by inserting an ActivationDependencies element in the dependent solution's manifest file. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to locate the SolutionID required by the dependent SharePoint solution. 61540
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configure Solution Upgrades and Versioning Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows solutions upgrades through PowerShell. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to upgrade a SharePoint solution by programming an Uninstall; a Remove; and an Install; before discussing programming an update over the older version. 61542
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configuring Global and Current Navigation Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; a website can have global; current; breadcrumb; and metadata navigation. In this video; Telmo Sampaio; demonstrates how to use the Navigation option to configure global and current navigation. 63990
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Configuring Workflows Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to configure workflows to automate business processes; either for specific features or on site-level for administrative tasks. In this video Joe Barrett demonstrates how to add and configure workflows using Visual Studio. 61496
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Content Inheritance Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create content types that can be replicated when creating new content types. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to configure content type IDs and inheritance in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013. 61492
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Content Policies Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; policies can be associated with content types. When creating a policy; you can set features such as retention; auditing; labels; and barcodes. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create a policy at Site Collection level and then associate it with a particular site content type. 61498
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Content Subscription Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to manage content subscription and ensure that subscriber jobs are configured and running correctly. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to subscribe a site to published content types using three different windows. 61494
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create a Custom Membership Provider Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can create custom membership providers similar to those in ASP.NET. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create a membership provider class that can be deployed and referenced from the config files in your SharePoint installation. 61506
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create a Custom Role Provider Joe Barrett Microsoft Visual Studio allows you to create and deploy a custom role provider which can be used in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 an external tool. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates the components of a custom role provider within Visual Studio and how to deploy it to SharePoint as an external tool. 61507
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create a Custom Sign-in Page Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can create a custom login page for your web application. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create a custom login page with its own background infrastructure and how to deploy the ASPX to SharePoint so that users can interact with the custom login page instead of the default login page. 61509
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create a Site Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 you can create site definitions using Microsoft Visual Studio. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create site definitions; modify the XML and ASPX page files; and then map the test site configuration. 61478
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create a Web Template Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create web templates by saving an existing site as a web template; either programmatically or from SharePoint Central Administration. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to define a subsite in Visual Studio and then create a web template using the SharePoint developer site. 61479
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create and Apply Custom Themes Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create a composed look for your site. A composed look adds a theme to a background image and a master page. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Composed looks gallery to create a composed look with a name; title; master page URL; and theme URL. 61557
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create Content Types Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use content types to standardize how data is expressed for a document. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create content types using the developer site or Visual Studio; and how to add fields to content types in Visual Studio. 61491
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create Custom Permissions In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can assign permission levels to groups. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use Visual Studio to create custom permission levels. 61500
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Create Role Definitions In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use role definitions and permission levels to define the rights for a user or a group. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use C# Visual Studio to create custom role definitions and permission levels. 61499
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating a Channel Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; a Device Channel links a type of user device to a specific set of master pages. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Device Inclusion Rules option to link a Windows phone device to use a specific master page. 61559
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating a Custom Navigation Provider Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to add a custom map provider to your SharePoint site. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Design Manager to change a master page to include the SiteMapProvider and controller for navigation. 61562
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating a Custom Workflow Action Project Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 workflows offer very limited available actions as they are; so it's best to build custom workflows in Visual Studio to suit your particular needs. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a custom workflow action project; add activities to it; and create sequences; attributes; parameters; and logic for the activities. 64001
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating a Master Page Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; a master page is an HTML file that you can create in any text editor. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Design Manager to convert an existing HTML file to a master page. 61558
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating a Remote Event Receiver Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create remote event receivers using SharePoint's integrated common technical infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create server-side and remote remote event receivers; in both sand-box and farm solutions. 64006
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating a Work Item Timer Job Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create work item timer jobs using SharePoint's integrated common technical infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use timer jobs in SharePoint to schedule tasks; and discusses some of the commands associated with timer jobs. 64007
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating and Installing Solution Validators Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use solution validators to determine whether to deploy solutions; based on their properties. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a solution validator. 61550
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating and Uploading JavaScript Files Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint 2013; you can use JavaScript; as well as XLST; to alter the appearance and behavior of lists. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a JavaScript file and use it with XLST to determine the behavior of a SharePoint list. 61553
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating Auto-Hosted Apps Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; aside from hosted apps; you used to be able to create auto-hosted apps. However; the support for this type of app was removed at the end of June 2014. In this video; Telmo Sampaio briefly runs through how to create an auto-hosted app in the event these are still asked about in subsequent examinations. 64009
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating Display Templates Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use display templates written in JavaScript to modify solutions you've created. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a display template in JavaScript and use it to modify a web part on a SharePoint site. 61555
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating Indexed Columns Telmo Sampaio Indexed lists in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allow you to manage large lists of items and improve the performance when users access data. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to index a column; reference an indexed column; and highlight an indexed column used in a query. 61519
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating No-code Solutions Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can create no-code solutions; which don't require that you use Visual Studio or write any code. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a no-code solution consisting of two linked custom lists. 61551
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating Provider-Hosted Apps Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create provider-hosted apps using SharePoint's integrated common technical infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create provider-hosted apps; web forms; and certificate authentication. 64008
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating Reusable Workflows Telmo Sampaio You can use Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 to create and configure a Reusable workflow. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates some of the advantages of Reusable workflows; as well as how to use SharePoint Designer to create a Reusable workflow and associate the workflow to a content type or list. 63998
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating SharePoint-hosted Applications Telmo Sampaio SharePoint apps use the new Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 model; which runs in its own open process. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the various ways SharePoint apps are hosted and created in this model using Visual Studio. 64010
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating Site Columns Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use site columns to classify information. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates different ways to create site columns in both SharePoint and Visual Studio. 61490
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating the Logic and Deploying the Workflow Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to deploy a custom workflow activity from Visual Studio. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create the logic and deploy the workflow from Visual Studio to SharePoint; and then deploy a workflow feature to a website. 64002
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating Trust Relationships for Apps Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; provider-hosted apps require a trust relationship to exist between SharePoint Server and the server on which the application is running. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create an authentication certificate; make SharePoint Server a Trusted Security Token Issuer; and register an app principal for a specific app. 64020
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Creating XSLT for Web Parts Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can customize the items in a no-code solution. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use XSLT to customize the way that data is presented through web parts in a no-code solution. 61554
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Custom Claim Providers Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can create a custom claims provider to add your claims to either a Windows login or a forms-based login. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use the Visual Studio SPClaimProvider command to create a custom claims provider. 61504
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Customizing Modal Dialog Boxes Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use several methods to configure dialog boxes to display information to end users within an application. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to customize and apply modal dialog boxes within an application to display information to end users. 63995
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Customizing the Edit Control Block Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can add elements to the Edit Control Block of the list item. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Menu Item Custom Action option to add a new item to the Edit Control Block for the Products list. 63992
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Customizing the Ribbon Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to add elements to a ribbon. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Ribbon Custom Action option to create a new item on a ribbon. 63991
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Customizing the Status Bar and Notifications Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can customize the built-in Status Message Bar; which conveys information to the end user on every page in an app. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to customize the status bar and status message. 63993
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Customizing Upgrade Notifications Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can create unobtrusive custom notifications; which are displayed for a short time and in this way communicate non-urgent information to end users. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create and use notifications within an app with SharePoint Server 2013. 63994
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Delete Collections Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to dispose of inactive site collections using Central Administration; Visual Studio; or PowerShell. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to remove old material and inactive site collections using Visual Studio. 61488
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Deploying Site Definitions Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to deploy a site definition from Visual Studio and choose to activate its features manually through SharePoint or Visual Studio. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to deploy a test site definition to SharePoint; with the option to activate the features later on. 61481
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Design Manager Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can change the look and feel of your web site with the Design Manager. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Design Manager to pick a pre-installed look and apply it to an existing web site. 61556
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Document Templates Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 you create document templates that can easily be re-used. In this video Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create a document content type and then uses it as a template in the document library. 61495
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Enabling Anonymous Access Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can allow anonymous access to websites. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use the Central Administration site to allow anonymous access for users to a particular website. 61502
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Event Receivers Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 you can attach event receivers to a wide variety of site level; collection level; and list level events. In this video Joe Barrett demonstrates how to configure event receivers to attach types of workflows to List Item Events; Web Events; and Email Events using Visual Studio. 61497
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Exporting a Workflow to a SharePoint Solution Telmo Sampaio You can use Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 to make reusable List and Site workflows. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to package a workflow as a .wsp file; export it; and then deploy it as a solution to any other existing web application and site. 64000
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Expose the Hierarchy Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to examine the site hierarchy using the Server-Side Object Model and the Client-Side Object Model (CSOM). In this video; Joe Barrett uses the Server-Side Object Model to examine a SharePoint site from within Visual Studio. 61485
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Feature Scope and Visibility Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 requires the configuration of a Feature's scope and visibility. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to configure and edit the settings of SharePoint Features scoped to a solution's site collection and Web site. 61538
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Feature Stapling Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 you can use feature stapling to extend an existing site definition. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create a stapled feature and add it to an existing site definition in SharePoint Central Administration. 61483
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Implement a Hierarchical Data Store Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to store custom configuration data at either the farm or web application level using the hierarchical object store. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how a custom application page is used to update data in the SharePoint configuration database by referencing a class inheriting from the SPPersistedObject class utilizing the hierarchical data store mechanism. 61527
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Implement a Property Bag Telmo Sampaio The property bag feature in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 is a hash table of key-value pairs that allows you to add and retrieve object properties within a SharePoint site. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create an application page utilizing property bags to read properties and store data as a key-value pair within a content database. 61529
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Implement Credential Storage Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; the Secure Store Service allows you to store credentials required for connecting to external systems in a secure database within SharePoint Server. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a Secure Store Target Application and associate it with an external data source utilizing the Secure Store Service from Central Administration. 61531
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Implement Impersonation Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; before implementing impersonation; you must login as someone who has been granted the permission to impersonate. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use the console to list and select users to impersonate. 61503
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Implement SharePoint List Telmo Sampaio When developing custom applications in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; SharePoint lists provide the easiest way of storing configuration data as they allow you to utilize the built-in interface. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to store a key-value pair in a SharePoint list; index the key column; and build a CAML query to retrieve stored data. 61530
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Implement web.config Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 provides the web.config file as mechanism for storing application configuration data. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the SPWebConfigModification class to make updates to the web.config file programmatically; and how to read data from the web.config file into an application page using the ConfigurationManager class. 61528
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Import and Export Design Packages Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can add a design package as a solution to the SharePoint site collection. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Design Manager to create a design package. 61561
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Importing and Exporting Microsoft Visio Workflows Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can import flow charts created in Microsoft Visio. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a flowchart in Visio; import it into SharePoint; and use the SharePoint Text-Based Designer to convert the flowchart into a usable workflow which can be applied to lists. 63999
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Incorporating Designer Outputs Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to change the look and feel of your search results. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Display Templates to change the display of search results. 61560
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: List Definitions Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create list definitions using SharePoint Central Administration. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates navigating to a subsite as well as modifying default list settings and list elements. 61474
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: List Designer Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create lists in Visual Studio List Designer and then work with them within SharePoint. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use Visual Studio List Designer to add; customize; and edit lists and then deploy them to SharePoint 2013. 61475
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Maintain Permissions In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; permissions are either unique or they are inherited. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use Visual Studio's BreakRoleInheritance command to stop inheriting permissions. 61501
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Manage Collections Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 enables you to configure the backup and restore settings for site collections. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to manually configure the backup and restore settings using SharePoint Central Administration; SharePoint Management Shell; and Visual Studio. 61487
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Manage Content Types Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to manage content types programmatically. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates site content type management and three methods for adding fields using Visual Studio 61493
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Manage the Life Cycle of SPSite and SPWeb Objects Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows the instantiation; in memory; of SPSite and SPWeb class objects. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how the instantiation of SharePoint site and site collections and their properties in memory facilitates data processing. 61532
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Managing App Usage Tracking Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to manage apps using tracking provided by SharePoint's integrated common technical infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to track app users; monitor links; check errors; and manage licences. 64023
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Object Disposal Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013's Dispose() method allows the disposal of persistent class objects created in memory. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how the Dispose() method and C# using construction ensure the disposal of such objects. 61535
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Object Life Cycle Management for SPContext Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013's SPContext class accesses the HTTP context in which an application is running. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the SPContext class's GetContext() method to retrieve the current context of a site collection's multiple properties. 61534
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Object Life Cycle Management with Windows PowerShell Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 object life cycle management can be effected by PowerShell and multiple SharePoint cmdlets. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how PowerShell cmdlets instantiate class objects and dispose of them when they are no longer required. 61536
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Object Model Overrides Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use Query throttling to restrict the number of items that can be accessed when you execute a query. Query throttling also allows you to specify whether a developer can override the list view threshold programmatically. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to configure resource throttling in Central Administration; before overriding thresholds. 61524
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Organizing SharePoint Project Items Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 solutions are easily managed by the drag-and-drop functionality of Visual Studio's Solution Explorer. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to organize project files and folders in Solution Explorer; to ease navigation. 61544
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Package and Deploy a Custom Claims Provider Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use the event receiver feature to package and deploy claims providers. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to identify and use an event receiver package to deploy a custom claim provider; and what potential issues may occur. 61505
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Package and Deploy a Custom Membership Provider Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can customize the way users log in to the site and provide users with group names. You do this by customizing the Custom Membership Provider and Role Provider using Visual Studio. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to customise and deploy the Custom Membership Provider and Role Provider packages for use in SharePoint. 61508
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Packaging an App Telmo Sampaio You can use Visual Studio to package a Microsoft SharePoint-hosted app which has already been developed. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates what an app package typically includes and how to use Visual Studio to package an app. 64016
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Plan the Type of Workflow and Associated Forms Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you need to associate forms to workflows so that parameter information can be tracked from the end user. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create an Initiation Form for a SharePoint workflow that allows you to do this. 64004
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Provisioning Lists Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 you can create a custom solution for a SharePoint site. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates provisioning a list instance for a SharePoint site using Visual Studio. 61476
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Publishing an App to a Corporate Catalog Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; app catalog sites can be created to publish and deploy packaged apps. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create an app catalog site via SharePoint central administration; how to publish a packaged app to an existing corporate catalog; and how to deploy a published app for a specific user. 64017
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Publishing an App to the SharePoint Store Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; apps can be submitted for listing to the globally accessible Office Store. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the approval process for submitting an app for listing to the Office Store; saves a draft of an app via the Seller Dashboard; and visits the Office Store to download an approved app. 64018
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Publishing an App to Windows Azure Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; provider-hosted apps can be published to Windows Azure from within Microsoft Visual Studio. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to create a website and publishing profile in Azure using a Microsoft account; import a publishing profile in Visual Studio; and package and publish a provider-hosted app from within Visual Studio. 64019
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Querying Lists Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 provides classes that allow you to query data from a specific list in a list view; or from within multiple lists in a site collection. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the SPQuery class; before demonstrating how to build a query returning results from lists in multiple sites using the SPSiteDataQuery class. 61518
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Removing an App Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to remove apps using SharePoint's integrated common technical infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to uninstall auto-hosted and provider-hosted apps from the app catalog. 64022
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Sandbox Components and Constraints Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 sandboxed solutions are deployed to the site collection with their contents stored in the content database. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates a sandboxed solution's components and constraints; and introduces a simple sandboxed solution. 61546
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Search-driven Navigation Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use search-driven navigation where you only create a single page for all locations. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Term store management section and associate a single page with your navigation. 61563
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Selecting a User Experience for Apps Telmo Sampaio As with Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 apps; Office apps also use HTML; JavaScript; and AppManifest. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the key features of Office apps; as well as how to create one. 64011
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Server-side Object Model Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; the Server Object Model is the most extensive API; providing a rich set of classes for representing and operating on objects in SharePoint. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the important Server Object Model classes; before demonstrating how to use them to create a list and add items through code in a console application. 61522
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: SharePoint App TokenHelper Class Joe Barrett The TokenHelper Class helps simplify the use of code in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 applications. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to use the OAuth protocol for applications related to the TokenHelper Class in SharePoint. 61516
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Site Collection Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create a site collection and select the template you want to use after you've created the site collection. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to create a delayed site collection in SharePoint Central Administration. 61486
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Site Definition Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to use Visual Studio to create a site definition that will determine the look and behaviour of your SharePoint site. In this video; Joe Barrett examines the components of a site definition. 61480
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Site Hierarchies Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 you can easily navigate the SharePoint installation from either Central Administration or Visual Studio. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates navigating the SharePoint site hierarchy from within Central Administration and explores the relationship between the hierarchy and Internet Information Services (IIS). 61484
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Sites and Web Templates Joe Barrett Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to use site and web templates to customize a SharePoint site. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates the key features of web and site templates; how to modify web and site templates; and create custom templates. 61477
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Specifying a Licensing Model for Apps Telmo Sampaio You can use Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 to generate a licensing model for an app; and Microsoft Visual Studio to verify the app license. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the various components of a typical app licence file. 64014
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Specifying a Starting Location for Apps Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; all web-based applications and sites need a URL that starts the application. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the function of tokens and what the standard token is composed of; how to access a list showing SharePoint tokens; as well as when and where to use them. 64013
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Specifying Permissions for Apps Telmo Sampaio When using Visual Studio to create apps for use in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can use an app's manifest to specify app permission requests. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how app permission requests include scopes and rights; how to use Visual Studio to specify permission requests; and how to enable app permissions from SharePoint. 64015
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Specifying Permissions for Corporate Catalog Apps Joe Barrett In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can configure user permissions for Corporate Catalog applications. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates creating an app catalog and configures read permissions and access for users. 61514
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Specifying Permissions for Office Store Apps Joe Barrett Office Store applications for use in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 are primarily accessible from the Corporate Catalog or the Office Store. In this video Joe Barett; demonstrates how to specify permissions for Office Store applications you want to publish. 61513
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Specifying Permissions for Remote Apps Joe Barrett When configuring permissions for remote apps in in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; some configuration has to first be done in Visual Studio. In this video; Joe Barrett demonstrates how to specify permissions for remote applications in SharePoint. 61515
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Structuring App Packages Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 solution elements are easily packaged in Microsoft Visual Studio. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to edit the content of a solution package; as well as how they might be augmented. 61545
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Taxonomy-based Navigation Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; taxonomy navigation uses a different site map provider to retrieve data and build links. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the Managed Metadata Service to create a URL for each term in a term set and then navigate by using those terms. 63989
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Understanding Features and Solutions Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 Features are collections of declarative statements deployed; with assemblies and manifests; by SharePoint solutions in a WSP file. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the structure; attributes; and functions of Features contained in a SharePoint solution. 61537
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Update Properties of SPSite and SPWeb Objects Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 class methods allow site and site collection data to be updated in memory. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to download a SharePoint site and site collection; update their properties; and then communicate the changes to SharePoint. 61533
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Upgrade Sandbox Solutions Telmo Sampaio In Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you need to perform specific steps when upgrading a sandbox solution. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to deploy a new version of a sandbox solution. 61549
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Upgrading a Workflow Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to upgrade a workflow using SharePoint's integrated common technical infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to update multiple workflow instances and prevent earlier versions of a workflow from being used concurrently with an updated version. 64005
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Upgrading an App Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to upgrade apps using SharePoint's integrated common technical infrastructure. In this video; Telmo Sampaio uses the AppManifest to show you how to create; upgrade; and apply new versions of project and provider-hosted apps in SharePoint. 64021
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Using a Custom Workflow in SharePoint Designer Telmo Sampaio Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allows you to create and deploy custom activities through SharePoint Designer. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use an existing workflow to create a new workflow in SharePoint Designer; modify workflow tasks and activities; and add descriptions to them. 64003
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Using Content Iterator Telmo Sampaio Indexed lists in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 allow you to regulate the amount of data being transferred; thereby reducing the load when querying large lists. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to use the ContentIterator class and its ProcessItems method to iterate over all the items in a collection. 61520
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Using Focus on Content Telmo Sampaio With Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013; you can disable the Focus on Content feature to ensure that Master Page data always display for end users. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates how to disable the Focus on Content button. 63996
Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013: Workflow Planning Telmo Sampaio You can use Workflows in Microsoft SharePoint Server 2013 to create business processes based on the data obtained from within the SharePoint environment. In this video; Telmo Sampaio demonstrates the three types of workflows and the Windows Azure Service Bus; as well as how a workflow is developed within SharePoint. 63997
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Adding a Web Deploy Package to an Application Profile on Windows Server 2012 R2 Rafiq Wayani With Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 and Web Deploy; adding deployment packages to application profiles allows you to easily deploy the package to a virtual machine. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to add a deployment package to an application profile for use on a library server. 65326
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Administering an IT GRC Control Management Program with System Center Process Pack for IT GRC Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows implementations of IT GRC to be administered and processed from within the Service Manager Console. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the Service Manager Console's Work Items interface and explains the role of IT GRC policies. 65417
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Approve an Agent with the System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Operations Console Rafiq Wayani The Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager operations console allows you to monitor machines as agent and agentless managed. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to approve an agent with the operations console to monitor a machine and supply you with a range of information. 65339
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Assessing the Private Cloud with System Center Advisor Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Advisor; connected to Microsoft's Web site and added to managed groups of machines; provides Operations Manager with up-to-date patches and security information. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to monitor System Center Advisor error messages; warnings; and informational alerts. 65422
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Business Unit Clouds Overview Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; a business unit can have its own cloud structure with virtual machines; hosts; storage; library resources; and a network. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the business unit cloud structure. 65313
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Cloud Components Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 offers numerous cloud components that allow you to provide a flexible and unified solution across a cloud-based enterprise environment. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the seven components that are included with System Center 2012 R2 are beneficial to cloud computing administration. 65291
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Compliance Management Overview Rafiq Wayani You can use Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 to help with Compliance Management across an organization. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses examples to explain Compliance Management; which includes Governance; Compliance; and Risk Management. 65410
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Components of a System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Cube Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; a cube allows quick analysis of data. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses cubes to discuss dimensions; drill down; drill through; key performance indicators (KPIs); measures; and partitions. 65434
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring a Network Device Discovery Rule in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager allows you to use network device discovery rules in order to find network devices. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to set up and configure network device discovery rules using the included wizard. 65346
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring a Service Template in System Center 2012 R2 Service Template Designer Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use service templates to build an infrastructure that allows you to deploy single-tier or multi-tier applications. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Service Template Designer to construct a service template. 65317
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring a Software Update Baseline in System Center 2012 R2 Virtual Machine Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Virtual Machine Manager allows the creation of software update baselines that specify required software updates or update components. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create and configure a software update baseline using the Update Baseline Wizard. 65419
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring and Publishing Dashboards in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can configure and publish dashboards in Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Dashboard View option to create dashboards. 65428
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring Automated Data Recovery in System Center 2012 R2 Data Protection Manager Rafiq Wayani Data Protection Manager (DPM) in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 offers an automated item-based automated recovery solution; providing you with the assurance that your data is protected in the event of a catastrophic failure. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create a group member; configure a backup replica; and verify recovery points specific to the protected data. 65407
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring Automated Problem Record Creation in System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to create automated problem records when configuring incident management from within the Service Manager console. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create an e-mail-related incident template in Service Manager; before describing how to automatically record specific incidents using an alert connector in Operations Manager. 65390
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring Basic APM in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you are able to configure application monitoring performance inside of the Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to perform some basic application monitoring for System Center. 65354
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring Service Level Tracking in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to configure Service Level Tracking in Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates authoring options in the Operations Manager; and how to configure and modify service level tracking. 65424
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Orchestrator Runbooks Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can easily configure Orchestrator Runbooks to suit your requirements. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to configure Orchestrator Runbooks elements; such as automatic check out; check in comments; and design phase link labels. 65381
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Change Requests Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager supports Change Management which allows you to provide reliable and efficient services to clients; because all changes are carefully planned and executed. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use Service Manager to configure a Change Request. 65365
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Incidents Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager allows you to manage incidents quickly and efficiently in order to restore normal services to your system as quickly as possible. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to record an incident using Service Manager. 65366
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager PowerShell Security Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to configure Service Manager PowerShell Security within its virtual machine manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to work with the Service Manager PowerShell client and the types of security it deals with. 65364
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Problems Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager allows you to record problems that occur on your system to track issues that affect services and performance. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to manage single or multiple problems using Service Manager. 65367
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Release Records Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager is a complete management system; allowing you to record and manage releases to ensure that your system environment remains secure and protected against unnecessary or unapproved changes. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use Service Manager to create a release record. 65368
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Request Offerings Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager; you can configure the Service Manager request offerings to reflect what's being offered in a particular situation. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to construct service request offerings. 65372
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Run As Accounts Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to configure Service Manager Run as Accounts within its virtual machine manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create and customize Run As accounts. 65363
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Service Offerings Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can group related request offerings within Service Manager service offerings. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to construct Service Manager service offerings and add service requests to them. 65373
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; after installing the System Center Cloud Services Process Pack (CSPP); the Service Manager administrator needs to perform certain configuration tasks before an enterprise can realize the benefits of Infrastructure as a Service. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to define user roles and configure the general properties of the Cloud Services solution. 65395
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Configuring Views in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to configure views in the Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create and configure an Event View and create a Windows View to work with it. 65427
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating a Custom Event Rule in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager allows you to effortlessly create alert-generating rules from an event-based data source customized to your organizational needs. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to configure the Create Rule Wizard within Operation Manager's Authoring workspace to create an event-based rule. 65389
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating a Distributed Application Model in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; distributed applications rely on a number of distributed components which work together. If any single component fails the entire application will also fail. In this video; Rafiq Wayani creates a distributed application model for a messaging application. 65350
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating a Problem in System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager allows you to easily create problem records to help prevent future problems and incidents from occurring. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create a new problem record from the Service Manager console. 65384
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating a System Center 2012 R2 Business Unit Cloud Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; it is easy to construct a business unit cloud. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the VMs and Services option to create a business unit cloud containing hosts; logical networks; load balancers; and virtual IP templates. 65315
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating a System Center 2012 R2 Data Protection Manager Protection Group Rafiq Wayani To protect data with Data Protection Manager (DPM) in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you first need to create protection groups representing collections of data sources with the same protection configuration. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses the Create New Protection Group wizard in the Protection task area within the DPM Administrator console to configure and generate a protection group. 65405
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating a Web Deploy Package on Windows Server 2012 R2 Rafiq Wayani With Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 and Web Deploy; you can create deployment packages containing all the configuration and content of your applications for storage or redeployment. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create a deployment package and details some of the available options you can set. 65325
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating an IT GRC Control Management Program with System Center Process Pack for IT GRC Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center Service Manager 2012's IT Governance; Risk Management; and Compliance (GRC) Process Pack allows the creation of a GRC Control Management Program. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to develop a working IT GRC Control Management Program for System Center 2012. 65416
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Creating Network Resources in System Center 2012 R2 for a Business Unit Cloud Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can create networking resources for your business unit cloud. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Fabric option to construct a logical network. 65314
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Custom Rules Rafiq Wayani Operations Manager in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 uses rules to collect data and determine what to do with the information after it collects it. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the rules used to create alerts; collect events and performance data; and run scripts or commands according to a schedule. 65386
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Customizing Performance Thresholds in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; it's possible to set up performance thresholds on the components you are monitoring. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to configure performance thresholds for a .NET application. 65355
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Data Protection Manager Deploying an Agent Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to deploy protection agents for identifying data that the Data Protection Manager (DPM) can protect and recover on a specified computer. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to install a protection agent manually; before attaching the agent using the Protection Agent Installation Wizard in the DPM Administrator console to enable protection. 65404
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Data Protection Manager Features Rafiq Wayani You can use Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Data Protection Manager (DPM) to assign users roles which give them permission to execute tasks. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the DPM; including the certification and authentication components; and the reports generated to track activity on your cloud environment. 65403
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Data Protection Manager Overview Rafiq Wayani You can use the Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Data Protection Manager (DPM) to reduce the number and severity of risks that the VMs in your cloud face. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how DPM works; what it includes; and how its various components protect and back up data in your cloud environment. 65402
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Deploy a System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Agent Manually Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you will need to install an Operations Manager agent manually in order to keep track of off-site machines. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to manually install; access; and run an agent. 65338
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Deploy an Agent with the System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Discovery Wizard Rafiq Wayani The Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Discovery Wizard allows you to find and manage clients and servers once they're deployed. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the wizard to deploy an agent; discover different machines based on a range of criteria; and the different discovery options available to you. 65337
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Deploy SLT to SharePoint in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to deploy Service Level Tracking (SLT) to SharePoint from Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to deploy SLT to SharePoint; and configure and customize the reporting service. 65426
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Deploying a Data Tier Application (DAC) Package with System Center 2012 R2 Virtual Machine Manager Rafiq Wayani Deploying a Data Tier Application in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 is a fairly straightforward process. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to deploy a Data Tier Application using System Center 2012 R2 Virtual Machine Manager. 65330
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Deploying a Service Template in System Center 2012 R2 Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to deploy service templates to the cloud or to host platforms quite easily. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to construct; customize; and deploy a service template. 65318
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Deploying a Single Tier Service Using System Center 2012 R2 Virtual Machine Manager Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; it's a simple process to deploy a Single Tier Service. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how you can configure and deploy a Single Tier Service using the Service Template in the System Center Virtual Machine Manager. 65331
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Deploying a VM Using System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Rafiq Wayani By creating a Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) connector; administrators in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 are able to easily deploy virtual machines leveraging the System Center Cloud Services Pack (CSPP). In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create a VMM connector in the Service Manager console; before highlighting the available VMs in Virtual Machine Manager. 65396
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Designing Visio Diagrams with System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Visio Connector Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can build network diagrams for different kinds of audiences. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses Visio network diagrams to explore the required network information for internal and external audiences. 65430
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Elements of a Data Tier Application (DAC) Package Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can create data tier application (DAC) packages to manage and deploy database schema. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the DAC package is authored and applied. 65329
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Generating Alerts in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager allows you to create and customize alert views that only display alerts that are generated according to specific conditions. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create a new alert view and configure its properties within the Monitoring workspace in Operations Manager. 65388
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Identifying Services for the Windows Server 2012 R2 Private Cloud Rafiq Wayani When developing a Windows Server 2012 R2 private cloud strategy within an organization utilizing Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you should carefully plan the appropriate services and security requirements to be associated with the infrastructure. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the service identification considerations and the process of onboarding services to a private cloud. 65293
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Implementing Custom Monitoring in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Using a Process Monitoring Template Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operation Manager process monitoring template helps you keep track of how processes run and whether they are running unnecessarily. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to implement custom monitoring by creating and customizing a process monitoring template. 65342
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Implementing Custom Monitoring in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Using Web Application Transaction Monitoring Template Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can implement custom web application monitoring using the templates provided in System Center Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to monitor web application availability and transactions within Operations Manager. 65343
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Installing System Center Advisor Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Advisor; when added to managed groups of machines; provides Operations Manager with current and historical configuration reports and alerts. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to establish an Advisor Connection; add machines to it; and configure their alert rules. 65421
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Installing System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows Service Manager administrators to install the System Center Cloud Services Process Pack (CSPP); providing an Infrastructure as a Service solution. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to import the required management packs; before using the System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Setup Wizard to install the CSPP. 65394
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Installing System Center Process Pack for IT GRC Prerequisites Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center Service Manager (SCCM) 2012's IT Governance; Risk Management; and Compliance (GRC) Process Pack carries infrastructural prerequisites. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses the SCCM Console to demonstrate how the integration of System Center component applications streamlines GRC. 65413
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Installing the System Center Process Pack for IT GRC Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; Service Manager allows the download and installation of the Process Pack for Cloud Services and IT GRC. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to install the Cloud services process pack and Cloud services runbooks onto Service Manager and Orchestrator machines. 65415
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Installing Web Deploy on Windows Server 2012 R2 Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can deploy an entire website to another location. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Web Deploy component to create an option for deploying a website. 65324
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Integrating System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager and Orchestrator with Other System Center Components Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager (Ops Manager) and Orchestrator combine to provide cross-product; environment-wide infrastructural integration and automation. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses how System Center components' Performance and Resource Optimization (PRO) management packs ensure environmental performance and health. 65301
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Integrating System Center 2012 R2 Orchestrator with System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani Once you have registered and deployed an integration pack within Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can then connect it to the Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to connect to the Operations Manager using the System Center Orchestrator. 65377
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Integrating System Center 2012 R2 Orchestrator with System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Orchestrator allows you to easily integrate with a range of platforms in order to increase Orchestrator's functionality. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to integrate Service Manager with System Center Orchestrator. 65378
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Integrating System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager with Other System Center Components Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Service Manager uses connectors to import; process; and act on Operations Manager's configuration and alert data. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses how Service Manager uses connectors to initiate or perform tasks on other Service Center products. 65302
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: IT GRC Compliance Program Key Concepts Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use the IT GRC Compliance Program Key Concepts to help you develop an accountable IT environment which uses compliance to mitigate risks coming from inside and outside of the environment. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses examples to explain the use of an Authority Document and what it might typically contain. 65412
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Key Indicators for Windows Server 2012 R2 Private Cloud Health and Performance Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; key performance indicators (KPIs) allow you to confirm that a private cloud infrastructure is meeting health and performance expectations. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the main KPIs and how they are used to define and measure progress toward organizational goals. 65299
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Linking Problems and Incidents in System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager allows you to quickly link an individual incident to an existing problem record; thereby creating an association that helps to resolve the issue more efficiently. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to link an incident to a problem record from within the Service Manager console. 65385
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Managing Clouds with System Center 2012 R2 App Controller Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 App Controller allows you to manage applications and services that are deployed in both private and Azure-based public cloud infrastructures. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the capabilities of App Controller and its self-service portal and how App Controller integrates with Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) and Windows Azure. 65296
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Manually Recovering Data in System Center 2012 R2 Data Protection Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Data Protection Manager (DPM) allows the recovery of protection groups through the DPM Administrator Console. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to recover data to a network destination using the DPM Administrator Console's Recovery Wizard. 65408
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Monitoring Distributed Applications Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Distributed Application Designer (DAD) improves the monitoring of distributed applications by defining the relationships within the applications. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the DAD is applied to improve the monitoring of distributed applications. 65349
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Monitoring the Health of a Distributed Application in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; once a distributed application is created it's important to monitor its health. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to monitor an already created distributed application. 65351
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Administration Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager has various components and features that assist developers with administration. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Operations Manager to deal with administration functions such as authoring; monitoring; group and device management; subscriber notifications; resource pools; and security roles. 65335
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager APM Capabilities Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager monitors both server side and client side capabilities in order to monitor application performance. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how Operations Manager is applied in order to monitor the performance of your applications. 65353
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Application Performance Monitoring Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; application performance monitoring (APM) can help to ensure that your applications are working at optimum efficiency. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the key components of application performance monitoring are applied. 65352
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Architecture Rafiq Wayani The architecture of System Center Operations Manager (SCOM) for Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to monitor the entire virtual and physical infrastructure of your network. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the components of SCOM contribute to the monitoring of the system center. 65333
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Distributed Application Overview Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager allows you to monitor distributed applications. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to monitor distributed applications and discusses the benefits of distributing applications in the first place. 65348
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Health Monitoring Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; a range of monitors provide information about the environment. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates a number of useful monitors; the types of monitor states that are available; what these states mean; and the type of information monitors store. 65344
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Management Pack Templates Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use Management Pack Templates to create custom monitoring solutions. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the templates and the different things you can use them to monitor. 65341
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Management Packs Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; management packs provide item specific information for the user monitoring the system center which include monitoring; data interpretation; and actions to take in case of failures. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how management packs are utilized in system center monitoring. 65334
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Monitoring Overview Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager allows you to create custom monitoring solutions. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates Management Pack Templates and their use in monitoring servers; connections; and processes. 65340
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Network Device Monitoring Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager allows you to monitor network devices. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the various types of monitoring that the Operations Manager can perform on a network. 65345
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Network Monitoring Using the Operations Console In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager allows you to use the operations console to monitor your network. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to access Network Monitoring; and discusses the information that is found there. 65347
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Overview Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the System Center Operations Manager (SCOM); allows you to monitor multiple environments throughout your entire system center structure. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how SCOM operates within the system center infrastructure. 65332
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Security Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager uses roles to segregate administrative permissions and enforce security. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how roles are used to distribute different responsibilities among multiple administrators. 65336
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Operations Manager Visio Connector Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can display your network information in a diagram. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses the Visio Connector framework diagram to discuss the Operations Manager; SDK; Visio Connector; polling interval; SharePoint; and network diagrams. 65429
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Orchestrator Automated Incident Remediation Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can create automated remediation for different incidents and problems. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create an automated incident remediation using Orchestrator. 65382
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Orchestrator Integration Packs Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Orchestrator integration packs allow you to extend Orchestrator's functionality and its ability to integrate with other products. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the benefits of integration packs; the process of implementing an integration pack activity; and authoring an activity through an API. 65375
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Orchestrator Overview Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 is comprised of a suite of products that includes the Orchestrator. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the Orchestrator allows you to manage the cloud environment - your servers; your applications; your storage; your network; and your resources in general - easily and efficiently. 65374
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Orchestrator Runbook Overview Rafiq Wayani Runbooks in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Orchestrator provide the instructions; or workflows; that allow you to automate tasks and processes within an IT infrastructure. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the different runbook components; the types of activities available in Orchestrator; and their common behaviors. 65379
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Orchestrator Workflow Controls Rafiq Wayani Workflow controls allow you to build logic into complex automated tasks when creating runbooks in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Orchestrator. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the concept of workflow controls; before highlighting starting points; smart links; and embedded loops. 65380
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Planning a Service Template in System Center 2012 R2 Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use Service templates to reduce errors and increase productivity. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use Service templates to execute application installation files with automatically. 65316
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Problem Management Overview Rafiq Wayani Allowing incident and problem investigation and diagnosis within Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 enhances the functionality of Orchestrator automated incident remediation. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the steps involved in incident and problem investigation and diagnosis. 65383
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Provisioning a Windows Server 2012 R2 Private Cloud with System Center 2012 R2 Virtual Machine Manager Rafiq Wayani Once the fabric resources have been defined; the Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) component in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 enables you to quickly and easily provision private clouds in an organization. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to create a new private cloud using the VMM Create Cloud Wizard. 65295
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Publishing System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Visio Diagrams to SharePoint Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; distributed application diagrams provide information about problems; warnings; errors; and informational messages associated with your networking environment. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses Visio to customize the distributed application diagram and publish it to SharePoint. 65431
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Running Reports from SLT in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to run reports from Service Level Tracking (SLT) in Operations Manager. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to run reports from SLT; as well as create custom tracking. 65425
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Sequencing an Application with Server App-V on Windows Server 2012 R2 Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use the App-V sequencer to package applications in preparation for application virtualization. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to sequence an application with server App-V. 65328
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Level Tracking Overview Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you have the ability to keep track of the service and operation levels of your organization. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses Service Level Tracking (SLT) to discuss Service Level Agreements (SLAs) and Operating Level Agreements (OLAs). 65423
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Activities Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager allows you to perform a series of electronic and information technology activities known as workflows. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses workflows in Service Manager and how they help you streamline activities and optimize system performance. 65361
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager and Orchestrator Rafiq Wayani The Service Manager (SCSM) and Orchestrator components of Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allow you to deploy; automate; update; and manage services within your private cloud infrastructure. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the attributes of SCSM and Orchestrator and discusses the benefits both these components bring to a cloud-based enterprise. 65297
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Components Rafiq Wayani The Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager is comprised of the management server and the Service Manager database; from which you can manage your organization's services. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the components of the Service Manager are integrated and applied in the management of services. 65358
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Concepts Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 includes a Service Manager that helps you manage services; applications; and processes; allowing you to optimize services and meet the expectations of clients. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses some of the uses of Service Manager and its benefits. 65360
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Configuring an Incident Queue Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use Service Manager to configure Incident Queues. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to configure and manipulate an incident queue to allow you to determine how incidents and problems are handled. 65370
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Cubes Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can build; populate; and process cubes. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses the data warehouse process to explain the relationship between the Service Manager Database; Staging Database; Data Mart Database; and the OLAP Cube. 65433
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Data Warehouse Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can gather system and operations information to find out what is going on with a given resource. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses the Service Manager data warehouse to discuss System Center analytics; data warehousing; data warehouse goals; and data warehouse databases. 65432
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Incident Queue Overview Rafiq Wayani Service Manager in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 supports different queues that allow you to manage incidents such as escalation and prioritization. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses Incident Queues; Service Manager Queues; and Dynamic Queues and their importance within Service Manager. 65369
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Integration Rafiq Wayani The components of the Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 suite can be integrated in order to facilitate self-service and automation. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how connectors are applied in the integration of Service Manager with Service Center. 65359
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Overview Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager provides a means of automating; integrating; and centralizing the management of your organization's end-to-end IT processes. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how Service Manager operates within System Center. 65357
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Reports Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use Service Manager reports to determine if problems are reported; escalated; or resolved. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Service Manger Console to turn problems in your incidence into Service Manger reports. 65435
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager Self-Service Portal Overview Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 supports a System Center Service Manager Self-Service portal; which can be created and installed using the Service Manager web portal. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to install the portal to provide web-based access to System Center 2012. 65371
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Service Manager User Roles Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Service Manager is widely accessible via a web interface and a thick client; and integrates deeply with System Center. As a result; having proper security controls in place is vital. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses the importance of these security controls. 65362
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: SharePoint 2013 PerformancePoint Architecture Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can use business intelligence tools to analyze and monitor key performance indicators of your environment. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses PerformancePoint architecture to discuss business intelligence; Dashboard Designer; SQL Server Reporting Services; SharePoint application servers; and SharePoint Web Front End servers. 65437
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: SharePoint 2013 PerformancePoint DashBoard Designer Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can create the PerformancePoint Dashboard after you've set up your site. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use SharePoint 2013 to create a Business Intelligence Center site and add a dashboard to it. 65438
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Software Update Compliance Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's deployment requires software and security updates to remain compliant. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to install; configure; and synchronize Windows Server Update Services (WSUS) for System Center components; using the WSUS Server Configuration Wizard. 65305
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Configuration Items Rafiq Wayani The System Center Cloud Services Process Pack in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 requires certain tasks relating to the configuration items that must be understood by the System Manager administrator in order to successfully configure the Cloud Services Pack. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the different configuration items and how they function when provisioning resources within a cloud infrastructure. 65397
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Cloud Resource Request Items Rafiq Wayani The System Center Cloud Services Pack in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 supports service request items that allow you to manage the availability of cloud resources within an organization. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the request items used to subscribe to cloud resources; and update and cancel cloud resource subscriptions. 65400
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Overview Rafiq Wayani System Center Cloud Services Process Pack provides an Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS) solution built on the Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 suite of products. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the benefits of utilizing the System Center Cloud Services Process Pack and how it is integrated within a System Center private cloud infrastructure. 65391
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Prerequisites Rafiq Wayani Before installing and configuring the System Center Cloud Services Process Pack in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you need to ensure that all of the necessary prerequisites have been met. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the software; security; configuration; and Orchestrator prerequisites that need to be met before deploying the integration pack file. 65393
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Tenant Request Items Rafiq Wayani The System Center Cloud Services Pack in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 supports service request items that allow you to manage the tenants who consume the cloud computing resources in your organization. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the tenant request items that are used to register; update; and cancel tenants. 65399
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack Terminology and Users Rafiq Wayani In order to utilize the Service Manager Console or Self-Service Portal as efficiently as possible when creating service requests in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; it is necessary to understand the terminology describing the concepts and actions related to Cloud Services. In this video; Rafiq Wayani describes the terminology and user roles used when consuming cloud resources in System Center. 65392
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack VM and Service Request Items Rafiq Wayani Microsoft Service Center 2012 R2 can be used to manage the processes involved in requesting Virtual Machine (VM) creation and configuration. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the importance of monitoring VM creation; changes made in a VM using Runbooks within the System Center Orchestrator; and permissions processes related to change requests and their importance. 65401
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Cloud Services Process Pack VMM Configuration Items Rafiq Wayani Configuring Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) resources is a required task that the Service Manager administrator in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 needs to perform when configuring the Cloud Services Process Pack. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the VMM configuration items and their capabilities; and their use in a scenario where resources are requested through the Self-Service Portal. 65398
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Process Pack for IT GRC Rafiq Wayani You can use Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Process Pack for IT GRC to group controls; policies; and risks associated with an authority document. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses examples to give an overview of Process Pack for IT GRC and the environment in which it could be effective. 65411
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: System Center Process Pack for IT GRC Configuring System Center Components Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 IT Governance; Risk Management; and Compliance (GRC) require the configuration of Active Directory (AD) management and computer-related group policies. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to configure System Center 2012's AD component for IT GRC. 65414
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Targeting Rules in System Center Rafiq Wayani When creating a monitor or rule in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager; you need to select the appropriate target that will determine where the monitor or rule will run. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how classes; objects; and groups form the basis of monitoring components in an infrastructure with Operations Manager. 65387
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Update Remediation and Exemption Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 allows you to update the Virtual Machine Manager virtual machines (VMs); their operating systems; and software components. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses the practical and scheduling implications of updating selected VMs and their software components. 65306
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: User Recovery of Data in System Center 2012 R2 Data Protection Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Data Protection Manager (DPM) allows end users to create their own recovery points. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to deploy registry keys required by Active Directory and enables end-user recovery through the DPM Self Service Recovery tool. 65409
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Validating APM in System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager Rafiq Wayani The Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Operations Manager allows you to validate Application Performance Monitoring (APM). In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to validate APM in the Operations Manager virtual machine manager. 65356
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Verify Compliance Status with System Center Process Pack for IT GRC Reports Rafiq Wayani The Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Console Administration pane allows for verification of compliance with the System Center Process Pack for IT GRC. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses the Management Packs Import function to import Management Packs relevant to specific IT GRC installations. 65418
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Verifying a Software Update Baseline in System Center 2012 R2 Virtual Machine Manager Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Virtual Machine Manager allows the creation of verifiable software update baselines. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to add updates to an existing software update baseline; and scan the assigned hosts for compliance. 65420
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Verifying System Center 2012 R2 Data Protection Manager Protection Rafiq Wayani After setting up data protection in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; Data Protection Manager (DPM) provides numerous features that allow you to monitor protection activity and verify that everything is working faultlessly. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to identify the status of a new protection group from within the DPM Administrator console's Protection and Monitoring work areas. 65406
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Verifying System Center 2012 R2 Health and Performance Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Operations Manager (Ops Manager) provides integrated infrastructural monitoring across the data center and cloud - public and private. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how the Ops Manager monitoring packs and integration ensure environment-wide health and performance. 65300
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Verifying the System Center 2012 R2 Infrastructure Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's infrastructure needs to be verified for accessibility and functionality. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) to create; configure; verify; and review System Center infrastructure components. 65303
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Verifying the System Center 2012 R2 Private Cloud Infrastructure Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's private cloud infrastructure requires verification for accessibility and functionality. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) to create; configure; verify; and review System Center private cloud infrastructure components. 65304
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Viewing System Center 2012 R2 Service Manager Reports in Excel Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; it's easy to export a Service Manager report and view it in Excel. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Export feature to export and view the report in the Excel format. 65436
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Application Profiles Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can create application profiles for your virtual machines. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use Virtual Machine Manager to create a virtual machine application profile. 65322
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Fabric Resources Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) allows you to add storage; networking; and server resources to the VMM infrastructure. In this video; Rafiq Wayani introduces VMM Server resources; before adding a file server; and installing and connecting to an iSCSI server. 65309
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Guest OS Profiles Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; profiles make it possible to automate the provisioning of a virtual machine. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses guest OS profiles to deploy virtual machines. 65319
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Hardware Profiles Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; there is an easy way to have consistently configured systems across the network. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the hardware profile option to configure settings automatically for new virtual machines. 65320
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Jobs Rafiq Wayani Every time you do something in Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; it is stored in the Jobs list. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Jobs list to view details on running; past; cancelled; and failed jobs. 65312
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Libraries Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) requires Library Servers to host resources. In this video; Rafiq Wayani adds a Library Server to the VMM infrastructure and imports resources into it from an existing Library Server. 65310
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Overview and Features Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Virtual Machine Manager (SCVMM) allows you to centralize the configuration and management of virtualization resources used to create and deploy the components of a private cloud. In this video; Rafiq Wayani discusses how SCVMM provides centralized management and control of all components in a virtualized environment. 65307
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Security Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; the Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) uses Run As accounts and User Roles assigned permissions to enforce VMM security. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates user and self-service user roles and privileges restricting access to VMM resources. 65308
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager SQL Server Profiles Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can create deployment profiles for SQL Server. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how to use the Virtual Machine Manager to create a SQL Server deployment profile. 65321
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Virtual Machine Manager Virtual Machines Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2's Virtual Machine Manager (VMM) allows you to create virtual machines. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses the New Virtual Machine Wizard to create and configure a virtual machine; on which he installs Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2. 65311
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Cloud Service Models Rafiq Wayani By provisioning Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 cloud service models; you can maximize the benefits and capabilities of a cloud computing infrastructure according to your needs. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the characteristics of the three cloud service models: Software as a Service (SaaS); Platform as a Service (PaaS); and Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS). 65290
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Private Cloud Business Requirements Rafiq Wayani When using Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you need to consider the various business requirements that make choosing a private cloud over a traditional IT approach a viable option. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the issues that you need to consider when implementing an IT solution and the benefits provided by a private cloud. 65292
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Private Cloud Health and Performance Monitoring Rafiq Wayani Once a private cloud has been provisioned; the Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 suite helps you to monitor the health and performance of the private cloud components; enabling the identification and prevention of failures before they occur. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the resources that require continuous monitoring within a private cloud infrastructure. 65298
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Private Cloud Management Roles Rafiq Wayani When migrating to a cloud-based infrastructure within an organization using Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you should understand the scope of the different private cloud management roles and how to differentiate between them. In this video; Rafiq Wayani compares the Business Unit IT Admin and Datacenter Admin roles in the context of a private cloud environment. 65294
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Private Cloud Overview Rafiq Wayani Microsoft System Center 2012 R2 is a flexible solution that allows you to manage private clouds and maximize the utilization of shared resources in an enterprise environment. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates the advantages of cloud computing; before defining the characteristics of a private cloud and how it can benefit an organization. 65288
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Public vs Private Cloud Rafiq Wayani When developing a strategy for implementing cloud computing with Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you need to consider the benefits and management considerations of both public and private clouds. In this video; Rafiq Wayani compares public clouds with private clouds in terms of manageability; cost; and customization. 65289
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Server App-V Overview Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; Windows Application Virtualization (App-V); allows you to install applications on one platform; which can then be accessed and used by any user with the required privileges; without the user having to install the application on their individual machine. In this video; Rafiq Wayani demonstrates how App-V is applied for use with System Center. 65327
Microsoft System Center 2012 R2: Windows Server 2012 R2 Web Deploy Overview Rafiq Wayani In Microsoft System Center 2012 R2; you can deploy websites; web servers; and web applications that you have already constructed and tested. In this video; Rafiq Wayani uses Web Deploy to discuss deploying packages of existing applications onto different web servers. 65323
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Active Directory Discovery Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (MSCCM) 2012's Active Directory (AD) discovery methods allow you to poll for AD Forest; Group; System and User resources. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to enable a group discovery method in the Administration workspace; use an existing administrator account to sets its scope and polling frequency; and run discovery immediately. 58577
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure and Monitor Component Status Albert Kirkpatrick In Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012; you use the site status interface to access the various system messages and component messages for those systems. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates the use of the site status interface to manage and configure systems and component messages. 58583
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Boundaries and Boundary Groups Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (MSCCM) 2012 boundaries and boundary groups allow you to define the Configuration Manager site. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates using the IP subnet; AD site; IPv6 prefix; and IP address range boundary types; configures a boundary; adds it to a boundary group; and details the implications of using a boundary group for site assignment. 58576
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Compliance Baselines Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 allows administrators to implement compliance using configuration baselines. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to create or import configuration items; categorize the items; specify the settings that should be checked; set automatic remediation of noncompliant rules; then add the configuration item to the baselines and run a report. 58591
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Endpoint Protection Albert Kirkpatrick In Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012; you can configure the endpoint protection policies directly. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates the steps for configuring and managing endpoint protection. 58600
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Hardware Inventory Albert Kirkpatrick In Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012; you use the Hardware inventory service to collect local data queried from the WMI on a managed system. In this video Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates the uses of running a hardware inventory; as well as the steps taken to configure an inventory for specific needs. 58584
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Remote Tools Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 allows administrators to configure and implement Remote Control; Remote Assistance; and Remote Desktop from the Configuration Manager console. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to enable remote tools as a client policy and configure various settings; such as access permissions granted by the user along with notifications of remote access. 58592
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Reporting Services Albert Kirkpatrick In Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012; reporting is done using SQL Server Reporting Services. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to deploy reporting services using the SQL Services Configuration tool and the Site System Roles Wizard. 58582
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Site Backup Albert Kirkpatrick In Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012; you need to set up site backup as part of your disaster recovery plan. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to use the Administration option to configure site backup. 58594
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Software Distribution Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 allows administrators to configure software distribution to clients in a site. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to configure the default client policy; computer agent; servers and site system roles; distribution point; and boundary groups to configure a site client as a distribution point. 58587
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Software Inventory Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 allows administrators to configure a software inventory to retrieve software information from Configuration Manager clients. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to enable software inventory and then schedule; set types; collect pattern metadata and physical data; as well as create consistent naming patterns for software inventories. 58585
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Software Metering Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 allows you to track the usage of software on your local system. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates how to use the Software Metering feature to create tracking rules for software utilization. 58593
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Configure Software Updates Albert Kirkpatrick Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012 allows you to easily manage software updates. In this video; Albert Kirkpatrick demonstrates the process of enabling and configuring the Windows Server Update Service using the Configuration Manager. 58601
Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager 2012: Crea